INSTRUCTION BOOK FOR RADAR EQUIPMENTS NAVY MODELS SR AND SR-A

• Document Type: CREST
• Collection: General CIA Records
• Document Number (FOIA) /ESDN (CREST): CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
• Release Decision: RIFPUB
• Original Classification: K
• Document Page Count: 259
• Document Creation Date: December 23, 2016
• Document Release Date: November 21, 2013
• Sequence Number: 1
• Publication Date: June 13, 1947
• Content Type: REPORT

Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
. NAVSHIPS 900,946
INSTRUCTION BOOK
for
RADAR EQUIPMENTS
NAVY MODELS SR AND SR-a
WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC CORPORATION
2519 Wilkens Avenue Baltimore, Md.
NAVY DEPARTMENT
BUREAU OF SHIPS
CONTRACT NX sr-30306
CONTRACT NXsr-46032
CONTRACT N5sr-7197
Approved by Bu Ships
13 June 1947
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Effective Pages NAVSHIPS 900,946 t:RONT MATTER
A
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE
NUMBERS
CHANGE IN
EFFECT
PAGE
NUMBERS
CHANGE IN
EFFECT
Title page
Original
4-1 to 4-23
Original
A to C
Original
5-0 to 5-15
Original
i to xxiii
Original
6-0 to 6-21
Original
1-0 to 1-48
Original
7-0 to 7-298
Original
2-1 to 2-168
Original
8-1 to 8-223
Original
3-1 to 3-84
Original
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
tl'e/ease 2013/11/2/
900,946 : CIA-RDP67/300341R000
080080001-4
NAVSHIPS
Promulgatini
ADDRESS NAVY DEPARTMENT
BUREAU Of SNIPS
NAVY DEPARTMENT
REFER TO FILE NS. BUREAU OF SHIPS
Section 993-100 . WASHINGTON 25, D. C.
19 June 1947
*To: All Activities concerned with the Installation,
Operation and Maintenance of the Subject Equipment.
Subj: Instruction Book for Radar Equipments, Navy Models
SR and SR-a, NAVSHIPS 900,946.
1. NAVSHIPS 900,946 is the instruction book for the sub-
ject equipment and is in effect upon receipt, superseding
SHIPS 235 and its Supplement. Upon receipt hereof SHIPS
235 and its Supplement shall be destroyed by burning.
2. When superseded by a later edition,
shall be destroyed.
3. Extracts from this publication may be made to facili-
tate the preparation of other Navy Instruction Books and
Handbooks.
this publication
4. Copies of this publication may be obtained from the
nearest District Publications and Printing Office.
E.W. MILLS
Chief of Bureau
FROM BUREAU OF SHIPS
)RiciNAL
Declassified and APProved For Re/ease 2013/11/2/
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Correction Page NAVSH IPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
RECORD OF CORRECTIONS MADE
CHANGE NO.
DATE
SIGNATURE OF OFFICER MAKING CORRECTION
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER NAVSHIPS 900,946 Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Title Page
SECTION I. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. RADAR EQUIPMENTS COVERED 1-1
a. General 1-1
b. SR Equipment 1-1
c. SR-a Equipment 1-1
2. PURPOSE AND BASIC PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 1-1
3. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS 1-3
a. SR System (NXsr-30306) 1-3
b. SR System (NXsr-46032) 1-9
.c. SR-a System 1-9
4. DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR UNITS 1-9
a. Transceiver Console CAY-43ACM (SR Only) 1-9
b. Keyer Unit CAY-67AAD (SR Only) 1-11
c. Monitor Receiver CAY-46AKD 1-12
d. Monitor Scope CAY-55AFD 1-12
e. Transceiver Console CAY-43ADK (SR-a Only) 1-13
J. Modulator CAY-50AGU (SR-a Only) 1-14
g. Indicator Console CAY-46ADJ 1-14
h. Console Receiver CAY-46ADH 1-16
i. PPI Indicators CAY-55ADV and CAY-55ADV-1 1-17
j. Range Scope CAY-55AFB 1-19
k. IFF Coordinator CAY-23AEV 1-20
1. Bearing Indicator CAY-55AFC 1-20
m. General Control Unit CAY-23AEW 1-21
n. Cradle CAY-10313 1-22
o. Rotation Control Unit CAY-50AEB 1-22
p. Servo Amplifier CAY-50AEU 1-23
q. Rectifier Power Unit CAY-20ACY 1-23
r. Cradle CAY-10314 1:23
s. Echo Box Antenna CAY-66AHK 1-23
t. Synchro Unit CM-211103 1-25
u. Amplifier Unit CM-50131 1-25
v. Servo Generators CAY-211192 and CAY-211192A 1-26
w. Voltage Stabilizer CG-301252 1-26
x. Auto-Dehydrator CAKB-10AEK 1-26
y. Antenna Pedestal CAJS-21ACP 1-27
z. Antennas COD/CLP-66AHE and COD/CLP-66AHG 1-29
aa. Motor Generators 1-32
ab. Magnetic Controllers 1-34
ac. Voltage Regulators 1-35
ad. Pushbutton Stations 1-35
ae. Controller Disconnect Line Switch CWU-24429 (NXsr-46032) 1-35
af. Connector Navy Type 49261 (UG-32/U) 1-36
5. REFERENCE DATA 1-36
a. Nomenclature 1-36
b. Contract Number and Date 1-36
c. Contractor 1-36
d. Cognizant Naval Inspector 1-36
e. Number of Packages per Shipment 1-36
J. Cubical Contents and Weight 1-36
g. Transmitter Data 1-37
h. Receiver Data 1-37
i. Power Factor 1-37
j. Power Supply Characteristics 1-37
k. Power Equipment 1-37
1. Heat Dissipation of Major Units 1-38
6. TABLES 1-38
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Contents
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
Paragraph
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Title
SECTION II. THEORY OF OPERATION
Page
1. GENERAL 2-1
2. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SR EQUIPMENT 2-1
a. Transmitting System 2-1
b. Receiving System 2-2
c. Indicating System 2-2
d. Antenna Positioning System 2-7
3. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SR-a EQUIPMENT 2-8
a. Transmitting System "2-8
4. SR TRANSMITTING SYSTEM 2-8
a. General 2-8
b. Keyer Unit CAY-67AAD 2-11
c. Transmitting Oscillator 2-18
d. Duplexer 2-18
e. High Voltage Rectifier 2-23
J. SR Control Circuits 2-24
g. Filament Control Circuits 2-24
h. Main Control Circuit 2-26
i. Plate Voltage Control Circuits 2-27
j. Radiation Control Circuit 2-29
5. SR-a TRANSMITTING SYSTEM 2-30
a. General 2-30
b. Description 2-30
c. Modulator CAY-50AGU 2-32
d. High Voltage Rectifier 2-37
e. Transmitting Oscillator 2-38
f. Control Circuits 2-39
6. R-F TRANSMISSION SYSTEM 2-40
a. General 2-40
b. Antenna Cables 2-40
c. R-F Lines in Antenna Pedestal 2-43
7. RADAR ANTENNAS 2-43
a. General 2-43
b. Blue Antenna 2-43
c. Yellow-Green Antenna 2-45
8. IFF ANTENNAS 2-45
a. General 2-45
b. H.F. IFF Antenna 2-45
c. V.H.F. IFF Antenna 2-45
d. U.H.F. IFF Antenna 2-45
9. ECHO BOX ANTENNA 2-46
10. MONITOR RECEIVER CAY-46ADK 2-46
a. General 2-46
b. R-F Preamplifier 2-47
c. Local Oscillator 2-48
d. Converter 2-48
e. First and Second I-F Amplifiers 2-49
J. Third I-F Amplifier 2-49
g. Fourth I-F Amplifier 2-49
h. Diode Detector 2-50
i. Echo Box 2-51
j. Power Supply 2-52
ii ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER NAVSHIPS 900,946 Contents
Paragraph
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Title Page
SECTION II. THEORY OF OPERATION (Continued)
11. MONITOR SCOPE 2-52
a. General 2-52
b. Description 2-52
c. Trigger Amplifier 2-52
d. Gate Circuit 2-54
e. Sweep Circuit 2-55
J. Video Amplifier 2-56
g. Internal Trigger Generator 2-57
h. Trigger Output Amplifier 2-57
i. Range Switch 2-58
j. Power Supplies 2-58
12. INDICATOR CONSOLE CAY-46ADJ 2-59
a. General 2-59
b. Trigger Circuit 2-59
c. Console Receiver 2-59
d. Range Scope 2-62
e. IFF Coordinator 2-64
J. PPI Indicator 2-65
g. Bearing Indicator 2-65
h. General Control Unit 2-66
i. Termination of Pulse Lines 2-67
13. CONSOLE RECEIVER 2-67
a. General 2-67
b. Anti-jamming Rejection Filters 2-68
c. Variable Selectivity Anti-jamming Circuit 2-68
d. Third I-F Amplifier 2-70
e. Fourth and Fifth I-F Amplifiers 2-73
J. Detector 2-73
g. AVC Anti-jamming Circuits 2-74
h. Balanced Video Amplifier 2-74
i. Video Amplifier and Cathode Follower 2-75
j. Video Limiter and Mixer 2-75
k. Video Output Cathode Followers 2-76
1. Power Supply 2-77
m. Remote Controls 2-77
n. Interconnection Circuits 2-77
14. RANGE SCOPE 2-77
a. General 2-77
b. Gate Circuit 2-79
c. Sweep Circuit 2-81
d. Phantastron Circuit 2-84
e. Range Marker Circuits 2-89
J. Video Circuits 2-91
g. Cathode Ray Tube Circuits 2-94
h. Power Supplies 2-95
15. IFF COORDINATOR 2-96
a. General 2-96
b. Sequence of IFF Operation 2-97
c. Circuits in the IFF Coordinator 2-99
d. Multivibrator 2-99
e. IFF Trigger Circuits 2-101
J. IFF Delay Multivibrator 2-102
g. Mixer Circuit 2-104
h. Switching Circuits 2-105
i. IFF Receiver Remote Controls 2-105
j. Power Supply 2-106
ORIGINAL lii
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Contents NAVSHIPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
iv
Paragraph
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Title
SECTION II. THEORY OF OPERATION (Continued)
16. PPI INDICATOR 2-106
a. Functions of a PPI Indicator 2-106
b. Description of Circuit Functions 2-108
c. Gate Circuit 2-111
d. Sweep Generator 2-114
e. Sweep Amplifier Circuits 2-114
J. High Voltage Power Supply 2-117
g. Range Marker Circuits 2-118
h. Video Circuits 2-120
i. Low Voltage Power Supply 2-122
j. Servo System 2-123
k. Yoke Coil 2-128
1. Drive Gear Train 2-128
m. Servo Gear Train 2-129
n. Servo Operation 2-129
17. GENERAL CONTROL UNIT 2-129
a. General 2-129
b. Transmitter Controls 2-129
c. Indicator Console Switch 2-129
d. Blower Motor 2-131
18. ANTENNA POSITIONING SYSTEM 2-131
a. General 2-131
b. Functional Description 2-131
19. SYNCHRO UNITS 2-133
a. General 2-133
b. Motors and Generators 2-134
c. Control Transformers 2-134
d. Differential Generators 2-134
20. ANTENNA PEDESTAL 2-138
a. General 2-138
b. Synchro Assembly 2-138
c. Rotating Assembly 2-141
d. Collector Ring Assembly 2-141
e. Circuits 2-141
Page
21. SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER 2-141
a. General 2-141
b. Synchro Unit 2-143
c. Electronic Amplifier 2-143
22. BEARING INDICATOR 2-149
a. General 2-149
b. Antenna Positioning Circuits 2-150
c. Bearing Repeater Circuits 2-151
23. ROTATION CONTROL UNIT 2-152
a. General 2-152
b. Servo Amplifier 2-152
c. Rectifier Power Unit 2-156
24. SERVO GENERATOR 2-156
a'. General 2-156
b. Description 2-161
25. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (NXsr-30306) 2-161
a. General 2-161
b. Magnetic Controller CAY-211181 2-161
c. Magnetic Controller CAY-211187 2-162
d. Voltage Regulator CAY-211185 2-165
e. Voltage Stabilizer 2-166
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER NAVSH IPS 900,946
Paragraph
Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Title Page
SECTION II. THEORY OF OPERATION (Continued)
26. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (NXsr-46032) 2-167
a. General 2-167
b. Magnetic Starter 2-167
c. Voltage Regulator 2-168
SECTION III. INSTALLATION AND INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
1. GENERAL 3-1
2. UNPACKING 3-1
3. INSTALLATION OF MODULATOR 3-1
a. General 3-1
b. Installed as a Modification 3-1
c. Installed as Part of SR-a Equipment 3-3
4. INSTALLATION OF TRANSCEIVER 3-3
5. INSTALLATION OF INDICATOR CONSOLE 3-3
a. General 3-3
b. Placing the Indicator Console 3-4
6. INSTALLATION OF ANTENNA AND ANTENNA PEDESTAL 3-4
a. General 3-4
b. Assembly of Antenna to Antenna Pedestal 3-4
c. Assembly of Antenna and Pedestal to Mast 3-21
d. Assembly of V.H.F. IFF Antenna 3-21
e. Assembly of U.H.F. IFF Antenna 3-21
J. Echo Box Antenna 3-25
7. INSTALLATION OF SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER 3-25
a. General 3-25
b. Mounting the Units 3-25
8. INSTALLATION OF ROTATION CONTROL UNIT 3-25
a. General 3-25
b. Mounting Instructions 3-25
9. INSTALLATION OF SERVO GENERATOR 3-26
a. General 3-26
b. Mounting Instructions 3-26
10. INSTALLATION OF VOLTAGE STABILIZER 3-26
11. INSTALLATION OF MOTOR GENERATOR 3-26
12. INSTALLATION OF VOLTAGE REGULATOR 3-26
13. INSTALLATION OF MAGNETIC CONTROLLER 3-26
14. INSTALLATION OF PUSH BUTTON STATION 3-46
15. INSTALLATION OF CONTROLLER DISCONNECT LINE SWITCH 3-46
16. INTERCONNECTION OF MAJOR UNITS 3-46
a. General 3-46
b. Transceiver 3-46
c. Modulator 3-57
d. Indicator Console 3-57
e. Antenna and Antenna Pedestal 3-58
J. Echo Box Antenna 3-58
g. Synchro Amplifier 3-58
h. Rotation Control Unit 3-59
i. Servo Generator 3-59
j. Voltage Stabilizer 3-59
k. Motor Generator 3-59
1. Voltage Regulator 3-59
m. Magnetic Controller 3-59
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Contents
Paragraph
NAVSHIPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Title
SECTION III. INSTALLATION AND INITIAL ADJUSTMENT (Continued)
16. n. Push Button Station 3-59
o. Controller Disconnect Line Switch 3-59
p. Connections to IFF System 3-59
q. IFF Video to Remote PPI Indicators 3-60
r. Connection of Remote PPI Indicators 3-60
s. Wire Number Designation 3-64
17. INITIAL ADJUSTMENTS 3-65
a. General 3-65
b. Adjustment of Motor Generator Voltage 3-65
c. Transceiver Adjustments for the SR System 3-66
d. SR-a Transceiver Adjustments 3-71
e. The Antenna Positioning System Adjustments 3-73
J. Indicator Console Adjustments 3-77
Page
SECTION IV. OPERATION
1. GENERAL 4-1
2. STARTING THE EQUIPMENT 4-1
a. Energizing Power Equipment 4-1
b. Energizing SR Radar System 4-1
c. Energizing SR-a Radar System 4-4
d. Energizing Antenna Positioning System 4-5
3. PRE-OPERATION CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4-6
a. General 4-6
b. Adjustment of Operating Controls 4-6
4. ROUTINE OPERATION 4-14
a. General 4-14
b. Searching Operation 4-14
c. Ranging Operation 4-15
d. Operation Through Jamming 4-17
5. TRANSMITTER TUNING PROCEDURE 4-18
a. General 4-18
b. Tuning the SR Transceiver 4-18
c. Tuning the SR-a Transceiver 4-20
SECTION V. OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE
1. GENERAL 5-0
2. ROUTINE CHECKS 5-0
3. MECHANICAL CHECKS 5-0
4. FUSE REPLACEMENT 5-3
5. DIAL LIGHT REPLACEMENT 5-7
6. TUBE REPLACEMENT (Emergency Only) 5-8
a. General 5-8
b. Locating Defective Tubes 5-9
SECTION VI. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
1. GENERAL 6-0
2. MAINTENANCE TEST SCHEDULE 6-0
3. MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE 6-0
4. ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE 6-1
5. CARE OF BRUSHES 6-2
vi ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER
Paragraph
NAVSHIPS 900,946 Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Title
SECTION VI. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (Continued)
6. LUBRICATION 6-6
a. General. 6-6
b. PPI Indicator 6-16
c. Bearing Indicator 6-16
d. Synchro Generator 6-16
e. Motor Generator 6-16
f. Antenna Pedestal 6-16
g. Transceiver 6-16
h. Rectifier Power Unit 6-17
i. Synchro Amplifier 6-17
j. Keyer Unit 6-17
k. Synchro Units ? 6-17
Page
SECTION VII. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
1. GENERAL 7-1
2. SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING 7-1
a. General 7-1
b. Start-Stop Procedure 7-2
c. Signal Tracing 7-16
3. TROUBLES IN TRANSCEIVER 7-18
a. General 7-18
b. Transmitter Frequency Measurement 7-18
c. Troubles 7-18
4. TROUBLES IN KEYER UNIT 7-21
a. General 7-21
b. Troubles 7-21
5. TROUBLES IN MONITOR RECEIVER 7-22
a. General 7-22
b. Location of Troubles 7-22
6. TROUBLES IN MONITOR SCOPE 7-31
a. General 7-31
b. Location of Troubles 7-31
7. TROUBLES IN MODULATOR 7-31
a. General 7-31
b. Location of Troubles. 7-31
8. TROUBLES IN CONSOLE RECEIVER 7-32
a. General 7-32
b. Location of Troubles 7-32
9. TROUBLES IN RANGE SCOPE 7-32
a. General 7-32
b. Location of Troubles 7-32
10. TROUBLES IN IFF COORDINATOR 7-43
a. General 7-43
b. Location of Troubles 7-43
11. TROUBLES IN PPI INDICATOR 7-44
a. General 7-44
b. Location of Troubles 7-44
12. TROUBLES IN BEARING INDICATOR 7-47
a. General 7-47
13. TROUBLES IN GENERAL CONTROL UNIT 7-47
a. General 7-47
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Contents
Paragraph
NAVSH1PS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Title
SECTION VII. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (Continued)
14. TROUBLES IN ROTATION CONTROL UNIT 7-47
a. General 7-47
b. Location of Troubles 7-47
c. Servo Amplifier 7-48
d. Rectifier Power Unit 7-48
15. TROUBLES IN SERVO GENERATOR 7-55
16. TROUBLES IN SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER 7-55
a. General 7-55
b. Amplifier Unit 7-55
c. Synchro Unit 7-55
17. TROUBLES IN ANTENNA PEDESTAL 7-56
a. General 7-56
b. Location of Troubles 7-56
18. TROUBLES IN POWER EQUIPMENT 7-57
a. General 7-57
b. Location of Troubles 7-57
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE TRANSCEIVER 7-59
a. General 7-59
b. R-F Lines 7-59
c. Filament Transformers 7-63
d. Voltage Regulator Assembly 7-64
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE KEYER UNIT 7-64
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE MONITOR RECEIVER 7-64
a. General 7-64
b. Echo Box 7-65
c. Lighthouse Tube Sockets 7-65
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE MONITOR SCOPE 7-66
a. General 7-66
b. Cathode Ray Tube 7-66
23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE MODULATOR 7-66
a. General 7-66
24. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE CONSOLE RECEIVER 7-66
25. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE RANGE SCOPE 7-67
a. ,General 7-67
Li. Changing Cathode Ray Tube 7-67
c. Replacing Helipot 7-69
d. Servicing Counter Gear Train 7-69
26. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE IFF COORDINATOR 7-71
a. General 7-71
Page
27. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN PPI INDICATOR 7-71
a. Replacing Cathode Ray Tube 7-71
Li. Servicing the PPI Assembly 7-72
c. Care of the PPI Assembly 7-76
28, MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE BEARING INDICATOR 7-78
a. Removal of Synchro Units 7-78
Li. Removal of Slewing Mechanism 7-79
c. Servicing of Slewing Mechanism 7-81
29. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE GENERAL CONTROL UNIT 7-82
30. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE ROTATION CONTROL UNIT 7-82
a. General 7-82
Li. Removal of Dry Disc Rectifiers 7-82
c. Removal of Fan and Motor Assembly 7-83
VIII ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER NAVSHIPS 900,946
Paragraph
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Title
SECTION VII. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (Continued)
31. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE SERVO GENERATOR 7-83
Contents
Page
32. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN THE SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER 7-83
a. General 7-83
b. Adjustments in Lower Compartment 7-83
33. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN ANTENNA PEDESTAL 7-84
a. General. 7-84
b. Synchrotie Assembly 7-84
c. Synchrotie Bracket Assembly 7-85
d. One-to-one Synchrotie Gear Assembly 7-91
e. Idler Gear Assembly 7-91
J. 36-to-1 Synchrotie Gear Assembly 7-93
g. 180-Tooth Synchrotie Gear on Main Housing 7-93
h. Backlash Adjustment of Synchrotie Gear Train 7-95
i. Brush Block Assembly 7-96
j. Removing Antenna Assembly 7-97
k. Removing Drive Unit 7-97
1. Removing Ring Gear and Slip Ring Assembly 7-103
m. Reassembling Drive Unit 7-108
n. Checking Backlash in Drive Unit Gear Train 7-114
o. Ship's Head Marker Microswitch 7-115
p. Disassembly of IFF Transmission Line 7-115
q. Disassembly of R-F Lines in Pedestal 7-115
34. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN POWER EQUIPMENT 7-121
a. General 7-121
b. Line Disconnect Switch 7-121
c. Magnetic Controllers
d. Pushbutton Station
e. Motor Generator
f. Voltage Regulator
g. Voltage Stabilizer
35. WINDING DATA
36. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN
a. General
b. Relays
c. Limit Switches
d. Tuning the SR Transmitter
e. Tuning the SR-a Transmitter
37. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN
a. General
b. Alignment
38. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN
a. General
b. I-F Amplifier Alignment
c. Alignment of Rejection Filters
7-121
7-121
7-121
7-122
7-122
7-122
TRANSCEIVER 7-122
7-122
7-122
7-123
7-123
7-128
MONITOR RECEIVER 7-129
7-129
7-129
CONSOLE RECEIVER 7-130
7-130
7-130
7-130
39. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN RANGE SCOPE 7-132
a. General 7-132
b. Range Marker Calibration 7-132
c. Sweep Length Adjustment 7-132
d. IFF Sweep Adjustment 7-132
e. Focus Balance Adjustment 7-132
f. Phantastron Adjustment 7-134
g. Radar Video Frequency Response 7-135
h. IFF Video Frequency Response 7-135
40. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN IFF COORDINATOR 7-137
a. General 7-137
b. IFF Bias Adjustment 7-137
c. IFF Delay Adjustment 7-137
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
ix
Contents
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Concluded)
Paragraph Title
SECTION VII. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (Continued)
41. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN PPI INDICATOR
a. General
b. Intensity Adjustment
c. Focus Coil Adjustment
d. Preliminary Gate Adjustment
Page
7-137
7-137
7-138
7-138
7-138
e. Preliminary Sweep Length Adjustment
7-138
J. Marker Calibration
7-139
g. Gate and Sweep Lengths, Final Adjustment
7-139
h. Anti-hunt Adjustment
7-139
i. Orientation with Radar Antenna
7-140
j. Video Frequency Response
7-140
42. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN GENERAL CONTROL UNIT
7-140
43. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN BEARING INDICATOR
7-140
a. General
7-140
b. Resetting Indicator Dials
7-140
c. Slewing Motor Speed Adjustment
7-140
44. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN ROTATION CONTROL UNIT
7-141
a. General
7-141
b. Unmodified Rotation Control Units
7-141
c. Modified Rotation Control Units
7-142
45. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN SERVO GENERATOR
7-142
46. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER UNIT
7-142
a. General
7-142
b. Anti-hunt Adjustment
7-142
47. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN ANTENNA PEDESTAL
7-143
a. General
7-143
b. Synchro Adjustments
7-143
48. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS IN POWER EQUIPMENT
7-144
a. General
7-144
b. Magnetic Controllers
7-144
c. Voltage Regulators
7-144
d. Motor Generator
7-144
SECTION VIII. PARTS AND SPARE PARTS LISTS
(See List of Tables)
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER NAVSHIPS 900,946 Illustrations
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
Title
SECTION I. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Page
1-1
Navy Model SR and SR-a Radar Equipment
1-0
1-2
Simplified Block Diagram of SR System
1-5
1-3
Simplified Block Diagram of SR-a System
1-7
1-4
Transceiver Console CAY-43ACM (SR)
1-10
1-5
Oscillator Assembly
1-11
1-6
Keyer Unit CAY-67AAD
1-11
1-7
Monitor Receiver CAY-46ADK
1-12
1-8
Monitor Scope CAY-55AFD
1-12
1-9
Transceiver Console CAY-43ADK (SR-a Modified)
1-13
1-10
Modulator CAY-50AGU
1-14
1-11
Indicator Console CAY-46ADJ
1-15
1-12
Console Receiver CAY-46ADH
1-16
1-13
PPI Indicator CAY-55ADV (Manual Cursor)
1-17
1-14
PPI Indicator CAY-55ADV-1 (Geared Cursor)
1-18
1-15
Range Scope CAY-55AFB
1-19
1-16
IFF Coordinator CAY-23AEV
1-20
1-17
Bearing Indicator CAY-55AFC
1-21
1-18
General Control Unit CAY-23AEW
1-21
1-19
Rotation Control Unit CAY-50AEB
1-22
1-20
Servo Amplifier CAY-50AEU
1-23
1-21
Rectifier Power Unit CAY-20ACY
1-23
1-22
Echo Box Antenna CAY-66AHK
1-23
1-23
Synchro Amplifier
1-24
1-24
Servo Generator CAY-211192 or CAY-211192A
1-25
1-25
Voltage Stabilizer CG-301252
1-26
1-26
Auto Dehydrator CAKB-10AEK
1-27
1-27
Antenna Pedestal CAJS-21ACP
1-27
1-28
Blue Antenna COD-66AHE or CLP-66AHE with V.H.F. Antenna COD-66AHH or
CLP-66AHH or with H.F. Antenna COD-66AHG or CLP-66AHG or Yellow
Green Antenna COD-66AHF or CLP-66AHF with H.F. Antenna COD-66AHG
or CLP-66AHG
1-30
1-29
V.H.F. Antenna COD-66AHH or CLP-66AHH or H.F. Antenna COD-66AHG or
CLP-66AHG and U.H.F. Antenna COD-66AHJ or CLP-66AHJ
1-31
1-30
Motor Generator CAY-211182, CAY-211188 or CAY-211326
1-33
1-31
Magnetic Controllers CAY-211181, CAY-211187, or CAY-211325
1-34
1-32
Voltage Regulators CAY-211185 or CAY-211185A
1-35
1-33
Pushbutton Stations CAY-211186 and CAY-24299
1-35
1-34
Controller Disconnect Line Switch CWU-24429
1-36
1-35
Connector UG-32/U Navy Type 49261
1-36
SECTION II. THEORY OF OPERATION
2-1
SR Radar Equipment, Complete Block Diagram
2-3
2-2
SR-a Radar Equipment, Complete Block Diagram
2-5
2-3
SR Transmitting System, Block Diagram
2-9
2-4
Unterminated Artificail Line
2-11
2-5
Terminated Artificial Line
2-12
2-6
Artificial Line with Slope Compensation
2-13
2-7
Basic Circuit of Artificial Line in Keyer Unit
2-13
2-8
Keyer Unit, Schematic Diagram
2-15
2-9
Geneva Drive for Pulse Width Switch
2-17
2-10
SR Transmitting Oscillator Circuits, Simplified Diagram
2-19
2-11
Duplexer, Simplified Schematic Diagram
2-22
2-12
SR High Voltage Rectifier, Simplified Schematic
2-24
2-13
SR Transmitter Filament Control Circuits Simplified Diagram
2-25
2-14
SR Main Transmitter Control Circuit Simplified Diagram
2-26
2-15
SR Plate Voltage Control Circuit, Simplified Diagram
2-28
2-16
SR Radiation Control Circuit, Simplified Diagram
2-29
2-17
SR-a Transmitting System, Block Diagram
2-31
2-18
Trigger Circuits in Modulator
2-33
2-19
Low Voltage Rectifier in Modulator
2-34
2-20
Pulse Forming Circuits in Modulator
2-35
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
xi
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Illustrations
NAVSHIPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure Title Page
SECTION II. THEORY OF OPERATION (Continued)
2-21
Simplified Pulse Circuit
2-36
2-22
SR-a High Voltage Rectifier in Transceiver
2-38
2-23
SR-a Transmitting Oscillator
2-39
2-24
SR-a High Voltage and Radiation Control Circuits
2-41
2-25
SR R.F. Transmission System and IFF Antenna
2-44
2-26
SR Radar Antenna
2-45
2-27
U.H.F. IFF Antennas
2-46
2-28
Echo Box Antenna
2-46
2-29
Monitor Receiver, Block Diagram .
2-47
2-30
R-F Circuits in Monitor Receiver .
2-48
2-31
First I-F Amplifier in Monitor Receiver
2-49
2-32
Third I-F Amplifier in Monitor Receiver
2-50
2-33
Fourth I-F Amplifier and Diode Detector in Monitor Receiver
2-50
2-34
Echo Box Circuits in Monitor Receiver
2-51
2-35
Power Supply in Monitor Receiver
2-52
2-36
Monitor Scope, Block Diagram
2-53
2-37
Trigger Amplifier in Monitor Scope
2-53
2-38
Gate Circuits in Monitor Scope ,
2-54
2-39
Sweep Circuit in Monitor Scope
2-55
2-40
Video Amplifier in Monitor Scope
2-56
2-41
Internal Trigger Generator in Monitor Scope
2-57
2-42
Trigger Output Amplifier in Monitor Scope
2-57
2-43
Low Voltage Power Supply in Monitor Scope
2-58
2-44
High Voltage Power Supply and Cathode Ray Tube in Monitor Scope
2-59
2-45
Indicator Console Block Diagram
2-60
2-46
Pulse Line Terminations
2-67
2-47
Console Receiver Block Diagram
2-68
2-48
Anti-Jamming Filters
2-69
2-49
Variable Selectivity Anti-Jamming Circuits
2-69
2-50
Third I-F Amplifier
2-70
2-51
Fourth and Fifth I-F Amplifiers and AVC Tube
2-71
2-52
Detector and Balanced Video Circuits
2-73
2-53
Video Amplifier and Cathode Follower
2-75
2-54
Video Output and Cathode Follower
2-76
2-55
Receiver Power Supply
2-77
2-56
Range Scope, Block Diagram
2-78
2-57
Gate Circuit in Range Scope
2-79
2-58
Sweep Circuit in Range Scope
2-82
2-59
Phantastron Circuit in Range Scope
2-84
2-60
Adjustment Plot of Slope Controls
2-88
2-61
Adjustment Plot of ZERO SET Controls
2-88
2-62
Range Marker Circuits in Range Scope
2-90
2-63
Typical Range Scope Presentations
2-91
2-64
Video Circuits in Range Scope
2-92
2-65
Radar and IFF Blocking Action in Video Circuits
2-93
2-66
Cathode Ray Tube and High Voltage Supply Circuits
2-94
2-67
Low Voltage Power Supply Circuit
2-95
2-68
IFF Coordinator, Block Diagram
2-96
2-69
Waveforms of IFF Operation with a Radar System
2-98
2-70
Flip Flop Multivibrator in IFF Coordinator
2-100
2-71
2-72
IFF Trigger Circuit in IFF Coordinator
IFF Trigger Delay Multivibrator in IFF Coordinator
2:10
20 32
1
2-73
Mixer Circuit in IFF Coordinator
2-104
2-74
Switching Circuits in IFF Coordinator
2 10 5
2-75
Power Supply in IFF Coordinator
2-106
2-76
Basic Principles of PPI Ranging
2-107
2-77
Effect of Beam Width on Appearance of PPI Target
2-108
2-78
PPI Indicator, Block Diagram
2-109
2-79
Gate Circuit in PPI Indicator
2111
2-80
Sweep Generator in PPI Indicator
2 1 3
2-81
Sweep Amplifiers in PPI Indicator
2-115
2-82
Development of Peaked Sawtooth Voltage
2-116
xii ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER NAVSHIPS 900,946 Illustrations
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
FigurePage
Title
SECTION II. THEORY OF OPERATION (Continued)
2-83
Cathode Ray Tube and High Voltage Power Supply
2-118
2-84
Range Marker Circuits in PPI Indicator
2-119
2-85
Video Circuits in PPI Indicator
2-121
2-86
Low Voltage Power Supply in PPI Indicator
2-122
2-87
PPI Servo System, Block Diagram
2-124
2-88
PPI Servo System
2-125
2-89
Phase Relationships in Anti-Hunt Network
2-126
2-90
PPI Servo System, Mechanical Diagram
2-128
2-91
General Control Unit, Schematic Diagram
2-130
2-92
Antenna Positioning System, Block Diagram
2-132
2-93
Synchro Units, Basic Principles
2-135
2-94
Antenna Pedestal
2-137
2-95
2-96
Antenna Pedestal Gear Schematic
Antenna Pedestal, Schematic Diagram
2-1 3398
2
2-97
Relayed Compass Voltage Circuits, Simplified Diagram
2-142
2-98
Servo Amplifier in Synchro Amplifier, Simplified Diagram
2-99
Equivalent Input Circuit of Synchro Amplifier
22-14445
2-100
Equivalent Circuit for Positive One-speed or 36-speed Voltages
2-145
2-101
Equivalent Circuit for Negative 36-speed or One-speed Voltages
2-145
2-102
Voltage Relationships in Input Circuit of Synchro Amplifier
2-146
2-103
Bearing Indicator, Schematic Diagram
2-147
2-104
Bearing Indicator Antenna Positioning Circuits
2-150
2-105
Bearing Indicator, Antenna Bearing Repeater Circuits
215 1
2-106
Servo Amplifier Simplified Diagram
2 5 3
2-107
Servo Amplifier Complete Schematic Diagram
2-157
2-108
Rectifier Power Unit, Complete Schematic Diagram
2-16593
2-109
Primary Power Circuits (115 V.D.C.)
2
2-110
Magnetric Controller CAY-211187 (230 V.D.C.)
2-165
2-111
Voltage Stabilizer, Simplified Diagram
2-167
SECTION III. INSTALLATION AND INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
3-1
Interconnection Panel in Transceiver, CAY-43ADK
3-1
3-2
Modulator CAY-50AGU Outline Mounting Dimensions
3-2
3-3
Transceiver CAY-43ACM, CAY-43 ADK Outline Diagram
3-5
3-4
Indicator Console, Outline Diagram
3-7
3-5
Console Receiver Outline Diagram
3-9
3-6
Range Scope Outline Diagram
3-11
3-7
IFF Coordinator Outline Diagram
3-13
3-8
PPI Indicator, Outline Diagram
3-15
3-9
Bearing Indicator Outline Diagram
3-17
3-10
General Control Unit Outline Diagram
3-19
3-11
Assembly of Antenna to Antenna Pedestal
3-22
3-12
Antenna and Pedestal Outline Diagram
3-23
3-13
Echo Box Antenna, Outline Diagram
3-27
3-14
Synchro Amplifier, Outline Diagram
3-29
3-15
Rotation Control Unit, Outline Diagram
3-31
3-16
Servo Generator, Outline Diagram
3-33
3-17
Voltage Stabilizer, Outline Diagram
3-35
3-18
Motor Generator CAY-211182 and CAY-211188, Outline Diagram
3-37
3-19
Motor Generator CAY-211.326, Outline Diagram
3-39
3-20
Voltage Regulators, CAY-211185 and CAY-211185A Outline Diagrams
3-41
3-21
Magnetric Controllers CAY-211181 and CAY-211187 Outline Diagrams
3-43
3-22
Magnetric Controller CAY-211325 Outline Diagram
3-45
3-23
Push Button Station CAY-211186 and CAY-24299 Outline Diagram
3-45
3-24
Controller Disconnect Line Switch Outline Diagram
3-46
3-25
Master Interconnection Diagram
3-47
3-26
R.F. Cable, Type RG-20/U Assembly Diagram
3-49
ORIGINAL xiii
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Illustrations NAVSHIPS 900,946 ? FRONT MATTER
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
SECTION , III. INSTALLATION AND INITIAL ADJUSTMENT (Continued)
Page
3-27
R.F. Connector, Type UG-21/U, Assembly to R.F. Cable, Type RG-10/U or RG-12/U
3-51
3-28
R.F. Connector, Type UG-36/U, Assembly to R.F. Cable, Type RG-27/U
3-53
3-29
R.F. Connector, Type UG-32/U Assembly to IFF Transmission Line
3-55
3-30
Pedestal Connection of IFF and Radar Transmission Cables
3-57
3-31
Indicator Console, Frame Wiring Diagram
3-61
3-32
RG-12/U Coaxial Cable, Assembly of Connecting Lugs
3-63
3-33
Voltage Regulator, Operating Controls
3-66
3-34
Transceiver, Operating Controls
3-67
3-35
Limit Switch and Cam Assembly in Transceiver
3-68
3-36
Keyer Pulse Waveform Development
3-68
3-37
Keyer Pulse Waveforms
3-69
3-38
Monitor Scope, Focus Balancing Control
3-71
3-39
Duplexer Spark Gap Adjustments
3-71
3-40
Time Delay Relay SR-a Modulator
3-72
3-41
Modulator Front View
3-72
3-42
Operating Controls on Indicator Console
3-73
3-43
Antenna Pedestal, Showing Synchro Inspection Door
3-74
3-44
Rotation Control Unit, Front Panel
3-75
3-45
Mounting of Synchros in Bearing Indicator
3-76
3-46
Internal Controls of Servo Amplifier
3-77
3-47
PPI Alignment Controls
3-78
3-48
PPI Focus Coil Adjustment
3-78
3-49
PPI Drive Motor
3-79
3-50
Anti-hunt Control on PPI Indicator
3-79
3-51
Adjustment of Synchro Control Transformer
3-80
3-52
IFF Line Adjustment Control in Range Scope
3-81
3-53
Controls on Left Hand Side of Range Scope Chassis
3-81
3-54
Plot of Range vs. Counter Reading
3-82
3-55
Bias Voltage Control on IFF Coordinator
3-83
3-56
Trigger Delay Control on IFF Coordinator
3-84
3-57
Console Receiver Anti-jam Controls
3-84
SECTION IV. OPERATION
4-1
Magnetic Starters
4-1
4-2
Voltage Regulator, Operating Controls
4-2
4-3
Transceiver, Operating Controls
4-3
4-4
Keyer Unit, Operating Controls
4-4
4-5
Monitor Scope, Operating Controls
4-4
4-6
General Control Unit, Operating Controls
4-5
4-7
PPI Indicator, Operating Controls
4-5
4-8
Rotation Unit, Operating Controls
4-6
4-9
Synchro Amplifier, Operating Controls
4-6
4-10
Monitor Receiver, Operating Controls
4-7
4-11
Console Receiver, Operating Controls
4-8
4-12
Bearing Indicator, Operating Controls
4-9
4-13
IFF Coordinator, Operating Controls
4-10
4-14
Range Scope, Operating Controls
4-11
4-15
Range Markers on Range Scope
4-12
4-16
Range Step on Range Scope
4-12
4-17
IFF Sweep on Range Scope
4-12
4-18
IFF Target on Range Scope
4-12
4-19
Targets and Range Markers on PPI Scope
4-15
4-20
Keyer Wave Forms
4-16
4-21
Modulator Adjustments
4-20
xiv
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER
Figure
NAVSHIPS 900,946 Illustrations
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Title
SECTION V. OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE
Page
54
Transceiver, Fuses
5-3
5-2
Monitor Scope, Fuses
5-3
5-3
Monitor Receiver, Fuses
5-3
5-4
Rectifier Power Unit, Fuses
5-3
5-5
Console Receiver, Fuses
5-4
5-6
IFF Coordinator Fuses
5-4
5-7
Modulator, Fuses
5-4
5-8
Synchro Amplifier, Fuses
5-4
5-9
PPI Indicator Fuses
5-4
5-10
Servo Amplifier, Fuses
5-4
5-11
Bearing Indicator, Fuses
5-5
5-12
Range Scope, Fuses
5-5
5-13
Dial Lamps in Geared Cursor
5-7
5-14
Dial Lamps in Manual Cursor
5-7
5-15
Dial Lamp Behind MILES Window on PPI Indicator.
5-7
5-16
Dial Lamp Behind RANGE-YARDS Window on Range Scope
5-8
5-17
Dial Lamp Behind MILES Window on Range Scope
5-8
5-18
Dial Lamp in Bearing Indicator
5-8
5-19
Transceiver, Tube Locations
5-9
5-20
Monitor Scope, Tube Locations
5-10
5-21
Monitor Receiver, Tube Locations
5-10
5-22
Modulator, Tube Locations
5-11
5-23
Console Receiver, Tube Locations
5-11
5-24
PPI Indicator, Tube Locations
5-12
5-25
Range Scope, Tubes on Top of Chassis
5-12
5-26
Range Scope, Tubes on Bottom of Chassis
5-13
5-27
IFF Coordinator, Tube Locations
5-14
5-28
General Control Unit, Location of Spare Tubes
5-14
5-29
Servo Amplifier, Tube Locations
5-15
5-30
Synchro Amplifier, Tube Locations
5-15
SECTION VI: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
6-1
Air Filter in Transceiver
6-0
6-2
Slewing Motor Brushes in Bearing Indicator
6-2
6-3
Replacing Brushes in Servo Generator
6-2
6-4
Replacing Brushes in Motor-Generator
6-3
6-5
Replacing Brushes in Antenna Drive Motor
6-3
6-6
Brushes in Antenna Pedestal
6-4
6-7
Brushes and Slip Rings on PPI Assembly
6-5
6-8
Brush Assemblies in Synchro Amplifier
6-6
6-9
Lubrication of Geared Cursor
6-7
6-10
Lubrication of PPI Assembly
6-8
6-11
Lubrication of Bearing Indicator
6-9
6-12
Lubrication of Servo Generator and Motor Generator
6-10
6-13
Lubrication of Antenna Pedestal
6-11
6-14
Lubrication of Transceiver
6-12
6-15
Lubrication of Rectifier Power Unit
6-13
6-16
Lubrication of Synchro Amplifier
6-14
6-17
Lubrication of Keyer Unit
6-15
SECTION VII. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
7-1
Primary Power Distribution Diagram SR Equipment
7-2
7-2
Primary Power Distribution Diagram, SR-a Equipment
7-5
7-3
Servicing Block Diagram, SR and SR-a Equipment
7-7
7-4
Servicing Block Diagram, Antenna Positioning System
7-9
7-5
External Cabling Diagram SR and SR-a Equipment
7-11
7-6
Transceiver, Troubleshooting Chart
7-19
7-7
Switch and Cam Assembly on Transceiver
7-21
7-8
Keyer Unit, Troubleshooting Chart
7-23
7-9
Monitor Receiver, Troubleshooting Chart
7-25
ORIGINAL xv
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Illustrations
NAVSHIPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
FigurePage
Title
SECTION VII. COIL:ECTIVE MAINTENANCE (Continued)
7-10
Monitor Scope, Troubleshooting Chart
7-27
7-11
Modulator, Troubleshooting Chart
7-29
7-12
Console Receiver, Troubleshooting Chart
7-33
7-13
Waveforms in the Indicator Console
7-35
7-14
Range Scope, Troubleshooting Chart
7-37
7-15
IFF Coordinator, Troubleshooting Chart
7-39
7-16
PPI Indicator, Troubleshooting Chart
7-41
7-17
PPI Indicator Test Points
7-46
7-18
Rotation Control Unit, Troubleshooting Chart
7-49
7-19
Synchro Amplifier, Troubleshooting Chart
7-51
7-20
Antenna Pedestal, Troubleshooting Chart
7-53
7-21
Brush Block Assembly in Antenna Pedestal
7-56
7-22
Transceiver R-F Line, Exploded View
7-58
7-23
R.F. Line Assembly in Transceiver
7-59
7-24
Disassembly of Duplexers and U-Section
7-60
7-25
Disassembly of Oscillator Line
7-61
7-26
Removal of Oscillator Line
7-61
7-27
Disassembly of Antenna Line and Cable
7-62
7-28
Removal of Antenna Line
7-62
7-29
Removal of Upper Duplexer Conductors and Elbow Conductor
7-62
7-30
Removal of U-shaped Conductor
7-63
7-31
Duplexer Spark Gaps
7-63
7-32
Disassembly of Lighthouse Tube Sockets in Monitor Receiver
7-65
7-33
Removal of Cathode Ray Tube in Monitor Scope
7-65
7-34
Removing Bezel from Range Scope
7-66
7-35
Disconnecting Cathode Ray Tube in Range Scope
7-67
7-36
Pushing Cathode Ray Tube Forward in Range Scope
7-68
7-37
Removing Cathode Ray Tube from Range Scope
7-68
7-38
Removing Helipot from Range Scope
7-69
7-39
Counter Gear Train, Schematic Diagram
7-69
7-40
Counter Gear Train, Exploded
7-70
7-41
Removing Range Step Switch from Range Scope
7-71
7-42
Disconnecting Cathode Ray Tube in PPI Indicator
7-71
7-43
Removing Manually Operated Cursor
7-72
7-44
Geared Cursor in Position to Permit Removal of Cathode Ray Tube
7-72
7-45
Removing Cathode Ray Tube from PPI Indicator
7-72
7-46
Replacing Yoke Coil Brushes
7-72
7-47
Removing Focus Coil
7-73
7-48
Removing Synchro Drive Gear
7-73
7-49
Removing PPI Tube Shield and Retaining Ring
7-73
7-50
PPI Assembly, Exploded View
7-74
7-51
Removing Yoke Coil and Bearings
7-75
7-52
Removing PPI Assembly from Chassis
7-76
7-53
Disassembly of Universal Coupling
7-77
7-54
Removing Geared Cursor from PPI Indicator
7-77
7-55
Geared Cursor, Exploded View
7-77
7-56
Bearing Indicator, Bezel Removed
7-78
7-57
Bearing Indicator, Dial Index Removed
7-79
7-58
Removing Bearing Indicator Dial
7-79
7-59
Bearing Indicator, Synchro Unit Removed
7-80
7-60
Removing Slewing Mechanism from Bearing Indicator
7-80
7-61
Slewing Mechanism, Exploded View
7-81
7-62
Fan and Fan Motor, Exploded View
7-82
7-63
Dry Disc Rectifier in Rectifier Power Unit
7-82
7-64
Synchro Adjustments in Synchro Amplifier
7-84
7-65
Antenna Pedestal Tools
7-85
7-66
Antenna Pedestal, Right Side View
7-86
7-67
Antenna Pedestal, Cut-away View of Right Side
7-87
7-68
Antenna Pedestal, Cut-away View of Left Side
7-88
7-69
Synchrotie Bracket Assembly, Disassembled View
7-89
7-70
One-to-One Synchrotie Gear Shaft Assembly 0-1384
7-90
7-71
Idler Gear Shaft Assembly 0-1385
7-92
xvi ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER
Figure
NAVSHIPS 900,946 Illustrations
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Title Page
SECTION VII. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (Continued)
7-72 36-to-1 Synchrotie Gear Shaft Assembly 0-1386 7-94
7-73 Brush Assemblies 7-96
7-74 Drive Gear Train, Sectional View 7-98
7-75 Drive Motor Assembly 7-99
7-76 Motor Shaft and Coupling Assembly 0-1381 7-100
7-77 Internal Transmission Section 0-1395
7-101
7-78 Pedestal Drive Assembly 0-1383
7-79 Slip Ring Assembly 0-1393 77:021103
7-80 Pivot Post Assembly 0-1391 7-105
7-81 Ring Gear 0-1392 and Slip Ring Assembly 0-1393 7-106
7-82 Bevel Gear Back-up Bearing and Eccentric Shaft 7-109
7-83 Bevel Gear Shaft Assembly Dimensions 7-110
7-84 Alignment of Reduction Gear Bearings
7-111
7-85 Intermediate Transmission Housing, Exploded View 7.-1111
13
7-86 Intermediate Transmission Housing Assembly 7-114
7-87 Disassembly of IFF Transmission Line 7-116
7-88 RF Lines in Antenna Pedestal, Schematic Diagram 7-117
7-89 RF Lines in Antenna Pedestal, Exploded View 7-118
7-90 Disconnecting RF Lines at Base of Pedestal 7-119
7-91 Disassembly of R-F Inner Line at T-joint in Base of Pedestal 7-119
7-92 Disassembly of Rotating Joint 7-119
7-93 Removing Inner Conductors from Pedestal 7-119
7-94 Removing Lines from Base of Pedestal 7-120
7-95 Preparation for Removal of Outer Conductor 7-120
7-96 Removing Outer Conductor 7:2 31120
7-97 Overload Relay in Transceiver 7
7-98 Transceiver Operating Controls 7.-112 524
7-99 Keyer Pulse Waveform Development 7
7-100 Keyer Pulse Waveforms 7-126
7-101 Monitor Scope, Focus Balancing Control 7-127
7-102 Time Delay Relay in Modulator. 7-128
7-103 Modulator, Front View 7-129
7-104 Monitor Receiver, Alignment Controls 7-130
7-105 Console Receiver, Alignment Controls 7-1331
7-106 Range Scope, Bottom View 743
7-107 IFF Line Adjust Control 7-134
7-108 Range Scope Controls on Left Side of Chassis 7-134
7-109 Plot of Range vs. Counter Readings 7-136
7-110 Bias Voltage Control in IFF Coordinator 7-137
7-111 Trigger Delay Control in IFF Coordinator 7-137
7-112 Alignment Controls in PPI Indicator 7-138
7-113 Focus Coil Adjustment in PPI Indicator
7-114 Drive Motor in PPI Indicator 77:113398
7-115 Anti-Hunt Control in PPI Indicator 7-139
7-116 Synchro Transformer Adjustment in PPI Indicator 7-140
7-117 Synchro Adjustment in Bearing Indicator 7-141
7-118 Internal Controls of Servo Amplifier 7-142
7-119 Adjustments in Synchro Amplifier 7-142
7-120 Transceiver Console, CAY-43ACM, Schematic Diagram 7-165
7-121 Transceiver Console, Transmitting Oscillator, CAY-43ACM Schematic Diagram 7-167
7-122 Transceiver Console, CAY-43ACM, Wiring Diagram 7-169
7-123 Transceiver Console, CAY-43ADK, Schematic Diagram 7-171
7-124 Transceiver Console, CAY-43ADK, Transmitting Oscillator, Schematic Diagram 7-173
7-125 Transceiver Console, CAY-43ADK, Wiring Diagram 7-175
7-126 Keyer Unit, CAY-67AAD, Schematic Diagram 7-177
7-127 Keyer Unit, CAY-67AAD, Wiring Diagram 7-179
7-128 Monitor Receiver, CAY-46AKD, Voltage and Resistance Chart 7-181
7-129 Monitor Receiver, CAY-46AKD, Schematic Diagram 7-183
7-130 Monitor Receiver, CAY-46AKD, Power Supply Wiring Diagram 7-185
7-131 Monitor Receiver, CAY-46ADK, Wiring Diagram 7-187
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
xvii
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Illustrations
NAVSHIPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Figure
Title
SECTION VII. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (Continued)
Page
7-132
Monitor Scope, CAY-55AFD, Voltage and Resistance Chart
7-189
7-133
Monitor Scope, CAY-55AFD, Schematic Diagram
7-191
7-134
Monitor Scope, CAY-55AFD, Wiring Diagram
7-193
7-135
Modulator, CAY-50AGU, Voltage and Resistance Chart
7-195
7-136
Modulator, CAY-50AGU, Serial #1 to 50, Schematic Diagram
7-197
7-137
Modulator, CAY-50AGU, Serial #1 to 50, Wiring Diagram
7-199
7-138
Modulator, CAY-50AGU, Serial #51 and Above, Schematic Diagram
7-201
7-139
Modulator, CAY-50AGU, Serial #51 and Above Wiring Diagram
7-203
7-140
Indicator Console, CAY-46ADJ, Frame Wiring Diagram
7-205
7-141
Indicator Console, CAY-46ADJ, Interconnection Diagram
7-207
7-142
Console Receiver, CAY-46ADH, Voltage and Resistance Chart
7-209
7-143
Console Receiver, CAY-46ADH, Schematic Diagram
7-211
7-144
Console Receiver, CAY-46ADH, Floating Chassis Wiring Diagram
7-213
7-145
Console Receiver, CAY-46ADH, Power Supply and Video Wiring Diagram
7-215
7-146
PPI Indicators, CAY-55ADV and CAY-55ADV1, Voltage and Resistance Chart,
4 Mile Range
7-217
7-147
PPI Indicators, CAY-55ADV and CAY-55ADV1, Voltage and Resistance Chart,
20 Mile Range
7-219
7-148
PPI Indicators, CAY-55ADV and CAY-55ADV1, Voltage and Resistance Chart,
80 Mile Range
7-221
7-149
PPI Indicators, CAY-55ADV and CAY-55ADV1, Voltage and Resistance Chart,
200 Mile Range
7-223
7-150
PPI Indicators, CAY-55ADV and CAY-55ADV1, Schematic Diagram
7-225
7-151
PPI Indicators, CAY-55ADV and CAY-55ADV1, Wiring Diagram
7-227
7-152
Range Scope, CAY-55AFB, Voltage and Resistance Chart, 4 Mile Range
7-229
7-153
Range Scope, CAY-55AFB, Voltage and Resistance Chart, 20 Mile Range
7-231
7-154
Range Scope, CAY-55AFB, Voltage and Resistance Chart, 80 Mile Range
7-233
7-155
Range Scope, CAY-55AFB, Voltage and Resistance Chart, 200 Mile Range
7-235
7-156
Range Scope, CAY-55AFB, Schematic Diagram
2
737
7-157
Range Scope, CAY-55AFB, Wiring Diagram
7-239
7-158
IFF Coordinator, CAY-23AEV, Voltage and Resistance Chart
7-159
IFF Coordinator, CAY-23AEV, Schematic Diagram
77:242431
7-160
IFF Coordinator, CAY-23AEV, Wiring Diagram
7-245
7-161
Bearing Indicator, CAY-55AFC, Schematic Diagram
7-247
7-162
Bearing Indicator, CAY-55AFC, Wiring Diagram
7-249
7-163
General Control Unit, CAY-23AEW, Schematic Diagram
7-251
7-164
General Control Unit, CAY-23AEW, Wiring Diagram
7-253
7-165
Rotation Control Unit, CAY-50AEB, Schematic Diagram
7-255
7-166
7-167
Rotation Control Unit, CAY-50AEB, Case Wiring Diagram
Servo Amplifier, CAY-50AEU, Voltage and Resistance Chart
77:225597
7-168
Servo Amplifier, CAY-50AEU, Wiring Diagram
7-261
7-169
Rectifier Power Unit, CAY-20ACY, Wiring Diagram
7-263
7-170
Echo Box Antenna, CAY-66AHK, Wiring Diagram
7-265
7-171
Synchro Amplifier, CM-211103, Voltage and Resistance Chart
7-267
7-172
Synchro Amplifier, CM-211103, Schematic Diagram
7-269
7-173
7-174
Synchro Amplifier, CM-211103, Interconnection Diagram
Synchro Amplifier, CM-211103, Wiring Diagram
77:227731
7-175
Servo Generators, CAY-211192 and CAY-211192A, Wiring Diagram
7-275
7-176
Voltage Stabilizer, CG-301252, Schematic Diagram
7-277
7-177
Voltage Stabilizer, CG-301252, Wiring Diagram
7-279
7-178
Antenna Pedestal, CAJS-21ACP, Schematic Diagram
7-281
7-179
Antenna Pedestal CAJS-21ACP, Wiring Diagram
7-283
xviii ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER
NAVSHIPS 900,946 Illustrations
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Concluded)
Figure Title Page
SECTION VII CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (Continued)
7-180
7-181
7-182
7-183
7-184
7-185
7-186
Motor Generators, CAY-211182, CAY-211188 and CAY-211326, Schematic Dia-
gram
Magnetic Controller (115 V.) Schematic Diagram
Magnetic Controller (115 V.) Wiring Diagram
Magnetic Controller (230 V.) Schematic Diagram
Magnetic Controller, (230 V.) Wiring Diagram
Voltage Regulator, Schematic Diagram
Voltage Regulator, Wiring Diagram
7-285
5
72228
7:-87
7 9
7-291
7-293
7-295
7-297
?
ORIGINAL xix
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Tables
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
LIST OF TABLES
Table No.
Title
SECTION I. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Page
1-1
Cubical Contents and Weight per Shipment
1-37
1-2
Power Equipment
1-38
1-3
Equipment Supplied, Contract NXsr-30306
1-38
1-4
Equipment Supplied, Contract NXsr-46032
1-42
1-5
Equipment Supplied, Contract N5sr-7179
1-42
1-6
Equipment Required but Not Supplied, Contracts NXsr-30306 and NXsr-46032
1-42
1-7
Tube Complement, SR and SR-a Equipments
1-45
SECTION III. INSTALLATION AND INITIAL ADJUSTMENTS
3-1
Wire Number Designation
3-64
SECTION IV. OPERATION
4-1
Operating Adjustments
4-20
SECTION V. OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE
5-1
Underway?Each Watch
5-0
5-2
Fuse Locations
5-5
SECTION VI. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
6-1
Daily Checks
6-17
6-2
Weekly Checks
6-18
6-3
Quarterly Checks
6-19
6-4
Semi-Annual Checks
6-21
6-5
Annual Checks
6-21
SECTION VII. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
7-1
Transceiver Current Readings
7-13
7-2
Coil Data
7-145
7-3
Motor Data
7-157
SECTION VIII. PARTS AND SPARE PARTS LISTS
8-1
List of Major Units
8-1
8-2
Combined Parts and Spare Parts List by Symbol Designation
8-4
8-3
Applicable Color Codes and Miscellaneous Data
8-220
8-4
List of Manufacturers
8-221
XX
0
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER
NAVSHIPS 900,946
Guarantee
CONTRACTUAL GUARANTEE
The equipment including all parts and spare parts, except vacuum tubes,
rubber and material normally consumed in operation, is guaranteed for a period
of one year from the date of delivery of the equipment to and acceptance by the
Government with the understanding that all such items found to be defective
as to material, Workmanship or manufacture will be repaired or replaced, f.o.b.
any point within the continental limits of the United States designated by the
Government, without delay and at no expense to the Government; provided that
such guarantee will not obligate the Contractor to make repair or replace-
ment of any such defective items unless the defect appears within the aforemen-
tioned period and the Contractor is notified thereof in writing within a reasonable
time and the defect is not the result of normal expected shelf life deterioration.
To the extent the equipment, including all parts and spare parts, as defined
above, is of the Contractor's design or is of a design selected by the Contractor,
it is also guaranteed, subject to the foregoing conditions, against defects in design
with the understanding that if ten per cent (10%) or more of any such said item,
but not less than two of any such item, of the total quantity comprising such item
furnished under the contract, are found to be defective as to design, such item
will be conclusively presumed to be of defective design and subject to one hundred
per cent (100%) correction or replacement by a suitably redesigned item.
All such defective items will be subject to ultimate return to the Contractor.
In view of the fact that normal activities of the Naval Service may result in the
use of equipment in such remote portions of the world or under such conditions
as to preclude the return of the defective items for repair or replacement without
jeopardizing the integrity of Naval communications, the exigencies of the Service,
therefore, may necessitate expeditious repair of such items in order to prevent
extended interruption of communications. In such cases the return of the defec-
tive items for examination by the Contractor prior to repair or replacement will
not be mandatory. The report of a responsible authority, including details of
the conditions surrounding the failure, will be acceptable as a basis for affecting
expeditious adjustment under the provisions of this contractual guarantee.
The above one year period will not include any portion of time the equipment
fails to perform satisfactorily due to any such defects, and any items repaired
or replaced by the Contractor will be guaranteed anew under this provision.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
xxi
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Miscellaneous Data
NAVSHIPS 900,946 FRONT MATTER
INSTALLATION RECORD
Contract Number NXsr-30306
NXsr-46032
N5r-7197
Date of Contract 5 June 1943
17 January 1944
7 April 1945
Serial Number of Equipment
Date of Acceptance by the Navy
Date of Delivery to Contract Destination
Date of Completion of Installation
Date Placed in Service
Blank spaces in this table shall be filled in at the time of installation.
REPORT OF FAILURE
Report of failure of any part of this equipment, during its service life, shall
be made to the Bureau of Ships in accordance with current instructions. The
report shall cover all details of the failure and give the date of installation of the
equipment. For procedure in reporting failures see Chapter 67 of the "Bureau
of Ships Manual," or superseding instructions.
ORDERING PARTS
All requests or requisitions for replacement material should include the
following data:
1. Navy stock number or, when ordering from an Army supply depot,
the Army stock number.
2. Name of part.
If the Navy stock number has not been assigned, the requisition should specify
the following:
1. Equipment model designation.
2. Name of part and complete description.
3. Manufacturer's designation.
4. Contractor's drawing and part number.
5. AWS, JAN s, ipe designation.
xxii ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
FRONT MATTER NAVSH IPS 900,946 Safety Notice and Resuscitation
SAFETY NOTICES
The attention of officers and operating personnel is directed to Chapter 67
of the Bureau of Ships Manual or superseding instructions on the subject of Radio-
Safety precautions to be observed.
While every practicable safety precaution has been incorporated in this
equipment, the following rules must be strictly observed.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS. Operating personnel must at all
times observe all safety regulations. Do not change tubes or make adjustments
inside equipment with high voltage supply on. Under certain conditions dan-
gerous potentials may exist in circuits with power controls in the off position
due to charges retained by capacitors. To avoid casualties always remove power
and discharge and ground circuits prior to touching them.
DON'T SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE. Under no circumstances should
any person reach within or enter the enclosure for the purpose of servicing or
adjusting the equipment without the immediate presence or assistance of another
person capable of rendering aid.
DON'T TAMPER WITH INTERLOCKS. Do not depend on door switches
or interlocks for protection but always shut down motor generators or other
power equipment. Under no circumstances should any access gate, door or
safety interlock switch be removed, short circuited, or tampered with in any way,
by other than authorized maintenance personnel, nor should reliance be placed
upon the interlock switches for removing voltages from the equipment.
RESUSCITATION
AN APPROVED POSTER ILLUSTRATING THE RULES FOR RESUSCI-
TATION BY THE PRONE PRESSURE METHOD SHALL BE PROMINENTLY
DISPLAYED IN EACH RADIO, RADAR OR SONAR ENCLOSURE. POSTERS
MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST TO THE BUREAU OF MEDICINE
AND SURGERY.
ORIGINAL xxiii
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
IFF ANTENNA
TYPE 66AHG,66AHH.OR 66ANJ
WEIGHT 292 Les
RADAR ANTENNA
TYPE 66A9E OR 66AHF
wrira(7 'RI-272 LDS
-
-
ECHO BOX..
-ANTENNA PEDESTAL ANTENNA
IYPE CAJS-214GP TYPE CAY-66AHK
WEIGHT477 LBS WEIGHT 5I/2LBS
RG 10/U
RG -20/U
MHFA -10
TRANSCEIVER TO SHIP'S
GYRO COMPASS
TYPE CAY-43ACM (SR)
OR CAY-43A01( (SRO
WEIGHT 1235 LBS
TO 1FF OUPLEXER
1/6 IN. BRASS PIPE
MHFA-24 OR MHFA-26
MHFA-IO
A
AMPLIFIER CHASSIS
TYPE CM-50131
WEIGHT 89LEIS
MHFA.I0
6-- TO COND NSER
BLOCK
TO ANT
SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER BEARING
TYPE CM-211103
WEIGHT 153(.85
MHFA-I4
MHFA -14
HFA -14
RG- 10/U
RG- I2/U
(14-RG?27/U
1
TO IFF
VIDEO
MHFA?7
LTRIGGER TO IFF
TRANSMITTER
VOLTAGE STABILIZER
TYPE CG-301252
WEIGHT 28e LBS
TO I FF
CONTROL
TO REEATE R
TRIGGER
ROTATION CONTROL
UNIT TYPE CAY- 50AEB
WEIGHT 217LBS
TO REPEATER
EO
MODULATOR
TYPE CAY-50AGU
WEIGHT 168 LEIS
(SRa ONLY)
AC OUTPUT OF DC MOTOR GENERATOR-
IF AC IS BEING SUPPLIED DIRECT FROM
SHIP'S BUS CONNECT AC LEADS HERE .
POWER EQUIPMENT
FOR DC SUPPLY
as .
? IS ? kv
fig ? t7,11/
?r
, .74 boa P
er:s
INDICATOR CONSOLE
TYPE CAY-46ADJ WEIGHT 527 LBS
AC POWER TO IFF SYSTEM
IS V. A-C
POWER SOURCE
JFW II5V DC use DHFA-4
"IFor 230V DC use DH FA-3
115 V. DC OR
e.4-230 V. DC INPUT
FHFA-3
SHFA 4
THFA-3
PUSH BUTTON
STATION
GAY -211186
WGT. 6 LOS
OHFA-751115 V) OR GAY.24299
OR ?FIFA-23(230 VI WGT. 8 LBS
VOLTAGE REGULATOR MOTOR-GENERATOR MAGNETIC CONTROLLER
TYPE CAY-21D85 TYPE GAY-211185A TYPES CAY-211182,CAY-211186 TYPE CAY-2I1326 TYPES CAY-21118I,CAY-21I325 TYPE GAY-211187
WEIGHT 250 LBS WEIGHT 232 LBS WEIGHT 2975 LBS WEIGHT 3020 LBS WEIGHT 83 LDS WEIGHT 78 LBS
MHFA-I 4
AUTO
DEHYDRATOR
TYPE GAK13-10AEK
WEIGHT 207LBS
SERVO GENERATOR
TYPE CAY-211192 WEIGHT 170 LEIS
OR CAY-2111924
1-0
Figure 1-1. Navy Model SR and SR-a Radar Equipment
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 1
Par. la I
SECTION 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. RADAR EQUIPMENTS COVERED.
a. GENERAL.
(1) This instruction book covers the SR Ships
Radar Equipments purchased on Contracts NXsr-30306
and NXsr-46032. The SR Equipments are to be modi-
fied in the field to become SR-a Equipments. Because
of the necessary delay in making field changes, this
book has been arranged to present detailed instructions
for two separate systems. These systems are described
in detail in the following paragraphs.
b. SR EQUIPMENT.
(1) The SR Ships Radar Equipment is shown in
Fig. 1-1. Two-hundred SR Equipments were pur-
chased on Contract NXsr-30306 and 100 SR Equip-
ments were purchased on Contract NXsr-46032. One-
hundred of the SR Equipments, purchased on Contract
NXsr-30306 are provided with 115 V. D-C motor
generators. The remaining one-hundred equipments
are provided with 230 V. D-C motor generators. Fifty
of the 115 volt equipments are supplied with Blue
Antennas COD-66AHE or CLP-66AHE. The remain-
ing fifty equipments are supplied with the Yellow-
Green Antenna COD-66AHF or CLP-66AHF. The 230
volt equipments are broken down in the same way.
Fifty of these equipments are supplied with the Blue
Antenna and fifty are supplied with the Yellow-Green
Antenna. The colors used in the names of the antennas
are used to indicate the frequency band over which
they operate.
(2) One-hundred SR Equipments are supplied on
Contract NXsr-46032. These equipments are supplied
with 230 volt motor generators. Fifty of the equip-
ments are supplied with the Blue Antenna and fifty are
supplied with the Yellow-Green Antenna.
c. SR-a EQUIPMENT.
(1) The original SR Equipments employed grid
circuit keying. In order to increase the life of the
transmitting tubes and simplify tuning, these equip-
ments are to be modified in the field to transfer keying
to the plate circuit of the transmitting oscillators. This
is done by substituting Modulator CAY-50AGU for
Keyer CAY-67AAD. This change is described in Navy
Field Change No. 20. When this change is made, the
Keyer is removed from the Transceiver Console CAY-
43ACM and is replaced with a blank panel. The name-
plate is changed to CAY-43ADK. The inclusion of
the Modulator is the only modification involved in the
ORIGINAL
conversion from SR to SR-a Equipments. All other
field modifications for SR Equipments may be made
without requiring a change in the type number.
2. PURPOSE AND BASIC PRINCIPLES OF
OPERATION.
a. The SR and SR-a Equipments are complete radar
equipments designed for ship installations. The SR
Equipment was originally designed to provide facilities
for radar searching and ranging of targets within a
radius of 400 nautical miles from the ship. The equip-
ments were later modified in the field to reduce the
maximum range to 200 miles. Two types of target
information are presented. During searching opera-
tions the principle target information is obtained from
a PPI Indicator. As the antenna rotates continuously
through 360 degrees in azimuth, a map of all targets
within the range used is presented on the PPI Indi-
cator so that the operator may select the target or
targets to be ranged and accurately train the antenna
on the desired target. A rough estimate of target
range may also be obtained from the PPI Indicator.
A more accurate range indication is obtained from the
Type A presentation on a Range Scope. Type A
presentation is that in which a vertical deflection ap-
pears on a horizontal sweep. Four ranges are provided.
On the Range Scope, these ranges were originally 4,
20, 80, and 400 miles. The 400-mile range was reduced
to 200 miles by Navy Field Change No. 25. The
ranges available on the PPI Indicator are 4, 20, 80,
and 200 miles.
b. The SR series of radar equipments operate as
searching, ranging, and direction finding devices.
These functions are based on a number of fundamental
principles. Chief among these principles is the fact
that radio waves travel in a straight line. Radio waves
also travel at a constant speed of 162,000 nautical miles
per second which is the speed of light. Another
fundamental principle involved is that radio waves are
reflected by objects much in the same way that light
is reflected. If a radio wave strikes a metallic object,
it induces a flow of r-f current in the object and the
object becomes a radiating antenna. As the frequency
is increased a somewhat similar phenomenon occurs
even when the metallic object is replaced with a
dielectric or non-metallic object.
c. The principles briefly described above may be
employed to determine the distance to a target by
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-1
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I Par. 2c
using a pulse modulated transmitting oscillator, a
sensitive receiver tuned to the transmitter frequency
and a time measuring device such as an oscilloscope.
The transmitter sends out short bursts of r-f energy
at fixed intervals. The time duration of these bursts
of energy is also fixed. The transmitter and receiver
are both operated with the same antenna. During the
time the transmitter is delivering power to the an-
tenna, the receiver is rendered insensitive by means of
a specially designed switch in its input circuit. Im-
mediately after the end of the transmission period,
this same switch connects the receiver to the antenna
in place of the transmitter. The burst of energy is
radiated by the antenna and if it strikes a target, part
of the energy is re-radiated or reflected in all directions
from the target. The portion of this reflected energy
that is reflected back to the radar antenna is received
and detected by the receiver.
d. If some means is used to determine the instant
that transmission starts and to measure the time that
elapses between the start of transmission and the
instant the echo is received, it is possible to calculate
the distance between the radar equipment and the
target. An oscilloscope can be used to measure time
very accurately. The SR Equipments use two types of
oscilloscopes. One is a Type A oscilloscope. Its sweep
starts from a point near the circumference of the tube
and moves straight across the screen to a corresponding
point in the circumference that is diametrically oppo-
site the starting point. The sweep starts when trans-
mission starts and ends at the other side of the tube
just before the next period of transmission begins. It
then returns very rapidly to the starting point to start
again with the next period of transmission. It pro-
gresses across the screen of the tube at a constant rate
of speed. Since the time in microseconds required for
the sweep to cross the screen is known, it is possible
to calibrate the sweep in time units. In practice, the
sweep is directly calibrated in miles since the distance
a radio wave will travel in a given period of time is
known.
e. If it is desired to set up a 20-Mile range on the
oscilloscope, the first step is to determine the time
required for a radio wave to travel out 20 miles to the
target and back again to the radar set. The total
distance the radio wave travels is 40 miles. Since radio
waves travel at a velocity of 162,000 nautical miles per
second, the time required for radio waves to travel
40 miles is 40 divided by 162,000 which is equal to
0.000247 seconds di 247 microseconds. Therefore, the
transmitter pulses must be at least 247 microseconds
apart and the sweep on the oscilloscope must require
247 microseconds to travel across the face of the tube.
If the sweep is divided into 20 equal parts the time
measuring device is complete.
1-2
f. When the transmitter pulse begins, the sweep on
the oscilloscope starts. At some interval before the
next transmitter pulse starts, the echo is received and
is fed to the oscilloscope by the receiver. The echo
produces a vertical deflection on the sweep. The
operator need only count the number of divisions be-
tween the start of the sweep and the echo pip to
determine the number of miles between the radar set
and the target.
g. In order to determine the direction of the target,
a highly directional antenna is used. That is, the
antenna does not -radiate energy in all directions, but
for all practical purposes, concentrates the energy in
a narrow beam. Therefore, only targets within the
area covered by this narrow beam will cause pips to
appear on the oscilloscope even though the area around
the radar set may contain many others. The antenna
can be rotated to point the beam in any direction and
the direction in which the antenna is pointing is the
direction of the target that is being received. The
antenna actuates an azimuth scale graduated in 360
degrees. The antenna is usually pointed directly to-
ward true north when the azimuth scale is set to 0
degrees. When a target is received, the angular devia-
tion of the antenna from true north is noted and if
the position of the radar set is known, the azimuth
bearing and the range of the target may be used to
fix the location of the target. If the target is moving,
successive fixes may be used to determine its speed and
the direction in which it is moving.
h. Another method of target presentation is also
used in the SR series of equipments to facilitate the
location of targets for ranging. This method employs
an oscilloscope whose sweep starts from the center of
the tube screen and travels to the circumference. The
direction in which the sweep travels away from the
center of the tube is controlled by and dependent upon
the direction in which the antenna is pointing at any
particular instant. A 360-degree scale is placed around
the circumference of the tube and the number of the
scale with which the sweep coincides indicates the
angular deviation of the antenna from true north in
degrees. When a target echo is received, the electron
beam that illuminates the screen of the tube is momen-
tarily intensified by the output of the receiver to form
a bright dot in the sweep. This method of target
presentation is called Plan Position Indication but is
shortened to PPI in common usage. In practice, the
antenna is rotated continuously in azimuth and target
dots continually appear in, and disappear from, the
sweep as it swings around the center of the tube. The
screen of the tube has a long persistency and the
illumination produced by the dots remains for some
time after the sweep has passed. Therefore, as the
sweep rotates, a pattern of dots is built up on the tube.
Since the radar set is represented as being in the center
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 1
Par. 2h I
of the tube, all of the targets in the area within range
around the radar set are shown en the PPI Tube. By
rotating the antenna to make the PPI sweep coincide
with a target, the operator may select any desired target
for ranging and stop the antenna on it.
i. In order to keep the antenna trained on any target
selected, the antenna positioning circuits are connected
to the ship's gyro-compass circuits so that no matter
which way the ship turns the antenna will maintain
the same position to which it was set until the operator
operates controls to turn it to some other position.
3. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS.
a. SR SYSTEM (NXsr-30306).
(1) A simplified block diagram of the SR Equip-
ment, purchased on Contract NXsr-30306, is shown in
Fig. 1-2. The transmitting system consists of the
Transceiver Console and the Keyer Unit; the Keyer
Unit contains a capacity-inductance delay line. This
line is terminated so that the charge on the capacitors
will leak off at a predetermined rate. The voltage on
the delay line triggers the transmitting oscillators in
the Transceiver Console. The Keyer Unit can be ad-
justed to provide pulse lengths of 1, 2 and 20 micro-
seconds at repetition rates of 60 and 200 cps. The
pulses of voltage developed by the delay line are
applied to the grids of the transmitting oscillators to
key them. When keyed, they oscillate for the duration
of the pulse width in use at the repetition rate selected.
(2) The transmitting oscillators are located in
the Transceiver Console cabinet. They consist of two
Type 527 tubes and the necessary resonant lines. They
develop the r-f power that is radiated by the equip-
ment. The Transceiver also contains the high voltage
supply and the necessary control circuits and relays to
switch the circuits into operation in the proper se-
quence. The output of the transmitting oscillator is
coupled to the r-f transmission line through the
duplexer. The duplexer is an electronic switch that
connects the antenna to the transmitter during its brief
periods of oscillation. At the same time, it short cir-
cuits the input circuit to the Monitor Receiver in the
receiving system. During the idle periods of the trans-
mitter, the duplexer short circuits the output circuit of
the transmitter and connects the input circuit of the
Monitor Receiver to the antenna through the trans-
mission line.
(3) The transmission line carries the r-f power
to the antenna radiation and also delivers the received
r-f energy to the Monitor Receiver. The transmission
line consists of two concentric lines. One of these
lines is the radar transmission line and the other line
is the transmission line for the IFF Equipment asso-
ciated with the SR system. The directional assembly
antenna consists of the radar antenna and the IFF
Antenna. The radar antenna may be either of two
models, the difference being the frequency band over
ORIGINAL
which they are designed to operate. The IFF Antenna
may be any one of three different models designed for
different frequencies. All three IFF Antennas are
supplied with each SR. One radar antenna is supplied.
(4) The Auto Dehydrator CAKB-10AEK is also
a part of the r-f system. The purpose of the Auto
Dehydrator is to pressurize the r-f transmission lines
in the antenna pedestal with dry air. It removes
moisture from the air by forcing it through a silica gel
cartridge. Two separate dehydrating systems are in-
corporated in the Auto Dehydrator. One system runs
while the other is being reactivated. The unit auto-
matically shifts from one system to the other so that
the air always passes through an active silica gel
cartridge.
(5) The received r-f energy is connected to she
input of the Monitor Receiver. The Monitor Receiver
is part of the receiving system but it is actually located
in the Transceiver Console to eliminate the long trans-
mission line that would be required between it and
the duplexer which must of necessity be located in the
Transceiver Console. Two outputs are taken from the
Monitor Receiver. One is the 15-mc/s i-f signal for
the Console Receiver in the Indicator Console. The
other is a video signal for the Monitor Scope. The
gain of the Monitor Receiver determines the net gain
of the entire receiving system. It can be controlled
from the Console Receiver.
(6) The Monitor Scope is placed in the Trans-
ceiver Console to simplify tuning procedures. This
is necessary because the Indicator Console may be
located in another room where it would be difficult
to observe the received echo when the transmitter is
being tuned. The Monitor Scope is also designed so
that it can be removed from the Transceiver Console
and used as a test instrument.
(7) The Echo Box Antenna CAY-66AHK is a
single folded coaxial dipole mounted in the radiation
field of the radar antenna. This antenna picks up a
strong r-f signal from the radar antenna and feeds it
through a special transmission line to the Echo Box
in the Monitor Receiver. The Echo Box reflects the
signal back to the Echo Box antenna which reradiates
the signal. The echo signal is then picked up by the
radar antenna to serve as a test signal to test the opera-
tion of the equipment at times when no targets are
available.
(8) The 15-megacycle i-f output of the Monitor
Receiver is connected through the interconnecting
cabling to the input of the Console Receiver CAY-
46AD11 in the Indicator Console. The Console Re-
ceiver contains anti-jamming circuits, i-f amplifiers, a
detector, video amplifiers, and video output tubes. The
video output of the Console Receiver is connected to
the Range Scope, the PPI Indicator, and any remote
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-3
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I Par. 3a(8)
PPI Indicators that may be in use. In addition, the
Console Receiver contains a remote gain control for
the Monitor Receiver and a BAND PASS switch which
remotely selects the pulse width in the Keyer Unit.
It can also be used to provide a source of range marker
voltage for the various PPI Indicators that may be
in use.
(9) The range system consists of the Range
Scope and the IFF Coordinator, both of which are
located in the Indicator Console. The Range Scope
is a Type A oscilloscope and is used to accurately mea-
sure the range of the target and to identify it as friend
or foe. The identification function is made possible
by the action of the IFF Coordinator. Trigger voltage
from the transmitting system is connected into the IFF
Coordinator. When the IFF system is not functioning,
the IFF Coordinator feeds each radar trigger directly to
the Range Scope where it is used to produce the sweep
or base line on which the target echo is displayed. Dur-
ing IFF operation, the IFF Coordinator delays each al-
ternate radar trigger so that it can be used to produce an
IFF sweep that occurs alternately on the Range Scope
with the radar sweep. The IFF Coordinator also pro-
duces a gate or blocking voltage that causes the video
circuits in the Range Scope to apply radar video signals
to the cathode ray tube on one cycle and IFF video sig-
nals to the tube on the succeeding cycle. This action oc-
curs so rapidly as to make the patterns seem to appear
simultaneously. The delayed IFF trigger causes the
IFF echo to appear immediately beneath the radar
echo so that positive identification is obtained. The
IFF Coordinator and the IFF system do not function
unless a switch on the IFF Coordinator is operated.
(10) The Range Scope presents Type A informa-
tion on a 5-inch cathode ray tube. By means of the
IFF Coordinator, the Range Scope can be made to
function as two oscilloscopes. One displays radar
echoes and the other displays IFF echoes. Both pat-
terns appear on a single cathode ray tube and seem to
appear simultaneously. Two separate sweep lines
appear, one above the other. The Range Scope has
four ranges, 4, 20, 80, and 200 miles. The 200-mile
range was originally 400 miles. Four marker pips
appear on each range to assist the operator in estimat-
ing the range of the target. In addition, a range step
is provided on the 4-, 20- and 80-mile ranges to enable
the operator to obtain accurate range measurements.
The first SR Equipments did not include the range step
on the 80-mile range. The range step raises the left
hand portion of the sweep vertically above the right
hand portion. The two portions are joined by the
vertical step line. A control moves this line back and
forth across the screen. When the line coincides with
a target, the range may be read on a dial that auto-
matically registers range within plus or minus 100
yards.
1-4
(11) The PPI Indicator, CAY-55ADV or CAY-55
ADV-1 and any remote PPI Indicators in use, consti-
tute the PPI system. The PPI system is used primarily
in searching operations to enable the operator to see
at a glance all of the targets in the range of the SR
and to aid in the selection of the target or targets that
are to be ranged. The PPI Indicator operates on
ranges of 4, 20, 80, and 200 miles. The PPI Indicator
permits the operator to observe the bearing and range
of any of the targets that appear on it. The range
markers on the PPI Indicator are actually concentric
rings around the center of the tube screen, produced
by bright dots in the sweep line. The sweep starts
from the center of the tube and as the antenna swings
around, the sweep follows it and thus indicates the
direction in which the antenna is pointing at any
instant. The sweep and marker circuits in the PPI
Indicator are triggered by the radar trigger and video
signals are obtained from the output of the Console
Receiver. The CAY-55ADV and the CAY-55ADV-1
PPI Indicators are identical electrically. The differ-
ence between the two models is in the type of cursor
used. A piece of transparent plastic is placed over the
face of the cathode ray tube in such a way that it can
be rotated. A line called a cursor line is engraved
from the center of the plastic to its outer edge. When
the cursor is rotated so that this line coincides with
a target, the azimuth bearing may be read beneath the
cursor line on the azimuth scale around the circum-
ference of the tube. The use of the cursor makes it
unnecessary to stop the antenna and adjust it so that
the sweep line coincides with the target whenever it
is necessary to determine the bearing of a target. The
CAY-55ADV indicator has a hand operated cursor of
simple construction. The CAY-55ADV-1 indicator
uses a geared cursor driven by a handwheel.
(12) The antenna positioning system contains
several units which will be identified and described
in this and the following paragraphs. The Antenna
Pedestal contains a d-c drive motor to develop power
to rotate the antenna and two 'position-data transmit-
ting synchro units. One of the synchros is a 1-speed
coarse position transmitter which provides information
to the bearing indicators. The other is a 36-speed fine
position transmitter which provides the voltage by
which the antenna is positioned. The data produced
by the Antenna Pedestal is relative data, that is, it is
indicative of the position of the antenna with respect
to the direction in which the ship is sailing. When
true bearing data is desired, the relative voltages are
combined with data voltages from the ship's gyro-
compass synchros. Compass data voltages are provided
by the synchro amplifier. The synchro amplifier is
connected to the 36-speed and 1-speed synchro trans-
mitters of the ship's gyro compass system. It provides
an amplified reproduction of these voltages for the
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946 .
MOTOR GENERATOR SETS
NAVY TYPE CAY-211182 OR CAY- 211188
CONSISTING OF
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
NAVY TYPE
AC GENERATOR
CAY -211185
NAVY TYPE'
CAY- 211184
MAGNETIC
DC MOTOR
CONTROLLER
NAVY TYPE
NAVY TYPE
CAY-21118I
CAY-211I89
CAY-211187
----
CAY- 211183
DC GENERATOR
(EXCITER)
PUSH BUTTON
_.---'
.----
STATION
NAVY TYPE
NAVY TYPE
CAY- 211190
CAY- 211186
--
VOLTAGE
STABILIZER
NAVY TYPE
CG-30I252
SECTION 1
ANTENNA
ECHO BOX ANTENNA
NAVY TYPE CAY-66AHK
ANTENNA MARK 3 DIPOLES MARK 3 DIPOLES MARK 4 DIPOLES
ASSEMBLIES PURPLE ORANGE GROUP
NAVY TYPE NAVY TYPE NAVY TYPE ? NAVY TYPE
COD -66 AHE COD- 66AMG-LC COD - 66AHH - LC COD - 66 AHJ - LC
CLP - 66AHE COD- 66AHG -.LE COD - 66 AHH -LE COO -66 AHJ -LE
COD -66 AHF CLP-66AHG -LC , CLP -66AHH -LC CLP-66 AHJ-LC
CLP-66AHF CLP - 66 AHG-LE CL P -66AHH- LE CLP- 66 AHJ -LE
COD- 66AHG -RC COD -66AHH- RC COD -66 AHJ -RC
COD-66 AHG-RE COD -66AHH -RE - COD -66 AHJ -RE
C LP - 66 AHG -RC C L P - 66 AHH -RC CLP -66AHJ -RC
CLP 66 AHG RE CL P -66 AHH -RE C LP- 66 AHJ -RE
ORIGINAL
MONITOR SCOPE
NAVY TYPE
CAY-55AFD
MONITOR
RECEIVER
NAVY TYPE
CAY- 46 ADK
KEYER
NAVY TYPE
CAY- 67AAD
TRANSCEIVER CONSOLE
NAVY TYPE
GAY-45 ACM
)1.
INDICATOR CONSOLE NAVY TYPE CAY- 46 ADJ
CONSOLE
RECEIVER
NAVY TYPE
GAY- 46 ADH
,
PP I
SCOPE
NAVY TYPE
CAY - 55ADV
RANGE
SCOPE
NAVY TYPE
CAY- 55 AFB
GENERAL
CONTROL
PANEL
NAVY
TY PE
CAY-23AEW
IFF
COORDINATOR
NAVY
TYPE
CAY-23 AE V
BEARING
INDICATOR
NAVY TYPE
CAY-55 AFC
CRADLE
NAVY TYPE CAY -10313
th.
ANTENNA
PEDESTAL
NAVY TYPE
CAJS - 21ACP
ANTENNA DRIVE
MOTOR
NAVY TYPE
CG-211179
SYNCHRO
AMPLIFIER
NAVY TYPE
CM-211103
ROTATION CONTROL
UNIT
NAVY TYPE
CAY- 50AEB
CONSISTING OF
SERVO AMPLIFIER
NAVY TYPE
CAY - 50 AEU
RECTIFIER
POWER UNIT
SERVO GENERATOR
NAVY TYPE
NAVY TYPE CAY- 211192
CAY- 20 ACY
CONSISTING
OF
DC GENERATOR
AC MOTOR
NAVY TYPE
NAVY TYPE
CAY - 211194
CAY- 211193
.C=. CRADLE th.
NAVY TYPE CAY-I0514
Figure 1-2. Simplified Block Diagram of SR System
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
SHIP'S
GYRO-COMPASS
AUTO
DEHYDRATOR
NAVY TYPE
CAKB-10AEK
1-5
1-6
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
POWER EQUIPMENT
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
NAVY TYPE
CAY- 211185-A
MAGNETIC
CONTROLLER
NAVY TYPE
CAY-21I325
MG SET CAY-211326
AC GENERATOR
NAVY TYPE
CAY-2Il 328
D C MOTOR
NAVY TYPE
CAY-211327
LINE SWITCH
NAVY TYPE
CWU-24429
PUSH BUTTON
STATIONS
NAVY TYPE
CAY-24299
DC GENERATOR
(EXCITER)
NAVY TYPE
CAY-211329
MODULATOR
NAVY TYPE
GAY 50 MW
SECTION 1
ANTENNA
ECHO BOX ANTENNA
NAVY TYPE CAY-66AHK
ANTENNA MARKS DIPOLES MARK 3 DIPOLES MARK 4 DIPOLES
ASSEMBLIES PURPLE ORANGE GROUP
NAVY TYPE NAVY TYPE NAVY TYPE NAVY TYPE
COD - 66 AKE COD - 66 AHG-LC COD - 66 AHH - LC COD - 66AHJ -LC
CLP- 66AHE CO D-66AHG-LE COD - 66 AHH- LE COD -66 AHJ- LE
COD -66 AHF CL P-66AHG -LC CLP -66AHH -LC CLP-66 AHJ-LC
CLP- 66 AHF CLP -66 AHG-LE CL P -66AHH -LE CLP - 66 AHJ -LE
COD - 66 AHG -RC COD -66AHH - RC COD -66 AHJ - RC
COD-66 AHG-RE COD -66AHH -RE COD-66 AHJ-RE
C L P -66 AHG-RC CLP -66 AHH -RC CLP-66AHJ-RC
CLP 66 AHG RE CL P -66AHH -RE CLP- 66 AHJ-RE
VOLTAGE
STABILIZER
NAVY TYPE
GG -301252
ORIGINAL
MONITOR SCOPE
NAVY TYPE
CAY-55AFO
MONITOR
RECEIVER
NAVY TYPE
CAY- 48 ADK
TRANSCEIVER CONSOLE
NAVY TYPE
GAY-43 ADK
INDICATOR CONSOLE NAVY TYPE CAY-46ADJ-I
CONSOLE
RECEIVER
NAVY TYPE
CAY- 46A0H
PP I
SCOPE
NAVY TYPE
AY-55 ADV-I
C
RANGE
SCOPE
NAVY TYPE
CAY- 55 AFB
GENERAL
CONTROL
PANEL
NAVY
TYPE
CAY-23AEW
I FF
COORDINATOR
NAVY
TYPE
CAY-23AE V
BEARING
INDICATOR
NAVY TYPE
CAY-50AFC
CRADLE
NAVY TYPE GAY-10313
ANTENNA ANTENNA DRIVE
PEDESTAL MOTOR
NAVY TYPE
COE-211423
NAVY TYPE
CAJS -21ACP
ROTATION CONTROL
UNIT
NAVY TYPE
CAY-50 AEB
CONSISTING OF
SERVO AMPLIFIER
NAVY TYPE
CAY -50AEU
RECTIFIER
POWER UNIT
NAVY TYPE
CAY-20ACY
i?\ CRADLE5
NAVY TYPE CAY-I0314
SYNCHRO
AMPLIFIER
NAVY TYPE
CM-211I03
SERVO GENERATOR
NAVY TYPE GAY- 211192-A
CONSISTING OF
DC GENERATOR
NAVY TYPE
CAY-2 11194-A
AC MOTOR
NAVY TYPE
CAY-2 11193-A
Figure 1-3. Simplified Block Diagram of SR-a System
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
SHIP'S
GYRO-COMPASS
AUTO
DEHYDRATOR
NAVY TYPE
CAKB-10AEK
1-7
1-8
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
operation of the antenna position and bearing indi-
cating system. When the equipment is operating on
a relative bearing information, the compass voltages are
replaced with a-c of fixed phase from the ship's circuits.
(13) The Rotation Control Unit CAY-50AEB
provides the driving voltages for the antenna position-
ing system. It consists of two separate units. One is
the Servo Amplifier CAY-50AEU. The Servo-Ampli-
fier receives an input from the Bearing Indicator made
up of the voltages from the Antenna Pedestal modified
by position of the hand slewing synchro in the Bearing
Indicator. Thus, the voltage applied to the Servo
Amplifier is on true bearing, made up of the compass
voltage representing true north modified by the posi-
tion of the antenna and further modified by the posi-
tion of the manual rotation control of the Bearing
Indicator. On relative bearing, the compass voltage
is replaced by a voltage of fixed phase, and the input
to the Servo Amplifier is independent of any motion
of the ship with respect to true north. The output of
the Servo Amplifier is used to excite the field of the
Servo Generator. The other component of the Rota-
tion Control Unit is the Rectifier Power Unit CAY-
20ACY. This unit contains a rectox dry disc rectifier
that furnishes rectified d-c voltage to the field and
armature of the antenna drive motor in the event of
the failure of the servo system or whenever it is desir-
able to relieve the system from the wear attendant
with continuous operation.
(14) Servo Generator CAY-211192 is the com-
ponent that actually supplies power to the antenna
drive motor when the servo system is in use. The field
excitation voltage from the Servo Amplifier excites
the field of a d-c generator in the Servo Generator.
The output from the armature of this generator is used
to excite the armature of the antenna drive motor.
The field of the antenna drive motor normally receives
its excitation from a full wave electronic rectifier in
the Servo amplifier. The d-c generator in the Servo
Generator is driven by an a-c motor. The Servo
Generator delivers an output only when a phase dis-
placement exists somewhere in the antenna positioning
system that will produce a field excitation voltage from
the Servo Amplifier in the Rotation Control Unit.
(15) The power equipment for the SR Equip-
ment supplied on Contract NXsr-30306, may be either
of two types. One type converts 115 volts d-c from
the ship's line to 115 volts a-c which is required for
the operation of the SR Equipment. The other type
of equipment converts 230 volts d-c from the ship's
lines to 115 volts a-c. The type of equipment used
depends upon the voltage rating of the ship's power
supply. The 115-volt d-c equipment consists of the
following items :--Pushbutton Station CAY-211186,
Magnetic Controller CAY-211181, Motor Generator
ORIGINAL
SECTION 1
Par. 3a(12)
CAY-211188 and Voltage Regulator CAY-211185. The
230 volt d-c power equipment consists of:?Pushbut-
ton Station CAY-211185, Magnetic Controller CAY-
211187, Motor Generator CAY-211182 and Voltage
Regulator CAY-211185 or CAY-211185A. A voltage
stabilizer, CG-301252, is used to regulate the voltage
input to the Transceiver Console and the components
associated with it.
b. SR SYSTEM (NXsr-46032).
(1) With three exceptions the SR equipment sup-
plied on Contract NXsr-46032 is identical to the equip-
ment previously described. All components are con-
nected into the system in the same way. The excep-
tions are that (1) the PPI Indicator in the Indicator
Console is equipped with a geared cursor and bears
the Number CAY-55ADV-1, (2) the Servo Generator
has been slightly modified and bears the Number
CAY-211192A, and (3) only power equipment for the
conversion of 230 volts d-c to 115 volts a-c is supplied.
This equipment consists of the following:?Motor
Generator CAY-211326, Voltage Regulator CAY-
211185A, Magnetic Controller CAY-211325, three
pushbutton stations CAY-24299 and Controller Dis-
connect Switch CWU-24429.
c. SR-a SYSTEM.
(1) Both of the SR Equipments just described
are to be modified in the field to become SR-a Equip-
ments. This change is shown in both Fig. 1-2 and
Fig. 1-3. The conversion is described in Navy Field
Change No. 20. As may be seen from the block dia-
grams, the change only affects the transmitting system.
Keyer Unit CAY-67AAD is removed from the Trans-
ceiver Console. A blank panel covers its former loca-
tion. The keying function is performed by Modulator
CAY-50AGU. The keyer unit accomplished keying
in the grid circuit of the transmitting oscillator. The
Modulator accomplishes keying in the plate circuit of
the transmitting oscillator. The keying frequency is
100-150 cps and the pulse width is 4 microseconds.
This change was made to materially increase the life
of the transmitter tubes. When this modification is
made, the number of the Transceiver Console is
changed from CAY-43ACM to CAY-43ADK.
4. DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR UNITS.
a. TRANSCEIVER CONSOLE CAY-43ACM (SR
ONLY).
(1) GENERAL.?The components of the Trans-
ceiver Console are housed in a metal cabinet approxi-
mately 72 x 28 x 25 inches. Its total weight is approxi-
mately 1,235 pounds. Components of the transmitting
oscillator, and its power supply, control circuits, and
the duplexer are built permanently into the console.
The Monitor Scope, Monitor Receiver, and the Keyer
Unit are separate components which mount in the
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-9
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION
I Par. 4a(1)
NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Transceiver Console. See Fig. 1-4. The cabinet is
mounted on four plunger type shockmounts which
raise the entire cabinet about four inches clear of the
deck. However, prior to Serial No. 31, the cabinet
was not shockmounted. It was attached to two U-
beam type mounting flanges which bolted firmly to the
deck. Dials and controls of the transmitting compo-
nents are mounted on the front panels of the console.
Three access doors are p:ovided in the front of the
0 console for access to the transmitting oscillator and the
transmitting oscillator power supplies. Access to the
other components may be secured by removal of the
side and back shields. The plug-in-units may be
reached by sliding them out of their positions.
(2) TRANSMITTING OSCILLATOR.
(a) The oscillator assembly consists of a pair of
concentric cathode lines into which the two Type 527
transmitting tubes are mounted. See Fig. 1-5. These
lines are mounted near the top of the cabinet and
extend downward, with the tubes themselves near the
center of the cabinet. This entire assembly is reached
through the large rectangular door which occupies the
top left-hand quarter of the cabinet. A blower motor
blows air through the lines to cool the filament seals
of the transmitting oscillator tubes.
(b) The grid assembly consists of two silver-
plated brass tubes through which cool air is blown to
the rear grid seals of the oscillator tubes that form
part of the variable resonant grid circuit. The rear
grid terminals of the oscillator tubes clip into springs
which are attached to these two vertical silver plated
brass tubes. A variable shorting bar slides up and
down the vertical tubes and is controlled by the grid
dial which is accessible through the hole in the oscil-
lator door. Three other silver plated brass tubes are
located below the plate and front grid oscillator tube
terminals. They are used to direct a stream of cooling
air from the blower motor upon the oscillator tube
seals. A micarta tube, located in the right-rear section
of the grid casting, connects the grid and cathode cast-
ings together for transmission of cool air from blower
motor B-101 to the filament oscillator tube seals.
(c) Two pairs of coaxial lines are mounted at
the back of the Console behind the transmitting oscil-
lator. They extend vertically downward from the
coaxial line across the back of the console near the top.
These are, from left to right, looking from the front
of the cabinet, the two transmitter loading stubs and
the two stubs which make up the duplexer unit. They
are all mounted rigidly against the frame members of
the Console. The Console frame itself consists of a
welded box-like structure with cross-members and
braces. Angles and gussets are employed to make it
extremely rigid.
Figure 1-4. Transceiver Console CAY-43ACM (SR) (d) The control shafts for tuning the loading
1-10
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION NAVSHIPS 900,946
transformer stubs and the duplexer stubs are located
on the front of the console. See Fig. 1-4. Shafts ex-
tend to the back of the console in order to operate the
tuning elements. The majority of the controls are
Figure 1-5. Oscillator Assembly
ORIGINAL
SECTION
1
Par. 4a(2)(d)
Figure 1-6. Keyer Unit CAY-67AAD
mounted on a panel section directly below the level of
the transmitter and the three removable components.
The power supply for the transmitting oscillators is
located below the tuning controls. This supply consists
of two Type 8020 rectifier tubes, a suitable filter, and
a power transformer. A motor driver variac controls
the output voltage. The tubes are mounted on a deck
in the bottom of the Console. Meters and indicator
lights which show Transceiver operation conditions
are mounted in a row across the top of the Console.
b. KEYER UNIT CAY-67AAD (SR ONLY).
(1) The Keyer Unit, shown in Fig. 1-6, is built
in a box-like frame measuring 18.7/8 x 145/8 x 111/4
inches, formed of aluminum angles and gussets. This
construction is similar to the Monitor Receiver and
Monitor Scope in the Transceiver. Its various compo-
nents are mounted on a deck secured to the frame.
The motor-driven switch is in the center of the deck,
extending both above and below it. The front panel
of the unit is assembled to the box-like structure. The
PULSE LENGTH switch is mounted in the center of
the front panel. A row of three screwdriver operated
controls extends across the top of the panel and another
row across the bottom of the panel. These are the
adjustments for setting the pulse width. The unit
slides forward from its permanent position when its
four captive screws are loosened. The Keyer Unit is
not equipped with locks to catch and hold the chassis,
as are the units in the Indicator Console. Connections
are made to the various terminals within the units as
they are being installed in position. The Keyer Unit
may be replaced with Modulator CAY-50AGU to con-
vert the Transceiver to the SR-a Transceiver CAY-
43ADK.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-11
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Par. 4c(1)
Jo
Figure 1-7. Monitor Receiver CAY-46ADK
c. MONITOR RECEIVER CAY-46AKD.
(1) The Monitor Receiver, shown in Fig. 1-7, is
built in a welded aluminum box-like structure formed
of aluminum angles and gussets. This structure has
dimensions of 20'N x 145/8 x 131/4 inches. The chassis,
carrying the main tubes, tuning components and echo
box, is separately shockmounted within the main
frame. It has a small front panel on which the con-
trols and the echo box meter are mounted. Protection
from shock and vibration is afforded by four shock-
mounts.
(2) The power transformer is mounted on a deck
which is secured directly to the main frame and is not
shockmounted. Connections between the transformer,
as well as the main connections to the receiver circuits
and echo box, are made with flexible cables so as not
to damp the effect of the shockmounts.
(3) On the upper left-hand corner of the front
panel is the ECHO BOX METER. In the top center
is the instruction plate and to the right of this plate
are the two fuse warning indicator lights and a-c
power fuses. Below the fuses are two control knobs,
located just above the center of the panel. The knob
in the left-hand position is the I.F. GAIN control and
the right-hand knob is the R.F. TRIMMER control.
The large control in the lower left-hand corner is the
ECHO BOX TUNE dial and the switch just above it
is the ECHO BOX switch. The large tuning dial in
the lower right-hand corner of the panel is the RE-
CEIVER TUNE control for tuning the receiver.
d. MONITOR SCOPE CAY-55AFD.
(1) The Monitor Scope, shown in Fig. 1-8, is
1-12
built on a small aluminum chassis and the front panel
is bolted to this chassis. Dimensions of the unit are
19/it; x 145/8 x 91/4 inches. This chassis slides into a
heavy steel case to protect the scope from the intense
magnetic fields existing around the transmitter. The
steel case is equipped with a carrying handle for use
when the scope is removed from its position and used
as a test instrument. In the rear of this case is a set
of steel clips. Around these clips are wrapped the a-c
power cord and plug used when the Monitor Scope
is out of the Transceiver Console. This cord is not
used when the unit is in the Transceiver frame. The
rear of the case has a liirge open slot through which
protrude a coaxial plug and some banana jacks. When
the scope is mounted in the Transceiver Console, these
jacks make contact with a set of plugs in the Trans-
ceiver frame. The Scope receives a-c, trigger, and
video voltages through these jacks. Another set of
jacks is provided to supply the external trigger voltage,
and to accept the signal being measured when the
unit is used as a test scope.
Figure 1-8. Monitor Scope CAY-55AFD
(2) The cathode ray tube is mounted in the
center of the chassis. The tube face is viewed through
a bezel in the upper center section of the front panel.
Two controls appear in the upper left-hand section of
the front panel. These are the FOCUS and V CEN-
TER controls; the FOCUS control being nearest the
edge of the panel. In a corresponding position on the
right-hand side are two similar controls. The left-
hand control is the H CENTER adjustment; that on
the right is the INTENSITY adjustment. Below the
tube is a row of controls. These are, reading from
left to right, VIDEO GAIN control, two fuses and
their fuse indicator lights, RANGE SELECTOR switch,
POWER ON-OFF switch, POWER ON-OFF indicator
light, and the SWEEP LENGTH control.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
---1.?
41=2 4
Ma
.J
t
1
PU
1
.
k
l v
Figure 1-9. Transceiver Console CAY-43ADK
(SR-a Modified)
ORIGINAL
SECTION 1
Par. 4d(3) I
(3) To remove the Monitor Scope from its posi-
tion in the Transceiver Console, the four captive
screws must be loosened. Then, the unit may be
pulled forward and out of the Transceiver Console.
All connections are broken automatically at the jacks
when the unit is pulled out.
e. TRANSCEIVER CONSOLE CAY-43ADK (SR-a
Only).
(1) GENERAL.?The components of the Trans-
ceiver Console are housed in the same cabinet as is the
SR Transceiver Console. Its total weight is approxi-
mately the same as that of the SR Transceiver Console.
Components of the transmitting oscillator, its power
supply, control circuits, and the duplexer are built
permanently into the Console. The Monitor Scope,
Monitor Receiver, and the interconnection panel are
separate components which mount in the Transceiver
Console. See Fig. 1-9. The cabinet is mounted on
four plunger type shockmounts which raise the entire
cabinet about four inches clear of the deck. Dials and
controls of the transmitting components are mounted
on the front panels of the Console. Three access doors
are provided in the front of the Console for access to
the transmitting oscillator and the transmitter oscil-
lator power supplies. Access to the other components
may be secured by removal of the side and back
shields. The plug-in-units may be reached by sliding
them out of their positions. Transceiver Console
CAY-43ADK may be a factory produced unit or it
may be a field modified CAY-43ACM. If it is the
latter, it will bear the nameplate CAY-43ADK and in
addition, it will have a nameplate with SR-a on it.
The modification consists of the removal of Keyer
Unit CAY-67AAD, the installation of an interconnec-
tion panel in its place and certain minor circuit
changes. The Monitor Scope and Monitor Receiver
are the same in both units and are in every way
interchangeable.
(2) TRANSMITTING OSCILLATOR. ? The
transmitting oscillator in the CAY-43ADK is mechani-
cally identical with the one in the CAY-43ACM. The
only changes are electrical and consist of the changes
necessary to key the oscillator in the plate circuit by
means of a keying pulse of high voltage obtained from
the Modulator CAY-50AGU.
(3) INTERCONNECTION PANEL.?The inter-
connection panel is built in a box-like frame with
187/s x 145/8 x 111/4 inch dimensions and formed of
aluminum angles. Its various components are mounted
on a deck which is bolted to the frame. Attached to
the deck is a vertical terminal board with a bent angle
frame for attaching the cables and leads to two con-
nectors. These cables are connected in this manner in
order to bring the power supplied from the Modulator
to the Transceiver. Refer to Fig. 1-3. To the left of
the terminal board, and mounted on the deck, is the
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-13
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I Par. 4e(3)
resistor assembly. Unlike the other units of the Trans-
ceiver,? the interconnection panel cannot be removed
from the Console. When its four captive screws are
released or loosened, the front panel may be removed.
f. MODULATOR CAY-50AGU (SR-a Only).
(1) Modulator CAY-50AGU- is shown in Fig.
1-10. It contains the pulse repetition frequency oscil-
lator, low voltage power supply, pulse-forming net-
work, output pulse transformer, and the necessary con-
trol circuit components. The electrical components
of the Modulator are located in a metal cabinet which
is mounted on four shockmounts. The cabinet which
houses the components of the Modulator is 231/2 ,x
154c x 271/4 inches in size. The front panel and top
of the Modulator are equipped with ventilating louvres
and are removable, being held in place by captive
screws. Access to all of the parts of the unit may be
obtained by removing either the top panel, front panel,
or both.
(2) The components in the first fifty Modulators
were mounted on the floor of the unit, except for
minor parts which were mounted on small sub panels.
In Modulators of Serial Number 51 and greater, the
pulse-forming components are mounted on the floor
of the Modulator. The fuses, fuse indicator lamps,
two test jacks, frequency adjustment and the low volt-
age components are mounted on a removable plate or
chassis. The time delay relay is mounted to the frame
in the upper right hand corner. Certain minor com-
ponents are mounted inside on the left-hand wall of
the unit. The fuses, fuse lamps, test jacks, and fre-
1-14
Figure 1-10. Modulator CAY-50AGU
quency adjustment protrude through holes in the front
panel of the cabinet. See Fig. 1-10.
(3) Connections to the unit from the Transceiver
are made through a junction box on the left-hand side
of the unit. Two connectors are provided for the high
voltage and the pulse cables. The control cable is
installed through a stuffing tube located conveniently
in the junction box at the time the equipment is being
installed.
(4) The dimensions of the unit are such that it
may be located in the same position as the Auto-
Dehydrator, Navy Model CAKB-10AEK if it is neces-
sary to do so in conditions where space is at a premium.
The shockmounts are equipped with skids having the
same dimensions and mounting holes as the Auto-
Dehydrator. These same mounting holes, etc., may be
employed for installing the Modulator. The Auto.
Dehydrator could then be mounted close to the
Antenna with which it is associated.
g. INDICATOR CONSOLE CAY-46ADJ.
(1) The Indicator Console CAY-46ADJ consists
of three aluminum cabinets bolted together to form a
shielded three-section assembly. Its dimensions are
o x 419A6 x 296 inches. These three cabinets,
mounted on a shockmounted cradle, contain the six
electrical components which make up the Console.
The general appearance of the Console may be seen by
referring to Fig. 1-11. The outline and dimensions of
the individual electrical components, when removed
from the Console, may be found on separate outline
drawings for each unit, in Section 3 and in the descrip-
tions of these units. Fig. 1-11 shows the location of
the six components in the Indicator Console. It can
be seen that the Console Receiver is located in the
upper section of the left-hand cabinet. The lower
part of this cabinet is split into two sections. The
General Control Unit occupies the lower left-hand
section, and the IFF Coordinator occupies the right-
hand section. The entire center cabinet is occupied
by the PPI Indicator. The Range Scope is mounted
in the upper part of the right-hand cabinet and the
lower section contains the Bearing Indicator. All of
the various components have their major operating
controls on their front panels. Each component is
equipped with handles for pulling the unit out of
the Console when desired.
(2) All three cabinet tops are removable, each
being held in place by six Dzus type fasteners. It is
only necessary to give the screwheads of these fasteners
a quarter turn in order to remove the tops. Inside the
top of each of the three cabinets, on a deck above the
components, ?the the terminal boards. These boards
are for the interconnection of Console components and
for connecting the Console to other components of the
SR and SR-a Radar Equipments. Connection of the
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAIDUESCRIPTION) NAtt(91111P2MB0)921V SEOTIODE V
Par. 4g(2) I
Figure 1-11. Indicator Console CAY-46ADJ
cables, coming from equipment external to the Con-
sole, is made through three junction boxes which may
be located on the back of each cabinet or on the two
outer sides. Spare fuses, for use in the various compo-
nents, are installed in spare fuse containers mounted
on the front top edge of the cabinets. An outlet for
115-volt a-c power is located on the upper right-hand
corner of the center cabinet. This outlet may be used
for attaching a trouble lamp or soldering iron when
necessary.
(3) The chassis of each of the console's six com-
ponents may be slid forward two-thirds of the way
out of its cabinet for inspection or maintenance with-
out disturbing any wires. Connections to the indi-
vidual components are made with flexible cables which
ORIGINAL
have sufficient slack to allow the units to be pulled
forward. The components may be operated in this
position. A locking mechanism holds the chassis when
it is slid out of the Console and prevents it from
slipping forward or backward when the ship rolls. In
service, the chassis is slid completely into the Console
and is rigidly held by captive screws. These screws
engage in threaded inserts in the aluminum side flanges
of the Console. Interlocks are provided so that re-
moval of any component immediately shuts off the a-c
power to the other components in the same cabinet.
Power may be restored by twisting the small metal
turn buttons which will hold the interlock switch in
a closed position. When it is desired to operate the
Console with one or more of the chassis slid forward
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-15
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION
I Par. 4g(3)
NAVSHIPS
for purposes of test or maintenance, power may be
obtained by closing the interlocks with the small metal
turn buttons located adjacent to them.
(4) Individual components may be completely
removed from the Console. In order to do this, it is
first necessary to disconnect the wires which connect
the unit to the terminal boards in the top of the
cabinets. Removal is accomplished by pulling the
units forward to the locked position and then releasing
the latch mechanism. The latch is released by pushing
in the two small buttons located on the Console cabinet
adjacent to the lower edge of the cabinet section in
which the component is located. These two buttons
operate the latch mechanism and release the chassis
so it may be pulled completely out of the cabinet.
h. CONSOLE RECEIVER CAY-46ADH.
(1) The Console Receiver is shown in Fig. 1-12.
Various parts of the Console Receiver are mounted on
two small chassis and a front panel. One chassis is
rigidly mounted and contains the power supply. The
other chassis is floating and contains the receiving
components. These chassis are mounted within a box-
like structure formed of aluminum angles, gussets and
plates. All structural components are of aluminum.
This box-like frame is 26)4c x 121/4 x 121/4 inches in
size. The front of the floating chassis is connected to
the fixed front panel by a small auxiliary front panel.
This auxiliary panel is separated from the fixed panel
by a soft rub6er gasket. The front chassis is shock-
mounted from the box-like structure by rubber shock-
mounts. The entire assembly, consisting of the aux-
Figure 1-12. Console Receiver CAY-46ADH
1-16
900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
iliary front panel and front chassis, may float within
the main frame. Thus, it secures protection from
vibration and shock.
(2) The front chassis contains the IF section of
the receiver. Likewise, the auxiliary front panel con-
tains the operating- controls and jamming indicator
meter shown in Fig. 1-12. On the lower section of
the front panel is a small door which may be opened
in order to operate certain anti-jamming controls.
(3) The video output section of the receiver and
the power supply are located on the second small
chassis which is not shockmounted, but secured di-
rectly to the aluminum frame. Power and signal input
voltages are supplied through two terminal boards and
a jack mounted on the right-hand side of the frame.
Flexible leads, from the terminal boards in the top
of the cabinet, attach to these terminal boards on the
unit. The leads are cabled and the length is sufficient
to permit sliding the unit forward in the cabinet for
inspection and maintenance.
(4) All main operating controls are on the front
panel. In the upper left-hand corner of the auxiliary
front panel, inside the rubber gasket, is located the
type nameplate of the unit. To the right of the name-
plate, in the top center of the panel, is the JAMMING
INDICATOR meter. To the right of the meter are
two fuses, and above these fuses are two fuse indicator
lights. These lights glow when the fuse directly below
it is open. In this manner, an operator may quickly
locate a blown fuse and replace it.
(5) In the second row from the top are two
controls and two switches. The left-hand control is
the BAND PASS control. It governs the band width
of the receiver and remotely regulates the pulse width
and repetition rate of the transmitter in Transceiver
CAY-43ACM: When used with Transceiver CAY-
43ADK this switch has no control over the pulse width
which is fixed at four microseconds. In the SR-a, the
BAND PASS control is used only to control the band-
width of the i-f amplifiers in the Console Receiver.
The left-hand switch is the PPI MARKER, used to
apply markers to the remote PPI installations which
do not generate their own markers. The other switch
is the ECHO BOX which remotely turns on the echo
box circuits in the Monitor Receiver.
(6) In the second row, the right hand control
is the IF GAIN. It remotely controls the Monitor
Receiver gain. On the lower section of the front
panel marked A.J. CONTROLS, is a hinged access
door which opens downward. Inside this door will
be found five controls used by the operator to counter-
act attempts to jam the radar equipment. As supplied
on Contract NXsr-30306, these anti-jam knobs are not
equipped with locking devices. On Contract NXsr-
46032, four of these controls are provided with locking
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
mechanisms which may be used to lock the controls
in place after adjustments are made. The locking
mechanism consists of a stainless steel disc located
directly underneath the knob. Turning this disc in
a clockwise direction locks the knob. This action
squeezes a slotted expansion nut against the control
shaft to create a friction brake. The disc should be
rotated in a counterclockwise direction in order to free
the control.
Figure 1-13. FPI Indicator CAY-55ADV
(Manual Cursor)
ORIGINAL
SECTION 1
Par. 4h(6) I
PPI INDICATORS CAY-55ADV AND CAY-
55ADV-1.
(1) The PPI Scope or Indicator is shown in Figs.
1-13 and 1-14. Its chassis is a box-like structure ap-
proximately 11 x 22 x 24 inches in size, made up of
aluminum angles, gussets and plates welded together.
A deck is placed inside, about half way up from the
bottom of the frame. Another runs vertically up to
the horizontal deck. The principal components of the
equipment are mounted on these two decks. Another,
vertical deck is mounted above the first horizontal
deck towards the rear of the unit. On this are mounted
the servo-amplifier, video amplifier and marker output
tubes. Most of the other components are mounted on
the larger vertical deck. The heavier parts, such as
the power transformers and chokes, are mounted along
this deck close to the bottom. Smaller components
are mounted above them. A small blower motor circu-
lates air around the components, to dissipate heat and
to prevent hot spots in the vicinity of the tubes.
(2) Components are mounted on the left-hand
side of the vertical deck when looking from the front
panel of the unit. Their connecting lugs extend
through the deck, and most of the wiring is located
on the right-hand side. The high voltage power sup-
ply is located at the very rear of this chassis, so that
it will be protected when the shelf is pulled out two-
thirds of the way for inspection and service. Terminal
boards are mounted on the right-hand side of the ver-
tical deck to hold resistors and capacitors. Most of
the maintenance tests and checks may be made from
this side. High voltage terminals are completely en-
closed by a cover to protect the technician when work-
ing on the equipment. ?
(3) The mechanism necessary to rotate the deflec-
tion yoke and to hold the cathode ray tube is located
on top of the horizontal deck. This is an assembly
consisting of three large castings. They contain the
synchro-control transformer, a small servo-driven
motor, gears of the drive train, rotating yoke, focus
coil and cathode ray tube. The synchro-control trans-
former and the drive motor are geared together with
a 108:1 pinion gear drive. The yoke coil is geared
directly to the synchro-control transformer by a 1:1
split spring gear to eliminate backlash. The yoke coil
itself is mounted on two large ball bearing races placed
at both ends of the coil assembly. These ball bearings
are made of non-ferrous material to prevent them from
becoming magnetized and deflecting the electron beam
of the tube. The races are made of beryllium copper,
silver-plated; while the bearings are made of Pyrex
glass. The cathode ray tube is clamped in the mount
by a bezel ring protruding from the front panel. A
small auxiliary clamp, in the rear of the mount, grasps
the neck of the tube and holds it against the bezel
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-17
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION
I Par. 4i(3)
NAVSHIPS 900,946
ring. It also serves to center the neck of the tube in
the coils. The focus coil is mounted behind the deflec-
tion yoke coils, and secured by two knurled thumb
screws which can be loosened to permit adjusting the
focus coil when aligning the equipment. A handle
is provided on the focus coil for this purpose.
(4) In the assembly near the front of the tube
are three pilot lights for illuminating the engraving
Figure 1-14. PPI Indicator CAY-55ADV-1
(Geared Cursor)
1-18
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
on the ring of the bezel. These markings consist of
a scale graduated from 0 to 360 degrees engraved
around the edge of a piece of glass. These pilot lights
may be dimmed by means of the DIAL DIMMER con-
trol, located on the front panel of the equipment, just
to the left and below the PPI tube. As the assembly
passes through the front panel, it is securely engaged
by a rubber gasket which makes a water-tight junction.
(5) On the CAY-55ADV, a small ring casting
and a cursor assembly are mounted on the front panel.
See Fig. 1-13. The cursor ring consists of a knurled
ring which is firmly secured to another piece of Plexi-
glass, mounted in the front of the bearing ring. The
cursor has a line drawn from its center to the edge,
in such a manner as to approximate the electrical
sweep of the equipment. The entire ring may be
rotated by hand when it is desired to locate the bearing
of a target. An amber filter and a red filter are fur-
nished with the cursor, to provide for different light
conditions. Their use is described in the operating
instructions section of the handbook. The PPI Indi-
cator CAY-55ADV-1 employs a geared cursor. The
geared cursor assembly consists of a stationary en-
graved azimuth scale and a rotating piece of Plexiglass
with a line drawn from its center to its outer edge.
The Plexiglass cursor is mounted on a spur spring
gear that is driven by a spur pinion which is mounted
on the control shaft. The control shaft is driven by
a small hand wheel on the upper right-hand corner of
the cursor casting. See Fig. 1-14. The control shaft
is also geared to an external shaft through two bevel
gears. The external shaft permits the setting of the
cursor to be mechanically transmitted to remote bear-
ing indicators. A Plexiglass filter is mounted on the
cursor frame in front of the cursor. The entire assem-
bly is mounted on a hinge and is held in place by
means of two thumb-screivs on the right-hand side of
the casting. When these screws are removed, the
assembly can be swung away from the front panel to
allow the PPI tube to be replaced or for cleaning and
lubricating the cursor. When the handwheel is ro-
tated, the cursor plate also rotates and the engraved
line on the cursor plate is made to coincide with a
target. The azimuth reading under the cursor line is
then taken as the azimuth bearing of the target.
(6) Two large terminal blocks are bolted to the
angles in the upper right-hand side of the chassis.
They connect the incoming and outgoing cables from
the chassis, to the main terminal blocks on the case
of the assembly. A flexible cable is provided between
these two sets of terminal boards, so that the chassis
may be slid part way out of the case, as previously
explained. The top deck is underneath a removable
mounting plate. A deck is placed beneath a removable
cover plate in the top of the center case in which the
unit is located. All connecting wires are secured to
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION NAVSHIPS 900,946
terminal boards located on this deck. There are two
such terminal boards, a bridge-or-terminate switch,
with its associated terminating resistors, and a small
thermal overload breaker which is in the circuit lead-
ing to the convenience outlet on the top of the cabinet.
(7) The front panel is bolted to the frame by
eight thumb screws. The main operating controls are
on the front panel. The top left-hand control is the
DIAL DIMMER control for dimming the dial lights.
To the right of it, on the same row, is a small opening
through which may be read the range on which the
equipment is operating. The second row of controls
from the top are the VIDEO GAIN (left), the FINE
INTENSITY (center) and the RANGE SWITCH
(right). On the next row are the FOCUS control
(left), the CENTER EXPAND switch (center) and
the MARKERS switch (left). The lower row of
controls and indicators consists of the fuses and their.,
indicator lamps (two left-hand items marked 3 AMP),
the RELATIVE BEARING INDICATOR lamp (cen-
ter) and another fuse and its indicator lamp (marked
2 AMPS). On the right-hand end of this double row
is the ON-OFF switch and the ON-OFF indicator light.
This indicator light may be dimmed by twisting the
knurled ring around the lens.
j. RANGE SCOPE CAY-55AFB.
(1) The Range Scope is shown in Fig. 1-15. It
is constructed in a manner similar to the other com-
ponents of the console. It consists of a box-like welded
aluminum structure approximately 121/4 x 121/4 x 269Ao
Figure 1-15. Range Scope CAY-55AFB
ORIGINAL
SECTION 1
Par. 4i(6) I
inches. Various tubes and parts are mounted on three
decks located within this framework. The front panel,
however, is an aluminum casting, rather than sheet
aluminum. The cathode ray tube, upon which the
radar indications appear, extends from the front panel
to a point approximately three-quarters of the way to
the back of the structure. It is located slightly above
the horizontal centerline of the unit. One of the decks
is on the right-hand side of the tube, one is on the left-
hand side, while the other extends across the back of
the unit behind the base of the cathode ray tube.
(2) On the left-hand deck are mounted the tubes
and some of the electrical components which form the
marker and video circuits. On the right-hand deck
are the components of the gate and sweep circuits.
The rear deck contains tubes and components of the
high and low voltage power supplies. Two smaller
decks are suspended from each of the two side decks.
These may be called the top and bottom decks. The
top deck in both cases is primarily used to mount large
resistors, while the bottom deck is used to mount large
capacitors. These components are usually associated
with the tubes and circuits on the larger right and
left-hand decks above them. On the left-hand side of
the unit, about a quarter of the distance to the rear,
is a small bracket which mounts the potentiometers
necessary to align the various circuits of the unit.
These potentiometers are all provided with locks so
that, once they are set, adjustments are not easily
disturbed. Three terminal boards are provided on the
right-hand side of the unit for connection to the flex-
ible cables from the terminal boards in the top of the
cabinet.
(3) The bottom of the front section of the unit,
beneath the cathode ray tube, is occupied by the
potentiometer casting assembly. This casting assembly
houses a precision potentiometer, together with the
gears, shafts and bearings necessary for its operation.
This potentiometer is controlled by the RANGE STEP
control on the front panel. Also mounted on this
casting, and geared to the potentiometer, are two small
mechanical counters. These counters are also con-
trolled by the RANGE STEP knob, and are so geared
to it that they indicate the range in yards and miles.
These counters are seen through small windows in the
front panel of the unit. The counters are illuminated
by two small lucite rods which carry the light from
two pilot lights on the casting. In this manner, the
counters may be read in the dark. Directly in back
of the RANGE STEP knob is a small micro-switch.
This switch is actuated by pushing the RANGE STEP
knob in or pulling it out. When the knob is in, this
switch cuts off the circuit forming the range step.
When it is pulled out, it turns on the range step
circuit.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-19
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
'I SECTION
I Par. 4j(4)
NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
prI, 0, GAY- 2 3 E v
; . fl; 4:1Xolt0e/IITC.1,4,
'.....111111111111, ,
Figure 1-16. 1FF Coordinator CAY-23AEV
(4) The face of the cathode ray indicator tube
appears through a window in the upper center of the
front panel. The entire length of the tube is sur-
rounded by a high permeability shield. The front of
the tube is supported by a rubber ring in the front of
the shield and by a spring clamp arrangement at the
rear. The spring clamp is also mounted on rubber,
providing a full rubber floating mounting for the tube.
Various knobs and controls neceessary to operate the
unit are mounted on the front panel. Most of these
controls are equipped with locks and detents to prevent
accidental displacement when once set by the operator.
The upper left-hand knob is the INTENSITY control
used to set the brilliancy of the sweep on the face of
the indicator tube. Below it, is the VERTICAL CEN-
TERING control. Below the VERTICAL CENTER-
ING control is the MARKERS ON-OFF switch. In
1-20
the lower left-hand corner of the panel is the RANGE
SWITCH, with the indicator window just above it.
This window shows the range to which the RANGE
SWITCH is set. On the right of the indicator tube,
in the upper right hand corner of the panel, is the
FOCUS control. Just below it is the HORIZONTAL
CENTERING control and below this is the SWEEP
LENGTH control. In the lower right-hand corner of
the panel is the nameplate. Just above the nameplate
is the RANGE STEP knob used to control position
of the break in the line used for accurate ranging of
target indications on the cathode ray tube. In the
bottom center portion of the panel are the two fuses
and their indicator lights. Directly above the fuses
are the counters which operate with the RANGE
STEP control. They indicate the range in yards or
miles to a target which has been matched with the
range step on the range sweep.
k. IFF COORDINATOR CAY-23AEV.
(1). The IFF Coordinator is shown in Fig. 1-16.
It is constructed in a box-like frame of welded alumi-
num angles, similar to the other components of the
Console. This unit is approximately 51/2 x 11 x 24
inches, or approximately half the size of the Range
Scope and Console Receiver. A horizontal deck runs
from the front to the rear of the frame and is located
approximately three inches up from the bottom. Most
of the tubes and components of the unit are mounted
on this deck. Tubes are arranged in a straight line on
the right-hand side of the deck. Some of the smaller
components are located in a line on the left-hand side.
The power supply is mounted at the rear of the deck.
A terminal board is located on a bracket in the upper
front right-hand side of the framework. The front
panel is of sheet aluminum, and is bolted to the frame.
It contains the operating controls of the unit.
(2) The major controls are located on the front
panel. In the top center is the CHALLENGE switch
used by the operator to interrogate targets. This
switch turns the IFF equipment on and provides for
the IFF indication on the Range Scope. A small door
located in the center of the front panel, when opened,
discloses two more controls on SR Equipments below
Serial No. 90. These are the IFF RECEIVER GAIN
and the ECHO SUP. control. They are remote controls
for the receiver in the IFF equipment. On SR and
SR-a Equipments above Serial No. 90 there are three
controls under the door. In addition to the controls
described above, a switch called RELAY RESET has
been placed above the ECHO SUP. control. This
switch is a remote control for circuits in the IFF
Equipment associated with the SR or SRa Equipments.
1. BEARING INDICATOR CAY-55AFC.
(1) The Bearing Indicator is constructed in an
aluminum framework similar to the other components.
It is shown in Fig. 1-17. The Bearing Indicator is
approximately 121/4 x 121/4 x 261/2 inches in size and
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
Figure 1-17. Bearing Indicator CAY-55AFC
is of welded construction. Most of the indicating
mechanism is supported from the front panel or from
a heavy plate which is installed vertically about four
inches behind the front panel. Mounted on the back
of the vertical panel are three synchros. One is a 5F
and another is a 5D synchro. These are, respectively,
the 1:1 true and relative bearing synchros which are
connected to the indicator dials. The third is a 5CT
36:1 synchro which is geared to the slewing handwheel
and is used to position the Antenna. Behind the
synchro assembly, and at the top of the chassis, are
located two large capacitors used to correct the power
factor of the synchros. Below, and to the rear of
these capacitors, is mounted the slewing motor and a
gear reducer which reduces the motor speed. The
output of the gear reducer is connected through a
coupling to the handwheel. In this manner, it also
drives the 5CT when the motor is running. Two
terminal boards provided on the right-hand side of
the unit, connect the flexible cables from the terminal
boards in the top of the cabinet.
(2) At the rear of the unit, on a deck mounted
vertically against the back of the frame, are located
two dry disk rectifiers, a transformer and a capacitor.
These form the power supply for the slewing motor.
Also mounted on this rear deck, is a small blower
motor for circulating air throughout the cabinet in
which the unit is mounted. The output vent of the
blower motor is directed upward so as to cool the
components of the Range Scope which is mounted
directly above the Bearing Indicator. Controls and
indicating devices are located on the front panel. In
the center top section of the panel is a window
ORIGINAL
SECTION 1
Par. 41(1) I
through which may be read the TRUE BEARING and
RELATIVE BEARING dials of the unit. Below these
dials is the SLEWING MOTOR switch. To the right,
and below the slewing motor switch are the TRUE
and REL bearing lights. These lights indicate to the
operator which type of bearing indication is employed.
On the same level as the two lights, but on the opposite
side of the panel is the HAND SLEW control. In the
center and slightly below the line containing the bear-
ing lights is the ROTATION-EMERGENCY-NOR-
MAL switch. Below this switch are two fuses and two
fuse indicator lights. The type nameplate is located
in the lower left-hand corner of the panel.
in. GENERAL CONTROL UNIT CAY-23AEW.
(1) The General Control Unit, shown in Fig.
1-18, is similar in construction to the IFF Coordinator.
atz. tz
iIr
ialijnitto
CAUTION
i. TURN RAENATIOR OFI TO'INCIFT PIXIE '
?F LEFF TN liAll ? SECONDS AFTER pig T . ')
IlEfORE IMINATICIN IS TORRED 'ON .4NIE
tf
? fn. -F3EiR
Gt.MPA,
? ??
Figure 1-18. General Control Unit CAY-23AEW
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-21
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I Par. 4m(1)
Figure 1-19. Rotation Control Unit CAY-50AEB
It is in an aluminum angle frame with a horizontal
deck running the full length of the unit. Components
of the General Control Unit occupy only the front
half of the deck. The rear half of the deck is equipped
with sockets and tube locks for storing a set of spare
tubes used in the various components of the Indicator
Console. A blower motor and fan assembly is located
1-22
near the center of the front half of the chassis. The
motor is a split-phase motor. Its phase-splitting capa-
citor is located near it. The fan forces air upward,
to cool the Console Receiver. Terminal boards, for
interconnection with terminal boards in the top of the
cabinet, are located on the left-hand side of the unit.
They are mounted on two brackets which are sup-
ported between the deck and the top of the frame.
The controls and indicating components are mounted
on the front panel of the unit. In the top center of
the panel is the KILOVOLTS meter. It is used to
indicate the voltage being applied to the transmitter.
Below it is the RADIATION switch, for controlling
the transmitter. Below this are four buttons, the
POWER ON?OFF, PLATE VOLTAGE RAISE?
LOWER controls which control the application of
high voltage to the transmitter. Below these buttons
is the INDICATOR CONSOLE?ON?OFF switch.
It controls the application of power to the various
components in the Console.
n. CRADLE CAY-10313.?The Cradle is a welded
aluminum structure supported by eight shockmounts.
It is used to support the components of the Indicator
Consoles CAY-46ADJ and the CAY-46ADJ-1. Its
dimensions are 491%2 x 251/4 x 31/8 inches. The Cradle
is a rectangular framework with two cross members.
Shockmounts are located at each corner and at the
junctions of the cross members and the rails of the
cradle.
o. ROTATION CONTROL UNIT CAY-50AEB.
The Rotation Control Unit is shown in Fig. 1-19. The
dimensions of the case of this Unit are 31ho x 141/4 x
30 inches. It is divided into two sections containing
the Servo Amplifier and Rectifier Power Unit. The
Rotation Control Unit provides the voltages which
direct the antenna's rotation. Interconnections to the
unit are made through a junction box with dimensions
of 111/4 x 4 x 8 inches. The junction box may be
located on either of the two sides of the cabinet or
on the back. Consequently, the dimensions of the
cabinet itself must be increased by the junction box
dimensions, depending upon the location of the junc-
tion box. The two electrical components are indi-
vidually constructed and slide into the cabinet. The
Servo Amplifier, in this unit, is placed above the
Rectifier Power Unit. Connections between these two
units are made on the terminal boards inside the top
of the cabinet in the same manner as the indicator
console. External connections to the unit also termi-
nate at these terminal boards, being brought in
through the junction box. The cabinet is shock-
mounted on four mounts which are bolted to the deck.
This protects the components from vibration and
shock. The individual units are fastened in place with
screws. Inspection may be made by loosening these
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
Figure 1-20. Servo Amplifier CAY-50AEU
screws and pulling the chassis forward. They may
then be removed by loosening the wires to the units
from the terminal boards in the top of the chassis.
p. SERVO AMPLIFIER CAY-50AEU.?The Servo
Amplifier is shown in Fig. 1-20. It is built within a
box-like structure of welded aluminum angles and
gussets. A front panel is secured to this structure, and
a deck is provided inside which runs the full length
of the unit. Components of the unit are mounted on
this deck, or under it. Most of the wiring is under-
neath the deck. The size of the box-like structure is
263/8 x 121/4 x 121/4 inches. The front panel extends
approximately '142 inch beyond the front dimensions
in all directions. Handles are affixed to either side of
the front panel for pulling the unit out of its cabinet.
No operating controls are found on the front panel,
all adjustments to the unit being made by alignment
controls inside the unit. On the front panel, there-
fore, are found only the instruction and type name-
plates, two active fuses and their fuse alarm indicator
lights, and two containers which hold spare fuses.
q. RECTIFIER POWER UNIT CAY-20ACY.?The
Rectifier Power Unit is shown in Fig. 1-21. It is
assembled in a frame similar in construction to the
frame of the Servo Amplifier. The size of the unit is
263/8 x 121/4 x 121/4 inches. Components in the unit are
mounted directly to the frame members. In the front
end are located the operating relays. Near the center
of the unit is the blower motor for cooling the rectifier
used to rotate the antenna when the ROTATION
ORIGINAL
SECTION 1
Par. 4o I
switch on the Bearing Indicator is in the PPI or
EMERGENCY position. This rectifier unit provides
d-c voltage direct to the antenna drive motor. On the
front panel of the unit are located two small circuit-
breakers. The left-hand unit is the breaker for turn-
ing the circuit to the antenna motor on and is indi-
cated as ANT. TRAIN MOTOR. The right-hand
breaker controls application of power to the motor
which drives the servo-generator. It is identified as
the SERVO-GEN. MOTOR control. Below these
breakers, in the lower center section of the panel, is
the OFF-ON switch. To the right of it is a fuse with
its fuse indicator light. Two handles are provided on
the front panel of the unit.
r. CRADLE CAY-10314.?The Cradle is a welded
aluminum structure supported by four shockmounts.
It is used to support the Rotation Control Unit.
Dimensions of the Cradle are 251/4 x 14 x 33/8 inches.
The framework is braced by means of spot-welded
aluminum gussets. Shockmounts are located at each
of the corners.
Figure 1-21. Rectifier Power Unit CAY-20ACY
s. ECHO BOX ANTENNA CAY-66AHK.?The
Echo Box Antenna is shown in Fig. 1-22. It is a
folded coaxial antenna with an overall length of 463/8
inches. Its largest diameter is 2 inches. It consists of
Figure 1-22. Echo Box Antenna CAY-66AH1(
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-23
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION
1-24
NAVSHIPS 900,946
AMPLIFIER UNIT CM-50131
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
SYNCHRO UNIT CM-211103
Figure 1-23. Synchro Amplifier
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
a coaxial line whose center conductor extends a quarter
wavelength beyond the end of the outer conductor.
The end of the outer conductor is attached to a quarter
wavelength of 2 inch tubing which extends back over
the outer conductor, giving the effect of folding the
outer conductor back on itself. The end of the coaxial
line opposite the dipole is supplied with a connector
to facilitate the connection of the antenna assembly
to a flexible coaxial line. This line connects at its
other end to the Echo Box in the Monitor Receiver
located in the Transceiver.
t. SYNCHRO UNIT CM-211103.
(1) The Synchro Unit is one of the two units
shown in Fig. 1-23. The larger unit is the Synchro
Unit and the smaller unit is the Amplifier Unit or tube
chassis. The two units together are the Synchro
Amplifier. The Synchro Amplifier is not supplied by
the manufacturer but is shipped with the equipment.
The Synchro Unit is contained in a metal box with
dimensions of 263/4 x 22 x 20 inches. It contains a
split phase drive motor, two synchros, a special com-
mutator transformer for relaying the ship's compass
voltages, and the necessary gear trains. A smaller box
is mounted on top of the main cabinet to house the
terminal boards, indicator lamps and a-c power switch.
The left-hand indicator lamp indicates the application
of compass voltage and the right-hand lamp indicates
the application of a line voltage by the operation of
the SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER POWER switch which is
located between the two lamps. Stuffing tubes are
SECTION 1
Par. 4s I
provided on each end of this box to receive the inter-
connecting cables. All of the components except the
switch, terminals and indicator lamps are contained in
the larger compartment. When the cover assembly
screws are removed, the box-like cover comes away
from the base to expose the components for servicing.
The Synchro unit is designed for wall mounting, the
base on which the parts are mounted being placed
against the wall.
u. AMPLIFIER UNIT CM-50131.?This unit is part
of the Synchro Amplifier and contains a chassis on
which is assembled the electronic servo amplifier
which supplies operating power to the split-phase
motor in the Synchro Unit. The amplifier is shown
in Fig. 1-23. It is slightly smaller than the Synchro
Unit, its dimensions being 241/4 x 211/4 x 171/4 inches.
Eyelets are attached to one side for maunting purposes.
The cover is attached with a piano type hinge and
secured in its closed position by four knurled thumb-
screws. A place is provided on one end for external
cable connections which are brought into the cabinet
to a terminal board on the side of the chassis. A ter-
minal board beneath the chassis is fitted with male
banana plugs which insert into female jacks or con-
nectors in a terminal board on the chassis when the
chassis is placed in the cabinet. The chassis is held
in place by machine screws. A guide rod makes it
impossible to place the chassis in the cabinet in ,a
reversed position. Two handles are provided for lifting
the chassis out of the cabinet.
Figure 1-24. Servo Generator CAY-21I192 or CAY-211192A
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-25
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION
I Par. 4v
NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
v. SERVO GENERATORS CAY-211192 AND CAY-
211192A.
(1) SERVO GENERATOR CAY-211192 (NXsr
30306) .?Servo Generator CAY-211192 is shown in Fig.
1-24. It consists of a motor driven exciter-generator
combination. It is a single-shaft, integrally-constructed
unit and is mounted to the deck by four mounting
brackets. Lifting eyes are provided for hoisting the
unit when desired. Over-all dimensions are 291%8 x
10%2 x 91%; inches. A junction box is mounted on
the side of the unit. The generator is located in the
center of the unit and the exciter is on the end oppo-
site the motor. Ventilation through the entire unit
is made possible by ventilating blades and ports on
the two opposite ends of the motor. A band around
the center of the motor over the commutator of the
generator may be removed for inspecting the com-
mutator and brushes. Zerk fittings are provided at
the points requiring lubrication.
(2) SERVO GENERATOR CAY-211192A ( NXsr-
46032 ).?Servo Generator CAY-211192A is shown in
Fig. 1-24. It is similar to the CAY-211192 in construc-
tion. The dimensions are the same. There is a dif-
ference in the type of lubrication fittings. The CAY-
211192A uses grease cup fittings. Retaining straps have
also been placed over the brush holders on the exciter
and the position of the starting capacitor on the a-c
drive motor has been changed. The motor and gen-
erator are also of slightly different design. Electrically
the CAY-211192A is very similar to the CAY-211192.
w. VOLTAGE STABILIZER CG-301252.?The Volt-
age Stabilizer, shown in Fig. 1-25, is provided to stabi-
lize the a-c line voltage input to the Transceiver Con-
sole and its components. It is 354, inches long, 20
Figure 1-25. Voltage Stabilizer CG-301252
1-26
inches wide, and 17 inches high. It weighs 284
pounds. It contains three transformers, a choke, and
two capacitors. Each capacitor actually consists of
two capacitors in parallel. A terminal board is mounted
on top of the output transformer and input and output
connections are made to its terminals. Holes are pro-
vided in one end of the case to receive stuffing tubes
carrying the input and output cables. The components
are mounted on a heavy gauge sheet metal base to
which are also attached the two ends. The top and
sides are held with short stud bolts at the ends and
round head machine bolts along the sides at the bottom
of the unit. Eyelets for hoisting are attached at the
center of each end. The Voltage Stabilizer is venti-
lated and cooled by means of louvres on the sides and
ends.
x. AUTO DEHYDRATOR CAKB-10AEK.
(1) The Auto Dehydrator is connected by a cop-
per tube to the air-filled coaxial line in the antenna
pedestal. It supplies dry air to this line under pres-
sure in order to prevent the collection of moisture,
corrosion, and the occurrence of arc-overs. The Auto
Dehydrator is constructed in a metal frame and
mounted on shockmounts. It is 331/2 x 221/2 x 34
inches in size. The two shockmounts on each side are
joined by a metal strip. This strip slides under a
bracket at the rear end. The front end of the strip is
bolted to the place where the unit is mounted. See
Fig. 1-26. The top, side, and end panels are perforated
for ventilation and may be removed for servicing the
unit.
(2) All of the controls are mounted on the front
panel. In the upper left-hand corner is the LINE
PRESSURE gauge. This gauge reads the pressure
being applied to the line by the Auto Dehydrator.
In the center top of the panel are the two reactivation
pilot lights. These show which of the drying chambers
is working and which is being reactivated. On the
right-hand top corner of the panel is the humidity
indicator. In the second row of controls, starting on
the left, is the LINE PRESSURE control and opposite
it on the right-hand edge of the panel is the ON-OFF
switch and the power pilot light. In the third row
of controls, on the left is the AIR-FLOW, or humidity
control, while on the right are the two line fuses and
a spare fuse.
(3) The components in the Auto-Dehydrator are
located on a deck at the bottom of the unit, or secured
to the front panel of one of the vertical uprights. The
drive motor is on the deck, near the center of the
unit with the air compressor mounted against the rear
of the unit just above it. Two silica-gel drying tanks
are located in the two rear corners of the unit. Most
of the controls and minor components are mounted
on the back of the front panel. Access to the Auto
Dehydrator is obtained by removing the side and back
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAVSHIPS 900,046
Figure 1-26. Auto Dehydrator CAKB-10AEK
shields. The dry air output is taken from a flared
fitting that protrudes through the right end panel of
the Auto Dehydrator.
y. ANTENNA PEDESTAL CAJS-21ACP.
(1) The Antenna Pedestal supports the antenna.
It contains the drive motor which causes the antenna
to rotate in azimuth and throughout 3600 in either
direction. It also contains the synchros which report
the position of the antenna to the Indicator Console.
The Antenna and Antenna Pedestal are shown in Fig.
1-27. The Pedestal derives power for rotation from a
d-c drive motor through a spur gear train with a step-
down ratio of 510.3 to 1. The entire assembly of this
gear train is assembled in a cast aluminum housing
or dome. This housing serves as a support for the
antenna and revolves about a central stationary pivot
or post. In addition to the gear train, gears are also
provided for driving the synchro position indicators.
The power output of the gear train is taken from a
bevel gear which drives around a bevel ring gear
which is permanently attached to the central pivot
column. From this, it will be seen that the entire gear
train rotates about a central axis. Since it is connected
to the antenna mounting, it causes the entire upper
part of the Pedestal to rotate. The Antenna is mount?d
on this rotating section. The rotating section is sup-
plied with a stowing lock arrangement to prevent
movement when the equipment is not in use.
ORIGINAL
SECTION 1
Par. 4x(3) I
(2) The rotating housing supports the Antenna,
transmission, drive motor, pedestal cover, brush blocks
and also covers the bevel ring gear collector ring
assembly. It is made of cast aluminum and it is sup-
ported on the main pivot post by means of two sleeve
type graphited bronze bearings. The bearings are
self-lubricating. The flanged end of the pivot column
supports the thrust load transmitted by the housing.
A threaded collar, secured to the pivot column above
the upper bearing of the housing, retains the bearing
to the pivot column. This threaded collar is adjusted
to permit .005 inch end play of the housing with
respect to the pivot column. The pivot post is flanged
at the bottom for retention of the thrust bearing seat
and as a means of securing the pedestal to the base
casting. The base casting is, in turn, secured to the
top of a mast or equivalent structure. The ring bevel
gear, about which the drive mechanism rotates, is
attached to the pivot column. Its machined hub sup-
ports the collector ring assembly which furnishes
power to the drive motor. Collector brushes rotate
about the pivot post and are attached to the rotating
housing. The post serves as a stationary bearing shaft
for the main housing; a means for keeping the bevel
gear stationary; a support for the synchrotie assembly
and housing through which the wires from the syn-
chroties and slip rings are passed. The upper end of
the post is designed to secure the concentric r-f line
in place and provide a rotating joint for the pressur-
ized r-f line.
Figure 1-27. Antenna Pedestal CAJS-21ACP
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-27
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION
I Par. 4y(3)
NAVSHIPS
(3) The synchrotie assembly, consisting of two
type 6DG synchro-differential generators, provides the
means for indicating the position of the Antenna. The
synchro-differential generators are secured directly to
a cast aluminum bracket which is, in turn, secured to
the pivot post. Connections to the two 6DG units are
made through two sets of connector blocks. One set
is located near the 6DG units and one set is in the
base of the mount. No sliding connections are re-
quired since both of these units are on the non-rotating
section of the pedestal. The locating stub of the
synchro mounting tube is made in two sections, both
secured to the pivot post and in turn bolted to each
other. A tapered end pin locates the mounting bracket
in its proper position with respect to the column. The
synchro units are secured to the mounting bracket by
means of a clamp ring which is secured to the bracket
by three screws. Loosening these screws, permits rota-
tion of the synchro units while aligning them with
respect to the synchro units in the Indicator Console.
(4) A 180-tooth ring gear, secured to the main
housing, meshes with a 180-tooth gear and drives one
6DG unit at a ratio of 1:1 with respect to the rotating
housing. A 30-tooth pini9n of an intermediate cluster
gear, meshes with the 1:1 synchro gear. In the other
half of the cluster, a 180-tooth gear meshes with a 30-
tooth pinion which drives the other 6DG unit at a
36:1 speed with respect to the main housing. The
shaft on which the gears are mounted are each sup-
ported by a bronze bushing. The outer diameter of
this bushing is eccentrically machined with respect to
its bore to provide a means of adjusting the backlash
between each set of mating gears. The synchro gear
train is independent of the synchros. Removal of one
or both synchros will not disturb the backlash setting
of the gears. Backlash between the gears can be
adjusted by loosening the mounting screws of the
bearing and rotating the bearing slightly until the
gears mesh with no backlash. Oversize mounting holes
permit a slight lubrication for each bearing. The stain-
less steel pinions, meshing with aluminum bronze
gears, require no lubrication.
(5) The antenna drive system consists of the
motor, the gear case in which are mounted the high
speed pinion shaft assembly, intermediate pinion shaft
assembly, low speed or bevel pinion shaft assembly and
bevel ring gear. The drive motor is a 1/2 hp d-c motor
with a reversible 300-volt field, and 250-volt armature.
Its speed is 3,450 rpm. when full voltage is applied.
This motor is attached to the gear case housing by six
946 inch studs. The studs have cone point ends to
facilitate mounting of the motor to the gear housing.
Any slight misalignment between the motor and input
pinion is taken up by an Oldham coupling. The
speed reduction gear train, except for the bevel pinion
and main ring gear, is contained in an aluminum hous-
ing which is bolted to the main rotating housing.
1-28
900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
( 6 ) The drive motor receives its power through
the collector ring assembly. This assembly contains
twelve platinum silver rings mounted integrally with
and separated by molded moldarta inserts. Only six
of the rings are used. This provides six spares which can
be used in an emergency by interchanging leads at the
brush blocks and terminal blocks. One armature and
one field lead of the collector ring assembly is hooked
up directly to the terminal blocks while the other two
motor leads come from the motor disconnect plug
which is wired directly to the terminal blocks. Re-
moval of the motor plug will cut off the power supply
to the motor. The Antenna drive motors are made
by two manufacturers. The appearance of the two
motors is different, but they mount on the Pedestal in
exactly the same way and are completely interchange-
able. The parts of the motors themselves are not
interchangeable. The motor is coupled directly to a
10-tooth drive pinion which meshes with an internal
gear having 101 teeth. This internal gear is keyed
to the intermediate drive shaft which has a 12-tooth
pinion cut into its opposite end. The intermediate
drive pinion meshes with a 101-tooth internal gear
that is keyed to the output bevel pinion. The bevel
pinion, having 14 teeth, then meshes with the bevel
ring gear which has 84 teeth. This bevel ring gear
is keyed to the main pivot column. Being fixed, it
causes the entire drive system to rotate about it.
(7) The speed reduction gears and bearings, with
the exception of the bevel pinion and ring gear, are
lubricated by oil which is circulated by the inter-
mediate internal gear. This gear rotates through an
oil reservoir located in the lower section of the inter-
mediate transmission housing. The bevel pinion, made
of stainless steel, and the level ring gear, made of
aluminum bronze, are both highly polished and do
not require lubrication. The oil filler plug is located
on the upper right-hand side of the transmission hous-
ing, looking from the rear. On the same side, but
toward the bottom, is located the oil level plug and
directly below is the oil drain plug. The synchro
gears require O.S. 1113 (W.A.-358 Socony) oil. The
transmission has been designed with an adjustment to
eliminate backlash between each set of gears. To
adjust backlash between the bevel pinion and ring
gear, shims are assembled between the flange of the
bevel pinion support and its mounting surface. This
forces the pinion toward the center of the bevel gear
to reduce the backlash between the two gears. Three
sizes of shims are provided for this purpose. To adjust
blacklash between the motor drive pinion and the
intermediate internal gear, the locating bore for the
drive pinion support is bored eccentric with respect to
the rotational axis of the pinibn. Oversize mounting
holes permit rotation of the support. This movement
causes the center-to-center distance of pinion and
driven gear to change depending upon which way the
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION NAVSHIPS
support is rotated. A backlash adjustment is also pro-
vided for the intermediate gears. The locating bore
in the main housing is bored eccentric with respect to
the rotational axis of the output pinion. As in the
case of the motor drive gear support, the mounting
holes are bored oversize to permit a slight rotation of
the intermediate transmission housing which would
change the center-to-center distance of the intermediate
gears, depending which way the housing is rotated.
To reduce the bending movement of the bevel ring
gear, a ball bearing, mounted eccentrically on a shaft,
is assembled beneath the ring gear at the point where
it meshes with the pinion. The shaft is rotated until
the ball bearing just touches the ring gear. It is then
locked in place by means of a lock screw. The bearing
is of the sealed type and will not require any mainte-
nance.
(8) Directly opposite the transmission opening
is a square opening which has been cast in the housing
to permit assembly of the bevel ring gear and collector
ring assembly to the pivot column. The cast alumi-
num cover for this opening is hinged and secured to
the main housing by means of captive screws. The
two brush block assemblies, which supply power to
the motor through the collector ring assembly, are
located in cast openings which are 900 from the large
opening and are opposite each other. The brush
assemblies consist of the cover and block support made
of cast aluminum and the brush block of fabricated
micarta. Beginning with Serial No. 31, the brush
assemblies consist of collector rings mounted integrally
with and separated by molded moldarta inserts. The
cover is hinged to the support, but bolts to the main
housing through clearance holes in the support. The
support is secured to the main housing and provides
a means for securing the brush blocks in place. Each
brush block contains six silver brush arms and graphite
silver contacts which are silver soldered to the arms.
A torsion spring, pressing from the underside of the
brush arms, assures positive contact between the slid-
ing brushes and the collector ring assembly. A braided
copper head, soldered to the brush arm and terminat-
ing at a special terminal common to the incoming
leads from the pedestal base, completes the circuit.
The cylindrical cast cover secured to the top of the
main housing supports the rotating joint and upper
concentric lines. The square opening in the side of
the cover, permits servicing of the synchro units with-
out removing the cover.
(9) The base supports the Antenna Pedestal as-
sembly and is the portion that mounts on the mast.
It is a hollow aluminum casting and houses the lower
T-section of the coaxial line to the antenna, the ter-
minal blocks, telephone jack, motor disconnect plug,
and safety switch. Two entrance ports for the con-
centric lines and power terminals are provided in the
base. Removable plates provide access to the compo-
ORIGINAL
900,946
SECTION 1
Par. 4y(7) I
nents mounted in the base. The top of the base is
machined fiat and is bored to receive the pivot post
which is secured to the base by means of six 5/8 inch
studs. Internal components are assembled through a
cast opening in the bottom of the base. The T-section
of the concentric line is cast integrally with the base
extending horizontally from one side of the base to
the other. The cast aluminum bushing, bored out to
the same diameter as the horizontal section, forms the
"T" at the centerline of the pedestal. The r-f line is
secured to one end of the T-section and the IFF line
is secured to the other end. Machined bosses on each
side of the T-section mount the terminal block mount-
ing plate. The mounting plate containing the tele-
phone jack, power receptacle, motor disconnect plug
and safety switch is also attached in the same manner.
Openings are cast in the side of the base to provide
access to the electrical parts. All power leads enter
the base through an opening on the side and are
secured to three terminal blocks. The telephone jack,
motor disconnect plug and safety switch are wired
directly to the terminal blocks while the 110-volt a-c
receptacle is wired to the safety switch. Leads to the
synchro units pass through a packing gland at the base
of the pivot column, and up the inside of the pivot
column. They emerge above the synchro ring gear
and are secured to terminal blocks on the synchro
mounting bracket.
z. ANTENNAS COD-66AHE, CLP-66AHE AND
COD-66AHG, CLP-66AHG.
(1) Two different radar antennas may be used
with the SR series of equipments. The antennas are
similar in construction and either one may be mounted
directly on the Antenna Pedestal without the use of
special attachments. The two antennas are necessary
in order to cover the frequency range of the equip-
ments. The Blue Antenna covers the 215-225-MC/s
band and the Yellow-Green Antenna covers the bands
in the 157-205-MC/s range. In addition to the two
radar antennas, three different IFF Antennas are sup-
plied with each equipment. The choice of IFF An-
tennas to be assembled on either of the radar Antennas
depends upon the frequency of the IFF equipment
associated with the SR series of equipment.
(2) The Blue Antenna COD-66AHE, CLP-66AHE,
shown in Fig. 1-28, is made by two different manufac-
turers as indicated by the type numbers. The antennas
are interchangeable on the Antenna Pedestal. They
consist of a welded steel supporting frame to which is
welded a metal reflecting screen. The radar antenna
array is mounted across the top of the screen. The
Antenna Assembly also includes the antenna feed lines,
a bazooka or impedance inverter, and part of the main
r-f lines. The dimensions of the Blue Antenna are
152 x 69 x 31"Ao inches with a turning radius of 801/2
inches. The metal screen which forms the reflector
for the antenna is welded to an outer metal frame.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-29
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION
I Par. 4z(2)
NAVSHIPS 900,946
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 1-28. Blue Antenna COD-66AHE or CLP-66AHE with V.H.F. Antenna COD-66AHH or CLP-66AHH or with
H.F. Antenna COD-66AHG or CLP-66AHG or Yellow Green Antenna COD-66AHF
or CLP-66AHF with H.F. Antenna COD-66AHG or CLP-66AHG
Four side arms brace the antenna framework and ter-
minate at a mounting position at the rear of the
pedestal. Six vertical and three lateral cross-members
are used to strengthen the antenna screen and provide
rigid points to which the antenna dipoles may be
bolted. The bazooka is located behind the bottom
center of the screen. Three' two-wire feed-lines are
coupled to the termination of the coaxial line at the
bazooka. These lines are mounted on ceramic stand-
off insulators behind the screen. The radar antenna
consists of six pairs of radiating elements, ielectrically
one-half wavelength long, which are mounted hori-
zontally in front of the bottom half of the antenna
screen. The three feed-lines run behind the screen
and couple to the center of the three bottom pairs of
radiating elements through circular apertures in the
screen. R-F lines run from the center of each of the
three pairs of radiating elements on the bottom to the
1-30
center of a corresponding set of elements in the top
row. These lines are crossed, and are electrically a
half-wavelength long. Thus, the top array of dipoles
are fed in phase with the corresponding dipoles below
them.
(3) The radar dipole assemblies consist of the
dipoles which are welded to a metallic insulator. The
flange of the metallic insulator is secured to the frame-
work by means of four bolts. The IFF dipole assembly
mounted on the Blue Antenna is the V.H.F. IFF
Antenna COD-66AHH or CLP-66AHH. The H.F.
IFF Antenna COD-66AHG or CLP-66AHG, and the
U.H.F. IFF Antenna COD-66AHJ or CLP-66AHJ are
supplied as alternate assemblies.
(4) The Yellow-Green Antenna COD-66AHF or
CLP-66AHF, shown in Fig. 1-28, is made by the same
manufacturers that make the Blue Antenna. The
physical construction of the Yellow-Green Antenna is
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION NAVSHIPS 900,946
identical to that of the Blue Antenna, except for the
length of the radar antenna dipoles. These dipoles are
made longer since the Yellow-Green Antenna is de-
signed for a lower frequency band. The Yellow-Green
Antenna is shipped with H.F. IFF Antenna COD-
66AHG or CLP-66AHG assembled on the reflecting
screen. V.H.F. IFF Antenna COD-66AHH or CLP-
66AHH are supplied as alternate assemblies. The over-
all dimensions of the Yellow-Green Antenna are
slightly greater than the dimensions of the Blue An-
tenna since the lower frequency band requires longer
metallic dipole insulators and the dimensions of the
reflecting screen must be increased to accommodate
the increased dipole length and spacing. The dimen-
sions of the Yellow-Green Antenna are 180 x 72 x
329i6 inches, with a turning radius of 931/2 inches.
(5) The H.F. IFF Antenna COD-66AHG or CLP-
66AHG is shown on the Yellow-Green Antenna in
Fig. 1-28. The IFF Antennas are mounted on the top
portion of the Antenna screen. The H.F. IFF Antenna
consists of four dipole assemblies which are mounted
vertically in front of the top half of the screen. Six
brackets are assembled to the top two horizontal cross-
members to hold these antennas. Only four of these
brackets are employed with the H.F. system. The
dipole assembly consists of two quarter-wave elements
threaded on one end so that they can be screwed into
Figure 1-29. V.H.F. Antenna COD-66AHH or
CLP-66AHH or H.F. Antenna COD-66-AHG or
CLP-66AHGand U.H.F. Antenna COD-66AHJ
or CLP-66AHJ
ORIGINAL
SECTION 1
Par. 4z(4) I
place on the bazooka. The bazooka is constructed as
an integral part of the IFF transmission line. This
line comes through the rotating section of the pedestal,
forming the center conductor of the radar antenna
coaxial line. Above the pedestal, the IFF coaxial line
comes out of a quarter-wave stub on the radar coaxial
line and divides into two lines which run in opposite
directions behind the screen and parallel to it. This
line then bends down to a point midway between the
two outside IFF dipole assemblies. From this point,
it joins a horizontal coaxial line which runs behind
the antenna screen and parallel with it. At the end of
each line is a tee which connects the line to two other
coaxial lines, each feeding an IFF dipole assembly.
The bazooka and transmission line which form part
of the dipole assembly are removable. The bazooka_ is
flanged and is secured to the screen bracket by means
of four bolts. The H.F. dipoles may be identified by
the purple bands painted around each quarter-wave
element. The bazooka assembly is common to both
the H.F. (purple) and V.H.F. (orange) antennas.
(6) The V.H.F. IFF Antenna COD-66AHH or
CLP-66AHH is shown in Fig. 1-29. It consists of four
dipole assemblies that screw into the same bazooka
assembly used for the H.F. Antenna. Since both an-
tennas are supplied with each equipment, only one
set of four bazookas are supplied. The V.H.F. dipole
elements may be identified by the orange band of paint
on each element and by their shorter length. The
ends of the dipoles are threaded studs so that they may
be tightened with a wrench. The nut on the end of
the dipole is drilled for a safety wire used to keep the
dipole element from becoming loose due to vibration.
(7) The U.H.F. IFF Antenna COD-66AHJ or
CLP-66AHJ (Mark IV Group) is shown in Fig. 1-29.
It employs a different dipole assembly containing 24
dipoles. It consists of four dipole array frames which
bolt to the screen brackets and two bazookas which,.
bolt to the framework brackets and fasten to the IFF
feed line. Each bazooka feeds two arrays. The IFF
feed line connects to the bazooka by a plug connection
to the inner coaxial line and a screw connection on the
outer line. The terminal screws on the front of the
bazookas pass through and bolt to the terminal lugs on
the dipole array frames. Each of the four arrays con-
sists of three sets of two dipoles. Each set of dipoles
is mounted in a co-linear manner. That is, they are
placed end to end. The co-linear assemblies are a
half-wavelength apart in each array, and they are
mounted on quarter-wave metallic insulators. Each
metallic insulator is secured to the frame with four
bolts and the frame in turn mounts on the screen
brackets. Two bazookas are supplied. Each bazooka
feeds two arrays. The dipole assemblies in each array
are connected by two-wire lines one-half wavelength
long. These lines cross over each other between the
dipole assemblies so that all dipoles are fed in phase.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-31
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION
Par. 4z(7)
NAVSHIPS 900,946 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The U.H.F. Antenna is packed in a metal carrying case
with the dipole elements of either the H.F. or the
V.H.F. IFF Antenna, depending upon the type of
radar Antenna associated with the particular equipment
in question. An SR equipment purchased on Contract
NXsr-30306 is shipped with an H.F. IFF Antenna
attached to the radar Antenna, whether it be the Blue
or the Yellow-Green. An SR equipment purchased
on Contract NXsr-46032 is shipped with a V.H.F.
Antenna attached to the Blue radar Antenna and an
H.F. Antenna attached to the Yellow-Green radar
Antenna. The four U.H.F. arrays mount on two
brackets secured to the lid of the carrying case and
the bazookas and H.F. or V.H.F. elements are placed
in clamps on the bottom of the carrying case. Addi-
tional clamps are provided in the box to accommodate
the transmission line bazooka assemblies of the H.F.
and V.H.F. Antennas when the U.H.F. Antenna is in
use. The lid of the carrying case is held closed by
two trunk fasteners and a hasp is provided so that it
can be locked. Two handles are placed on each end
of the case so that it can be lifted and carried.
(8) The radio frequency line for the radar an-
tenna begins at the bazooka. It extends upward until
it is over the center of the pedestal and then travels
downward vertically to the dome of the pedestal. A
rotating joint, located within the pedestal section, per-
mits rotation of the antenna continuously in any direc-
tion. The coaxial line from the IFF antenna is within
and concentric to the outer conductor of the radar
coaxial line. The outside of the outer conductor of
the IFF coaxial line forms the inner conductor of the
radar coaxial line. The inner conductor of the IFF
coaxial line, is formed by a metal rod which is con-
centric with and inside the IFF coaxial line. In this
manner, both coaxial lines pass through the rotating
joint of the pedestal. Inside the pedestal base, the
lines terminate at two separate couplings. Coaxial
cables from the respective transmitters are connected
to these connectors. One is connected to the radar
transmitter from the larger connector and one to the
IFF transmitter from the smaller connector. The radar
connector is a tapered section just ahead of the junction.
It is used to reduce the diameter of the line without
affecting its impedance. Connections from the radar
coaxial line at the base of the pedestal to the Trans-
ceiver are made with solid-dielectric, armored cable,
Type RG-20/U. Connections from the IFF antenna
termination to the IFF transmitter-receiver are made
with an approved cable supplied with the IFF equip-
ment.
aa. MOTOR GENERATORS.
(1) Motor Generator CAY-211182 is supplied on
Contract NXsr-30306. It is shown in Fig. 1-30. Its
overall dimensions are 863A x 301%6 x 331%o inches.
It is designed to convert 115 volts d-c into 115 volts a-c.
1-32
The motor and generator are mounted on a cast steel
bedplate. The two units are coupled together with a
flexible coupling. A coupling guard is provided to
prevent accidental contact. The d-c exciter frame is
cast as an integral part of the bell housing of the
generator frame. The exciter field frame bolts directly
to the extended frame cast into the bell housing. The
armature of the exciter is of the "quill" type, fitting
directly onto an extension of the a-c generator's arma-
ture. Three terminal boxes are supplied. One is
located on the side of the motor frame, another on the
side of the generator frame, and the third on the side
of the exciter frame. The units are of drip-proof,
semi-enclosed construction. The continuous duty out-
put rating of the generator is 115 volts, single phase,
60 cycles, 10 KW at 80% lagging power factor in
ambient temperatures which range from 0? C. to
50? C. The a-c Generator CAY-211184, is of the four.
pole, rotating field salient pole type, operates at a
speed of 1,800 rpm., and delivers an output at 115 V.
An Exciter CAY-211190 rated to deliver 125 volts is
provided with four main poles and two commutating
poles. It is shunt-wound. Regulation of the a-c Gen-
erator voltage is accomplished by automatic regulation
of the Exciter shunt field. The Drive Motor CAY-
211183 is of the shunt-wound type, with four main
poles and two commutating poles. In addition to the
main shunt field, the motor is also provided with a
smaller shunt field which is wound differentially with
respect to the main field. This arrangement tends to
minimize the effect of variation in ambient tempera-
ture on motor speed. A centrifugally operated switch
is mounted on the outboard end of the motor. If for
any reason the motor speed rises above a pre-deter-
mined safe value, this switch will open, thus breaking
the control circuit in the magnetic controller. Filters
are provided in the motor-generator unit to prevent
radio disturbances. These filters are mounted on the
motor and generator frame. Eyelets are provided in
the top of each unit frame for lifting purposes. Hinged
plates secured with wingnuts provide access to the
brushes on the drive motor. These plates are located
on the upper side of the bell housing. Removable
plates perforated for ventilation are located on the
lower side of the bell housing. The motor bearings
are lubricated by means of grease cups mounted on
extension tubes. The Commutator of the a-c generator
is accessible through small removable plates on the
upper side of the generator's bell housing. These
plates are sccured with thumbscrews. The lower open-
ings in the bell housing are covered with wire mesh
to provide ventilation. Four hinged cover plates on
the exciter frame provide access to the commutator
and brushes. Motor Generator CAY-211182 is de-
signed to operate with Magnetic Controller CAY-
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
SECTION 1
Par. 4aa(1)
Figure 1-30. Motor Generator CAY-211182, CAY-211188 or CAY-21I326
211181, Voltage Regulator CAY-211185, and Pushbut-
ton Station CAY-211186.
(2) Motor Generator CAY-211188 is also sup-
plied on Contract NXsr-30306. It is similar in appear-
ance to the Motor Generator shown in Fig. 1-30. The
difference between the CAY-211188 and the CAY-
211182 is in the electrical design. Motor Generator
CAY-211188 is designed to deliver an output of 115
volts, single phase, 60 cps., 10 KW. at 80% lagging
power factor, from a 230 volt d-c input in an ambient
temperature range from 0? C. to 50? C. The a-c
Generator CAY-211184 and Exciter CAY-211190 are
the same units used in Motor Generator CAY-211182.
The 230-volt d-c Drive Motor CAY-211189 replaces the
115-volt d-c Drive Motor CAY-211183 used in Motor
Generator CAY-211182. The physical characteristics
of both motors are essentially the same. Motor Gen-
erator CAY-211188 is designed to operate with Mag-
netic Controller CAY-211187, Voltage Regulator CAY-
211185 and Pushbutton Station CAY-211186.
(3) Motor Generator CAY-211326 is supplied on
Contract NXsr-46032. It is similar to the Motor Gen-
erator shown in Fig. 1-30. It is used to convert 230
volts d-c, taken from the ship's power system, into
115 volts a-c, at 108 amperes. With the Motor Gen-
erator operating at 65% efficiency, the d-c input must
be 83 amperes to produce an output of 108 amperes.
Since the average full load requirements of the SR
series is only 65 amperes, the average input need only
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21
be approximately 50 amperes. Motor Generator CAY-
211326 consists of D-C Drive Motor CAY-211327, A-C
Generator CAY-211328, and Exciter CAY-211329. The
mechanical design of Motor Generator CAY-211326 is
similar to the mechanical design of Motor Generator
CAY-211182. The output rating of the generator is
115 volts, single phase, 60 cycles, 10 KW. at 807o
lagging power factor in ambient temperatures which
range from 0? C. to 50? C. The Generator is of the
four-pole rotating field salient pole type and operates
at a speed of 1,800 rpm. The Exciter, rated to deliver
125 volts, has four main coils and two commutating
poles. It is shunt wound. Regulation of the a-c Gen-
erator voltage is accomplished by automatic regulation
of the Exciter generator shunt field. The Drive Motor
is shunt wound with four main poles and four com-
mutating poles. Mounted on the outboard end of the
motor is a centrifugal type speed regulator. Through
action of this speed regulator, the motor speed is held
essentially constant under conditions of varying line
voltage, load, and temperature. The motor input
leads and the generator's output leads are filtered to
minimize radio interferences which might result from
sparking of the commutator and slip rings. These
filters are mounted in the motor and generator ter-
minal boxes. Motor Generator CAY-211326 is designed
to operate with Magnetic Controller CAY-211325,
three Pushbutton Stations CAY-24299, Voltage Regu-
lator CAY-21185A and Controller Disconnect Line
Switch CWU-24429.
: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-33
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1 SECTION
I Par. 4ab(1)
NAVSHIPS 900,946
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 1-31. Magnetic Controllers CAY-211181, CA Y-211187 or CAY-211325
ab. MAGNETIC CONTROLLERS.
(1) Magnetic Controller CAY-211181 is supplied
on Contract NXsr-30306. It is shown in Fig. 1-31.
The purpose of the Magnetic Controller is to start and
stop the 115 volt d-c Drive Motor on Motor Generator
CAY-211182. It is designed for bulkhead mounting.
The component parts are mounted in a drip-proof
cabinet. The cabinet is made of sheet metal and
measures 107/3 x 20 x 241%2 inches. Access to the
interior is through a door covering the entire front
of the cabinet. This door is hung on a piano-type
hinge and is secured in its closed position by two
thumbscrews. The only external control is a RESET
button that protrudes through the door. The compo-
nent parts consist of five relay-contactors, an overload
relay, three potentiometers, and two starting resistors
for the Drive Motor. These parts are mounted on a
micarta panel which is mounted on angle iron brackets
welded to the back of the cabinet. Provision is made
to bring the connecting cables into the cabinet through
openings in the top and bottom of the cabinet.
(2) Magnetic Controller CAY-211187 is supplied
on Contract NXsr-30306. It is shown in Fig. 1-31. It
operates in a 230 volt d-c circuit to start and stop the
Drive Motor on Motor Generator CAY-211188. Its
component parts are mounted in a metal cabinet mea-
suring 10116 x 15 x 20'K6 inches. The only control
1-34
on the front of the cabinet is the overload relay reset
pushbutton. The door is hung on a piano type hinge
and is held closed by means of three thumbscrews.
The parts are mounted on a micarta panel. This panel
is secured to two brackets, welded to the back of the
cabinet, by means of four mounting studs. Two motor
starting resistors, three relay contactors, an overload
relay, two potentiometers, and a cartridge type fuse
are mounted on the micarta panel. The connecting
cables may be brought into the cabinet through open-
ings at the top and bottom. These openings are cov-
ered with removable plates.
(3) Magnetic Controller CAY-211325 is supplied
on Contract NXsr-46032. It is shown in Fig. 1-31. It
is contained in a cabinet measuring 111/2 x 16 x 223/8
inches. The cabinet is designed for wall mounting and
is held by means of four mounting studs. Access to the
interior of the cabinet is through a door on the front of
the cabinet. The door is hung on a piano type hinge.
Two pushbuttons protrude through the door in the
lower left-hand corner. Lead plates secured with screws
are provided at the top and bottom of the cabinet.
These plates are not drilled and must be drilled for
the. holes required at the point of installation. The
components are mounted on a micarta panel. They
consist of an overload relay, two time delay relays, two
field resistors, a relay contactor, two fuses, and a push-
button station. Magnetic Controller CAY-211325 is
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION NAVSHIPS 900,946
used to start the 230-volt d-c motor in Motor Generator
CAY-211326.
ac. VOLTAGE REGULATORS.
(1) The Voltage Regulator CAY-211185 is sup-
plied on Contract NXsr-30306. It is shown in Fig.
1-32. Its component parts are mounted in a metal
cabinet that measures 161/4 x 26 x 291/4 inches. The
cabinet is designed for bulkhead mounting. The pur-
pose of the Voltage Regulator is to control the current
supplied to the field of the A-C Generator by the
Exciter to maintain a constant output voltage. The
component parts are mounted on a micarta panel
which is secured with six studs to brackets welded to
the back of the cabinet. These parts consist of a
0-150 V. voltmeter, a copper oxide rectifier, two rheo-
stats, a damping transformer, two field resistors, a
voltage regulator, and a switch to select the type of
operation. All connections are brought out to a ter-
minal board in the lower left-hand corner of the panel.
(2) Voltage Regulator CAY-211185A supplied
on Contract NXsr-46032, is electrically similar to the
CAY-211185. It is slightly different in mechanical
design. This difference consists of shielding the various
components and is a mechanical modification of the
rheostat located above the terminal board. The size
of the cabinet and all other constructional details are
the same.
ad. PUSHBUTTON STATIONS.
(1) Pushbutton Station CAY-211186 supplied on
Figure 1-32. Voltage Regulators CAY-211185
or CAY-211185A
ORIGINAL
SECTION 1
Par. 4ab(3)
Figure 1-33. Pushbutton Stations CAY-21186
and CAY-24299
Contract NXsr-30306, is shown in Fig. 1-33. Its over-
all dimensions are 47/8 x 41/4 x 91/2 inches. It is used
to control magnetic Controller CAY-211181 or CAY-
211187. The Pushbutton Station is constructed in a
water tight case. It contains two pushbutton switches.
One switch is the starting switch. The other switch
stops the equipment. A conduit fitting can be attached
to the top of the case to bring in the cabling. Only
one of these Pushbutton Stations is used.
(2) Pushbutton Station CAY-24299 supplied on
Contract NXsr-46032, is shown in Fig. 1-33. It is con-
tained in a case measuring 5 x 41/4 x 91/2 inches. The
case is of water-tight construction and a complete in-
stallation may use as many as three of these Pushbutton
Stations. It is not necessary to use any of them it
remote control is not desired. Pushbutton Station
CAY-24299 is used with Magnetic Controller CAY-
211325.
ae. CONTROLLER DISCONNECT LINE SWITCH
CWU-24429 (NXsr-46032 ).
(1) Controller Disconnect Line Switch CWU-
24429 is shown in Fig. 1-34. It is housed in a case that
measures 83/4 x 53i6 x 162142 inches. This switch is
designed for use with Magnetic Controller CAY-
211325, Motor Generator CAY-211326, and their asso-
ciated components. The switch is designed for wall
mounting and four holes are provided to receive
mounting screws. The switch box is drip-proof and
it contains a double-pole-single-throw switch and two
200-ampere fuses. The door swings downward, being
hinged at the bottom. The door is held closed by
means of three fasteners. One at the top and one on
each side. These fasteners are operated with a crank
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1-35
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1, SECTION
I Par. 4ae
NAVSHIPS 900,946
just below the handle. The switch handle near the
top of the door must be pushed slightly to the right
and pulled' straight out to open the switch and the
door to the switch box. When the door is closed, the
handle must again be moved to the right or the switch
will not close when the door is closed.
af. CONNECTOR NAVY TYPE 49261 (UG-
32/U).
(1) The UG-32/U connector is shown in Fig.
1-35. It is a government furnished item supplied with
all equipments. It is used as an adapter to connect a
gas filled coaxial line to a coaxial cable with a solid
dielectric.
5. REFERENCE DATA.
a. NOMENCLATURE. The following complete
equipments are involved in this instruction book.
(1) Navy Model SR..
(2) Navy Model SR-a.
(3) Modulator CAY-50AGU.
b. CONTRACT NUMBER AND DATE.
(1) Two-hundred SR Equipments were purchased
on Contract NXsr-30306, dated 5 June, 1943. These
Figure 1-34. Controller Disconnect Line Switch
CWU-24429
1-36
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 1-35. Connector UG-32/U Navy Type 49261
equipments are to be modified in the field into SR-a
equipments. One-hundred Motor Generators CAY-
211182 (115 V.) and one-hundred Motor Generators
CAY-211188 (250 V.) were purchased on this con-
tract.
(2) One-hundred SR Equipments were purchased
on Contract NXsr-46032, dated 17 January, 1944. With
the substitution of Modulator CAY-50AGU for the
Keyer Unit, these equipments also become SR-a Equip-
ments.
(3) In order to convert the SR Equipments to
SR-a Equipments, 330 Modulators CAY-50AGU were
purchased on Contract N5sr-7197, dated 7 April, 1945.
c. CONTRACTOR.
(1) The contractor supplying the equipment de-
scribed in this instruction book is:
Westinghouse Electric Corporation,
2519 Wilkens Avenue,
Baltimore, Maryland.
d. COGNIZANT NAVAL INSPECTOR.
(1) The cognizant Naval Inspector is:
Assistant Resident Inspector of Naval Material,
Baltimore, Maryland.
e. NUMBER OF PACKAGES PER SHIPMENT.
(1) The SR Equipments shipped on Contract
NXsr-30306, together with the equipment spare parts,
required 35 packing cases per complete shipment.
(2) The SR Equipments on Contract NXsr-46032,
together with equipment spare parts require a total
of 26 boxes.
f. CUBICAL CONTENTS AND WEIGHT.
(1) The cubical contents and weight of each SR
Equipment combination are listed in Table 1-1.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 1
Par. 5g I
TABLE 1-1
CUBICAL CONTENTS AND WEIGHT PER SHIPMENT
Contract
D-C
Voltage
Supply
Antenna
Volume (Cu. Ft.)
Weight (Lbs.)
Crated
Uncrated
Crated
Uncrated
115 V.
Yellow-Green
860
495.72
12,818
9697
115 V.
Blue
744
435.72
12,618
9697
NXsr-30306
230 V.
Yellow-Green
860
494.52
12,818
9697
230 V.
Blue
744
434.52
12,618
9697
Yellow-Green
860
497.41
12,863
_
9742
NXsr-46032
Blue
744
437.41
12,663
9721
g. TRANSMITTER DATA.
(1) The peak power outait of the two SR Equip-
ments is approximatel R-533
.47 MEG
R-537
R-589
13.5 K
R-535
R-5010
215
V-504
807
YOKE COIL.
CENTER
EXPAND
S-502
R-536 R-5005
R-5006,11-5007
24K
R-534
2.2 K
AAAA/V4
-65V
Figure 2-81. Sweep Amplifiers in
(2) Inasmuch as the yoke coil, into which V-504
operates, has considerable capacity to ground, the cur-
rent in the cathode of V-504 and, therefore, the feed-
back current will not be of the exact form desired.
That is, it will not be regenerative at the higher fre-
quencies. To correct this condition, a small high fre-
quency compensating circuit, comprised of capacitor
C-513 and resistors R-530 and R-534 is introduced into
the cathode circuit of V-502B. This network by-passes
some of the feedback current at the higher frequencies,
and therefore permits an increase in the gain through
V-502B at these frequencies. The use of regenerative
feedback in this circuit provides a combination of a
rectangular pulse and sawtooth wave on the grid of
V-504. Note that the current from V-502B does not
flow through resistor R-530, but flows through re-
sistors R-535 and R-5010 in parallel which form a
common cathode resistor for V-502B and V-504.
(3) The output of V-503A is a positive peaked
wave which is applied to the grid of V-504 by capa-
citor C-515. The sweep d-c restorer tube V-503B is
connected from the grid of V-504 to ground. The
negative grid potential of ?65 volts applied to the
grid of V-504 maintains this tube at cut-off except
when a positive pulse is being applied to its grid.
The grid bias resistor, R-533, is 470,000 ohms and
this high value is used to prevent distorting the pulse
ORIGINAL
PPI Indieator
at the grid of the tube. The high grid resistance makes
the use of the d-c restorer necessary. In the intervals
between positive pulses, the grid of V-504 is consider-
ably below cut-off due to the ?65 volt potential and
the low potentials applied to the plate and screen. The
grid and plate of V-503B are connected together and
the tube is operated as a diode. At the instant before
the appearance of a positive going pulse at the grid
of V-504, the cathode and plate of V-503B are at
approximately the same potential, or about ?65 volts.
However, when the pulse appears, the cathode of
V-503B is raised to a potential higher than the plate
and grid. The tube will not pass current when the
cathode is positive with respect to the plate, and there-
fore the tube is blocked against the positive pulse.
However, following the positive pulse, the grid of
V-504 must be restored to ?65 volts and any tendency
to oscillate must be quenched. The sweep d-c restorer
does this instantly. When the grid is more negative
on the swingback than the ?65 volts of the bias poten-
tial, the cathode of the diode is negative with respect
to the plate. Under this condition, current will flow
through the tube and instantly restore the grid poten-
tial to ?65 volts. In effect, the d-c restorer serves to
short out grid resistor R-533 and prevent the grid from
ever being more negative than ?65 volts, the proper
starting point ,for each cycle of operation.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-115
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1) SECTION
L Par. 16e(4)
NAVSHIPS 900,946
THEORY OF OPERATION
VOLTAGE
ACROSS L
?
VOLTAGE
ACROSS R
SUM OF VOLTAGES
ACROSS L AND R
I COLLAPSE OF VOLTAGE
CURRENT IN I.
I INDUCES
I ar-
CURRENT IN L
CURRENT IN R
a.-INDUCED
CURRENT
SUM OF CURRENTS
IN L AND R
SUM OF ALL
VOLTAGES ACROSS
L AND R
COUNTER VOLTAGE
PROISUCED BY
INDUC 0 CURRENT
Figure 2-82. Development of Peaked Sawtooth Voltage
(4) The voltage reproduced in the plate circuit
of the sweep yoke driver V-504 is a negative going
combination of pulse and sawtooth wave which has
essentially the same form as the positive going wave-
form developed in the plate of V-503A. The cathode
resistors for V-504, R-535 in parallel with R-5010, serve
an additional purpose which is not obvious from a
study of the schematic diagrams. As explained in the
previous paragraphs, V-504 is normally at cut-off when
no pulse is present at its grid and draws full current
(approx. 110 ma.) when the pulse appears. This rapid
swing would normally tend to affect the regulation of
the power supply and consequently the operation of
the other tubes in the equipment. However, as ex-
plained in the description of the gate circuits, V-501,
V-502A and V-503A es() swing from a cut-off condi-
tion to a point where they draw current heavily. When
V-504 is drawing current, these three tubes are cut off.
When these three tubes begin to draw current, V-504
goes to cut-off. Consequently, by careful selection of
the values of resistors R-535 and R-5010, it has been
found possible to approximately balance these two
current drains and provide a relatively even drain on
the power supply despite the wide swings of the tubes.
(5) In order to start the cathode ray electron
stream at the center of the tube, it is necessary to start
the sweep with no current flowing through the deflec-
tion yoke coil. This condition is obtained when the
2-116
Type 807 tube, V-504, is biased to cut-off. It is also
necessary, following the start of the sweep, to secure a
linear increase in current through the yoke coil, and
consequently a magnetic field which increases linearly,
in order to move the electron beam across the face of
the PPI tube at a constant rate of speed. It would seem
that all these requirements would be satisfied if a linear
sawtooth wave of voltage was applied across the deflec-
tion yoke coil, but such is not the case. A square wave
of voltage in the plate circuit of V-504 would produce
a linear increase of current through the coil if it could
be wound without having any resistance. However,
no coil can be wound without some resistance. In the
type of coil required in the deflection yoke, this resis-
tance is appreciable. Therefore, it is necessary to con-
sider the effect of the resistance of the coil when con-
sidering the shape of the input voltage to the driver
tube V-504. The inductance and resistance are effec-
tively in series as shown in Fig. 2-82. If the current
in an inductance rises linearly, the voltage across the
inductance will have a constant amplitude. Therefore,
a perfectly rectangular pulse of voltage will produce
a sawtooth shaped pulse of current in an inductance.
The voltage across a resistance will produce a current
in the resistance that has exactly the same shape the
voltage has. It is obvious that if a rectangular pulse
is applied across an inductance and resistance in series,
the current that flows will be a combination of a
rectangular pulse and a sawtooth.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 9
Par. 16e(6)
THEORY OF OPERATION
(6) Assuming that the current flowing through
the coil has the desired linear sawtooth form similar
to current waveform 2 on Fig. 2-82, a similar current
waveform would of necessity be flowing through the
series resistance in the coil. Waveform 2 is also similar
to the voltage drop which would be necessary at the
plate of the tube to produce the desired current if the
coil resistance alone is considered. Waveform 1 would
be the voltage necessary to produce a linear sawtooth
rise alone. However, since the rate of change of cur-
rent flowing through an inductance determines the
voltage across it, and the value of the current flowing
through a resistor determines the voltage drop across
it, it is obvious that two different waveforms would be
developed, one across the inductance and one across
the resistance. Referring to Fig. 2-82, the voltage drop
across the inductance during the linear increase in
current would take the form shown in waveform 1
while the voltage drop across the resistor would take
the form shown in waveform 2. Since the total effect
of the deflection coil in the plate circuit of the tube
includes both the inductance and the resistance, the
voltage drop across the two would produce an overall
voltage drop which would combine both waveforms 2
and 3. The abrupt return of the deflection voltage
from its most negative value to zero causes a sudden
collapse of the magnetic field surrounding the coil.
This produces a counter e.m.f. that causes a small saw-
tooth rise of current in a positive direction. This
current produces a narrow pulse of voltage across the
coil and a sawtooth shaped voltage across the resis-
tance. The result would be waveform 4 on Fig. 2-82.
Waveform 4 is, therefore, the voltage drop across the
deflection coil when the desired linear sawtooth cur-
rent form is flowing through the coil. Therefore, to
produce the desired current through the coil, the volt-
age drop across the coil must be the same as shown in
waveform 4. The linear current increase produces an
effectively linear increase in the magnetic field devel-
oped by the coil. The direction of this field is such
that the electron stream, and consequently the dot on
the face of the tube caused by the electron stream,
moves radially outward from the center of the edge
of the tube. This produces the sweep trace on the
face of the PPI tube. The targets are produced on the
tube face by intensifying the electron stream at the
proper points on its outward course. Resistors R-537
and R-589 are placed across the deflection coil to
dampen the oscillations which would normally occur
during the return trace, due to the inductance of the
coil and its inherent capacity to ground.
(7) Switch S-502 and resistors R-536, R-5005,
R-5006, and R-5007 form a circuit which, when the
switch is closed, allows a small amount of current to
be drawn through the PPI deflection yoke coil. The
purpose of this is to move the start of the trace a
ORIGINAL
slight distance outward from the center of the tube
in order to spread out the signals which are located
close to the ship and which might otherwise appear
as an indistinguishable mass around the center dot.
Switch S-502 is the CENTER EXPAND switch on the
front panel. The employment of this feature is
described under the instructions on Operation.
(8) The cathode ray tube, V-512, is a type 7BP7.
It is shown with the high voltage power supply in
Fig. 2-83. It has a long-persistent (persistency, 7)
screen which causes the target indications to remain
on the face of the tube for a short time after the sweep
has passed. The electron stream is focused by the
focus coil L-514, which creates a magnetic field within
the stem of the tube. This tends to bunch the electrons
into a thin stream so that they will cause a sharp dot
on the face of the tube where they strike the fluores-
cent coating. Resistor R-576 is a 15,000 ohm, variable
resistor operated by the FOCUS control on the front
panel. This control permits adjustment of the current
flowing through the focus coil so that the different
focusing adjustments may be made. The focus coil
itself has a high resistance, and consequently its resis-
tance is affected to some extent by temperature changes
in the air around it. Therefore, as the unit warms up,
or the outside air temperature around it changes, it
may be necessary to re-focus the cathode ray beam.
The PPI gate voltage (unblanking voltage) is a
square wave, applied to the second grid of the cathode
ray tube. This method of gating requires a higher
voltage than would be necessary if the unblanking
voltage was applied to the first grid or cathode. It is
necessary to apply the unblanking voltage to the
second grid since the range marker pips are applied
to the first grid and the video pulses are applied to
the cathode. The large pulse, necessary to unblank
V-512 is secured from the plate circuit of V-501. Note
that the different signals which appear on the PPI tube
are all applied to different elements of the tube, instead
of being mixed and all applied at one element. This
simplifies adjustments and also provides a simpler cir-
cuit by eliminating the customary mixing stages. High
voltage (5,000 volts d-c) is supplied to the accelerating
coating in the tube by the high voltage power supply.
f. HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY.
(1) The high voltage supply is shown in Fig.
2-83. It consists of the power transformer, T-501, and
the Type RKR-72 high voltage rectifier tube V-511.
The output is filtered by a resistor-capacitor network,
comprised of resistors R-5001, R-569, and capacitors
C-543 and C-544. Resistors R-570 and R-571 form a
bleeder to improve the regulation of the supply. The
output of the supply is 5,000 volts and this is applied
to the second anode of the cathode ray PPI tube, V-512.
(2) The inputs to both the high voltage rectifier
and the low voltage rectifier are filtered by a line filter,
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-117
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
9 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
la Par. 16f(2)
R-567
MEG
1-5024
R-500I
T-501 22K
F-502A
115 VAC
VIDEO INPUT
FROM
PLATE 8
V-508
RANGE MARKERS
FROM
V-507 A
UNBLANKIN6
GATE
PLATE OF V-501
SWEEP VOLTAGE
PL ATE OF V-504
V-5I1
RKR-72
R-569
.3341EG 5000V
R-555
R-5014'
75K
R-570
6 MEG
6-544 am
.IMF wms
Ego 6-543
.1 MF
R-552
5.1 K
R-57I
6 MEG
R-554
5.IK
FINE
BIAS
R-553
100K
COARSE
BIAS
SHIPS HEAD MARKER
C-529
.01 MF
II
R-55I
1 MEG
C-527
T 1.0 MF
R-576
6 y-sore 10K
6SN7-GT
FOCUS
COIL-
CATHODE L-514
GRID I GRID 2
tR-5
R-536,R-5007
005,4-5006
24 K
CENTER
EXPAND
S-502
DEFLECTION
YOKE con.
L5I5
SPUR
GEAR
SPUR
PINION DRIVE
MOTOR
5000V
*275
AQUA DAG
ACCELERATING
ANODE
Figure 2-83.
Cathode Ray Tube and High Voltage Power Supply
L-510, which contains two inductors and four capa-
citors. This filter is tuned so that high frequency
voltage existing in the line will not pass into the unit;
and also that high frequency voltages, developed
within the equipment, will not pass to the line and
upset the functioning of other equipment drawing
power from the same line.
(3) Two fuses are included to protect the power
circuits in case of part failure within the equipment.
F-500A is a line fuse located between switch S-501A
and the line filter L-510. F-500A opens when an over-
load occurs in either the high or low voltage power
supply. A current limiting resistor in series with a
neon indicator bulb shunts fuse F-500A. When the
fuse is not blown, this neon bulb does not glow.
However, when the fuse opens, a small amount of
current, limited by the limiting resistor, will pass
through the neon bulb. This will light the neon
bulb and thus indicate which fuse has blown. A simi-
lar fuse, F-501A, and neon indicator system is placed in
the input from the?O.S.C. line of the ship in case of
a short circuit in the servo drive motor, B-501, or its
leads. Switch S-501B, together with S-501A is part of
the OFF-ON switch on the front panel. Switch S-501B
controls the input voltage to the servo drive motor.
Fuse F-502A protects T-501.
2-118
(4) Switch S-503 is a disc type thermostatic
switch, which operates when the temperature inside
the unit drops below 10 to 9? C. This switch connects
a heater resistor, R-5018 across the a-c supply line.
These strip heaters are located near the rotating yoke
mechanism. Inasmuch as this circuit draws consider-
able current, this switch is not fused but is connected
directly to the line through the circuit breaker which
is located in the top of the case. The circuit breaker
receives its power from any convenient 115 volt a-c
outlets (not necessarily the same one supplying the
other circuits of the equipment). The heaters will
operate whether the rest of the set is on or off. An
auxiliary outlet for connecting a soldering iron is pro-
vided in the top of the case. This outlet is also wired
directly to the circuit breaker. Blower motor B-503 is
provided to maintain air circulation within the unit.
It is a split phase, capacitor-start-run motor which
operates at a normal speed of 3300 r.p.m. The 5.0 mf
capacitor C-553 is the phase-splitting capacitor for the
motor.
g. RANGE MARKER CIRCUITS.
(1) The range marker circuits are shown in Fig.
2-84. They are triggered by a negative square wave
from the gate circuit. They produce positive range
marker pulses, and apply them to the first grid of the
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION
Par. 169(1) 2
+225 V
R-5009
-572
-5011
I MEG
-538
R?5008
23.5 K
4700
1-503 4.
C-522
.005 R-573
A4F 24K
C-523
100
MMF
C-516
.1 MFD
1:505
200 MILE
RANGE)
4=1?1?1111IN
pl=1111
V-505A V-5058
6SN7-GT 6SN7-GT
V-506A
RANGE
S 500C
co SELECTOR
F:0_,AAAAAN?42)
r=> R-550
1 000
(200 MILE
RANGE)
R
4
7
0
-578
SHOCK
OSCILLATOR
STAGE
MARKER
FEED BACK
STAGE
6SN7-GT
V-50613
6SN7-G T
V-507 A
6SN7-GT
+275 V
1 R-50I2
R-5013
.IIMEG
R-539
R-540
2800
C-521
500MMF
PULSE
SHAPER
STAGE
1 R-542
R-546
3300 .5 MFD
.33 MEG
BLOCKING
OSC. TRIGGER
STAGE
TO GRID OF
PPI TUBE
R-544
1000
BLOCKING
OSCILLATOR
STAGE
Figure 2-84. Range Marker Circuits in PP! Indicator
PPI tube V-512. The circuits are comprised of the
Type 6SN7-GT double triode tubes V-505, V-506 and
one of the triode sections of V-507. V-505A is the
shock oscillator, V-505B is the feedback amplifier,
V-506A is the pulse shaper, V-506B is the blocking
oscillator trigger and V-507A is the blocking oscil-
lator. The other half of V-507 is used in the video
circuits and its function will be explained separately
under the discussion of these circuits. The trigger
voltage for the range marker circuits is taken from the
junction of resistor R-515 and R-5019, which are in the
plate circuit of V-516B. This pulse is applied to the
grid of the shock oscillator, V-505A, by C-516. See
Fig. 2-84. Since the grid of V-505A is returned to the
positive 225-volt supply through grid resistors R-572
and R-5011 in parallel, the tube normally draws full
current in the absence of the negative trigger pulse.
This current flows through inductors L-502, L-503,
L-504, or L-505, whichever is switched into the circuit
by switch S-500B. These are the range marker oscil-
lator inductors, and one inductor is provided for each
of the four ranges on which the equipment operates.
Resistor R-543 serves as a cathode resistor in the 4 and
20 mile ranges and resistor R-578 is the cathode resistor
for the 80 and 200 mile ranges. The two different
resistors are required to keep the output of the circuit
at approximately the same amplitude for all four
ranges.
ORIGINAL
(2) At the instant before the trigger voltage ap-
pears, the tube is drawing full current. When the
negative trigger pulse appears, the tube is instantly
cut off due to the straight leading edge of the pulse.
The grid is held below cut-off for the duration of the
negative pulse. During the time that V-505A draws
current, the capacitor across the inductor in the cath-
ode circuit becomes charged. The cathode side of the
capacitor is charged positive with respect to ground.
When the negative trigger pulse cuts off V-505A, the
stoppage of current causes the magnetic field sur-
rounding the inductor tn collapse, inducing a voltage
that further increases the positive charge on the capa-
citor. When the inductor has delivered up its reactive
energy to the capacitor, the capacitor discharges back
through the inductor. This process continues at the
natural frequency of the LC combination for about
six cycles. Normally, this oscillation would rapidly
decay in amplitude. However, V-505B, the feedback
tube, has its cathode connected to a tap on the inductor
in use by selector switch section S-500C. This provides
the proper amount of regeneration to prevent the
decay, and consequently, the five or six cycles are all
of approximately the same amplitude. In this feed-
back circuit, resistors R-547, R-548, R-549, and R-550
have been selected to introduce the proper amount of
regeneration to keep the amplitudes of the marker
pulses approximately the same for all four ranges.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-119
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
f) SECTION
Par. 16g(3)
NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
(3) V-505B is the feedback amplifier. See Fig.
2784. Its grid is coupled directly to the cathode of
V-505A, and its cathode is returned to ground through
the feedback circuit described in the preceding para-
graph. The range marker oscillations are also coupled
directly from the cathode of V-505A to the grid of
V-506A, the pulse *shaper. V-506A amplifies these
oscillations, which are applied to the grid of V-506B.
However, the cathodes of V-506A and V-506B are
directly coupled together across a common cathode
resistance (R-539 and R-540 in parallel) and the two
tubes tend to act together as a multivibrator. V-506A
normally draws current and the start of the oscillation
tends to drive it through cut-off on each cycle. This
drive is amplified, and an overshoot is created by the
inclusion of the inductor L-506 in the plate circuit
of V-506A. The circuit creates a narrow fiat topped
wave with a peak on the leading edge which cdincides
with the start of each oscillation. These marker pulses
appear in the plate circuit of V-506B across the trigger
winding of the blocking oscillator transformer T-503.
(4) The blocking oscillator, V-507A, is cut off
by its high positive cathode bias voltage when no
signal is present. Bias is obtained by connecting the
cathode of V-507A to tap on a voltage divider between
the +275 volt bus and ground. The combined bleeder
current and the cathode current of V-507A charge
capacitor C-526 to a potential that keeps V-507A at
cut-off. This bias is such that the overshoot on the
square wave V-506B is required to start the oscillator.
Consequently the blocking oscillator is not triggered
by the square block but by the narrow overshoot which
appears on it. The application of a pulse to the grid
of the blocking oscillator ( which is cut off at the time
the pulse appears) drives the grid instantaneously posi-
tive. This creates a negative pulse in the plate circuit
and a positive pulse in the cathode circuit. The nega-
tive pulse created in the plate circuit of the tube is
inverted by transformer T-503 which coupled the out-
put at the plate back to the grid. The positive feed-
back voltage from transformer T-503 drives the grid
still further positive the instant it appears. When
plate current saturation is reached and the plate cur-
rent assumes a steady d-c state, the feedback voltage
disappears. The grid then returns rapidly to a nega-
tive condition; the tube is cut off and remains in this
condition until another pulse appears in the plate
circuit of V-506B. Since the grid is coupled to ground
only by the grid resistor, this action is very rapid and
the pulse of voltage in the cathode circuit of V-507A
will be a very narrow-- spike of voltage. The width of
the marker pulses thus developed is approximately
three-fourths of a microsecond measured at 70% of
the height. Since positive pulses are required to
brighten the cathode ray tube V-512, the output from
V-507A is taken from the cathode circuit of the tube
2-120
across resistor R-544, which is the MARKERS control
on the panel of the unit. This control provides for
adjusting the marker intensity to the proper-level for
viewing on the face of the tube. The markers are
applied to the first grid of the cathode ray PPI tube
V-512 so that they brighten the sweep at the instant
the marker pulses appear, and thus serve to provide
range calibration indications on the face of the PPI
tube.
h. VIDEO CIRCUITS.
(1) The video circuits receive the target pulses
from the interconnected radar installation, amplify
them, and apply them to PPI cathode ray tube as nega-
tive pulses of voltage which appear as target indica-
tions on the face of the PPI tube. The video circuits
shown in Fig. 2-85 of the Type 6AG7 amplifier tube
V-508 and one-half of the dual triode tube 6SN7-GT
V-507. The other half of this dual triode tube is the
blocking oscillator V-507A which was described in the
section on the range marker circuits. V-507B is the
video d-c restorer and V-508 is the video amplifier
tube. The video input signal is a positive pulse of
voltage from the interconnected radar installation. It
is coupled to the unit across resistor R-559. The input
across resistor R-559 is applied between the VIDEO
INPUT connection and ground, which is the chassis
of the unit. Since a number of remote PPI indicators
may be connected across the video line from the Indi-
cator Console, a small switch marked BRIDGE?TER-
MINATE is included in the top of the case of the unit.
This switch cuts in or out a 68 ohm resistor which
may be placed across the video input of the unit. If
more than one indicator is used on one source, this
switch may be thrown to the BRIDGE position. This
leaves the 68 ohm resistors out of the circuit. Two
resistors are connected to this switch. One is to ter-
minate the video input circuit, and the other to ter-
minate the synchronizing pulse circuit. Thirteen Indi-
cator units may be connected to the Indicator Console.
The BRIDGE-TERMINATE switch may be thrown to
BRIDGE, if the unit is one of many on the line, or it
may be thrown to TERMINATE, if it is the only one
on the line or the end unit on the line.
(2) The video input is fed directly across potenti-
ometer R-559, a 2,000 ohm carbon resistor, adjustable
from the front panel of the unit by moving the VIDEO
GAIN control. This gain control is essentially loaded
across the 68 ohms BRIDGE-TERMINATE resistor in
the top of the unit. Capacitor C-531 is a small, 40
mmf capacitor which is the video high frequency
compensating capacitor. When the slider of the
VIDEO GAIN control is turned away from its maxi-
mum position, capacitor C-531 shunts the higher fre-
quencies, present in the video pulse, around the poten-
tiometer so that they are not attenuated. This capa-
citor passes more high frequency voltage when the
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION
Par. 16h(2) 2
+275V
R-557 AND R?587
IN PARALLEL
2.35 K
L-509 VIDEO
PEAKING INDUCTOR
V-508
6AG7
71
C-529
.0IMF
II
TO CATHODE OF
PPI TUBE R-5I2
4.275V
1 V-5078
.,S7-GT
C-531 C-530
40MMF .0IMFD
R-5554ND R-5014
IN PARALLEL
75 K
R-554
5.1K
FINE BIAS
VIDEO INPUT
FROM
RADAR SET
VIDEO
GAIN
R-558
.47 MEG
R-559 C-528
2K 25.0 MFD
VIDEO AMPLIFIER
R-55I
.IMEG
C-527
VIDEO DC RESTORER
R-553
.1MEG
COARSE BIAS
R-552
5.1K
Figure 2-85. Video Circuits in FPI Indicator
gain control is in some position other than maximum.
In normal practice it is set so that, when the gain con-
trol is half-way down, this capacitor serves to com-
pensate very accurately. The video input signal is
coupled to the grid of V-508 by the .01 mf capacitor,
C-530. The cathode resistor, R-556, is by-passed by
the 25.0 mf electrolytic capacitor C-528. Inductor
L-509, in the plate circuit of V-508, is a peaking induc-
tor used to compensate for the loss of high frequencies
due to the output capacity of V-508 and the input
capacity of the cathode ray tube. These appear in
parallel across the plate circuit of the tube. The value
of the inductor is chosen to resonate with the output
capacity of the tube at a frequency which closely ap-
proximates the frequency at which the response of the
circuit begins to drop off. This provides a peaking of
the frequencies which would normally be attenuated
and results in an overall improvement in the response
of the circuit. By careful choice of the inductance of
the peaking choke and by maintaining the capacity in
the plate circuit at a low value, the response of the
circuit is maintained at a point where it is only 3 db
down at a frequency of 2.5 megacycles.
(3) The plate of V-508 is coupled by coupling
capacitor C-529 directly to the cathode of V-512, the
PPI cathode ray tube. Since the input pulse to V-508
is positive, its output is negative, and consequently
tends to brighten up the indication on the cathode ray
tube when video signals are present. Note that posi-
tive pulses applied to the grid of the tube serve to
brighten the PPI tube indications, whereas negative
ORIGINAL
pulses applied to the cathode serve the same purpose.
Actually, it is the difference in voltage between the
cathode and the grid which serves to accelerate the
electrons of the electron stream and to brighten the
indications. Either the grid may be raised in voltage
with reference to the cathode, or the cathode voltage
may be lowered with reference to the grid in order to
intensify the electron stream and consequently brighten
the images on the screen. This characteristic of the
cathode ray tube makes it possible for three different
signals (range markers, unblanking gate and video
signals) to be connected to different elements of the
tube to secure the same result. The cathode level is
maintained at approximately the right brightness by
means of the two intensity controls, R-553 and R-554.
Potentiometer R-553 is a screw-driver-operated control
located on the side of the chassis, which is not avail-
able from the front panel. The unit must be slid for-
ward in its case to adjust this control. Potentiometer
R-554 is the FINE INTENSITY control and is located
on the front panel of the unit. When first setting up
the equipment, the coarse bias control is adjusted to
the approximate range desired for operation. Then
the chassis is pushed into place, and during operation
fine adjustments are made with the FINE INTENSITY
control located on the front panel. Instructions for
adjusting this control are contained in Section 4.
(4) V-507B is the video d-c restorer which serves
to return the cathode of the PPI tube, V-512, to the
proper bias following the appearance of a video signal
on its cathode. The grid and plate of the tube are
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-121
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
9 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
L Par. 16h(4)
R-56I
.I2MEG I- 500A
7-500
R-5000
4
I6.3V
03
I-504A
I-506A
50
I-5084 I-5074
1300V 1-275V
L- 512
R-563
2K
4 I-503A
L-510
1S-50IA
302
503
C-536
mos 10 MF
R-565
4K
C-540
11?1 10 MF
R-566
2K
V-5I3
VR-I50
+225V
C-541
IMF
? + 200V
?+150V
R-564
200 K
V-510 L-5I3
6SN7-GT
R-5017
7.5 K
C-542
.0IMF
6.3V TO V-510
?65V
Figure 2-86. Low Voltage Power Supply in PPI Indicator
connected together and the tube operates essentially
as a diode. The plate and cathode are both placed at
the same potential by FINE INTENSITY control
R-554. The adjustment of Potentiometer R-554 will
serve to place the plate and cathode of V-507, as well
as the cathode of the cathode ray PPI tube, V-512, at
the positive potential selected by potentiometer R-554
along the voltage divider formed by resistors R-552,
R-553, R-554 together with R-555 and R-5014, the
latter two resistors being in parallel. At the instant
before a video signal appears, the cathode of V-512
is at the resting potential determined by the adjust-
ment of potentiometer R-554. The plate and cathode
of V-507B are also at the same potential. The video
signals appear, and being negative, drive the cathode
of the PPI tube negative. The plate of the video d-c
restorer is also driven negative inasmuch as it is
directly coupled to the cathode of the PPI tube V-512.
In this condition, the plate of V-507B is negative with
respect to its cathode due to the voltage developed
across the 100,000 ohm resistor R-551 by the video
signals. In this condition, the diode will not conduct
current, and consequently the negative pulse will not
pass through the diode, but will be applied fully to the
cathode of the PPI tube. However, following the
passage of the video signal, there is a tendency for the
cathode of the PPI tube to fly too far positive, due to
2-122
the inductances existing in the tube and the connec-
tions to it. When this occurs, the plate of the diode
will then be positive with respect to the cathode, and
the tube will conduct. The positive charge will thus
be removed instantly from the cathode of the PPI tube.
This prevents the cathode from ever attaining a posi-
tive potential with respect to the pre-determined bias
secured by adjustment of the FINE INTENSITY con-
trol R-554. Resistor R-551 is also included in the
circuit to prevent dissipation of the negative pulse
through the bias circuits. When a negative pulse is
present, the video d-c restorer is ineffective, on the
fly-back, when the cathode tends to go positive with
respect to the pre-determined bias adjustment, the
triode instantly shorts out the resistor and permits
dissipation of the positive charge. This tends to elimi-
nate any oscillation in the circuit.
i. LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY.
(1) The low voltage power supply circuit is
shown in simplified form in Fig. 2-86. It is comprised
of transformer T-500, which supplies high voltage to
the +275 volt d-c rectifier circuit, to the ?65 volt
bias rectifier circuits, and filament voltages for all the
operating tubes of the unit except the high voltage
rectifier tube. The Type 5,U4G full-wave rectifier
tube, V-509, is the low voltage +275 volt d-c rectifier
and its output is filtered by an inductance-input net-
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 2
Par. 16i(1)
work, consisting of inductors L-511 and L-512 and
capacitors C-536, C-539 and C-540. Two voltage regu-
lator tubes are provided in this supply. The Type
VR-150 tube, V-513, has two regulated outputs, one at
150 volts and the other at 200 volts d-c. The VR-150
tube, V-517, supplies 150 volts of regulated d-c for use
by the servo circuits of the units. An unregulated out-
put of +225 volts, which is supplied to the marker
generating and amplifier circuits, is produced by the
drop through the 2,000-ohm dropping resistor, R-575.
(2) The ?65 volt d-c bias supply is comprised
of the Type 6SN7-GT bias rectifier tube, V-510, and
the output is filtered by the capacitor input filter, com-
prised of inductor L-513 and capacitors C-537 and
C-538. Potentiometer R-564 is a variable 200,000 ohm
resistor used to load the bias supply and thus to vary
its voltage output. Accurate adjustment of this bias
voltage is necessary because the bias on the gate circuit
is quite critical. Adjustment of this resistor provides
a control of the bias voltage over the necessary range.
(3) The outputs of the low voltage supply are:
(a) +275 volts and ?65 volts to the gate circuit.
(b) +200 volts, regulated, to the sweep gener-
ating circuits.
(c) +275 volts, unregulated, to the plate of the
sweep tubes.
(d) +275 volts to the focus coil of the PPI
tube.
(e) +225 volts to the range marker circuits.
(f) +275 volts and +150 volts, regulated, to
the video circuits.
(g) +275 volts and +150 volts, regulated to
the servo amplifier.
(h) Also provided by transformer T-500 are 6.3
volts a-c for filament supply for all the operating tubes,
the bias rectifier, and the PPI tube. A special center-
tapped winding supplies the filament voltage for the
low voltage rectifier V-509 while another winding
supplies power for the pilot lights around the bezel
of the unit and on the panel.
(4) The voltage regulator tube V-513, which
provides one of the regulated outputs of the low volt-
age power supply, serves a very useful function. It
has been proved that the sensitivity of a cathode ray
tube is inversely proportional to the square root of the
second anode voltage. In other words, the value of
the voltage applied to the second anode determines the
resistance of the electron beam to the effort of the
magnetic field to move it across the screen. The stiff-
ness of the electron stream thus increases as the square
root of the high voltage. This high voltage is obtained
from the high voltage transformer, which is connected
directly to the supply line. The normal value of this
voltage is about 5,000 volts. However, if the line volt-
age is increased by 10%, the high voltage applied to
the second anode would be increased by 10%, or
ORIGINAL
would rise 500 volts. Consequently, the deflection
sensitivity would be decreased by 4%. Similarly, if
the line voltage were to fall 10%, the sensitivity would
be increased by 5%. Referring to Fig. 2-86, it is seen
that the voltage regulator tube V-513 is connected
across the +275-volt output of the low voltage power
supply. The voltage output of this supply will in-
crease or decrease with the line voltage changes. The
voltage regulator tube V-513, will maintain a drop of
148 to 152 volts across it. To do this, it will draw
more or less current through resistors R-565 and R-566.
Assume the line voltage, and consequently the output
of the low voltage power supply, has increased 10%.
At some point along the divider, the voltage will have
increased by 4%. This point on the divider may be
calculated, or it may be determined by experiment. In
the case of this unit, this voltage is 192 volts, measured
when the set is operating on a normal line voltage of
115 volts a-c. This 192 volt point which increases by
4% or decreases by 5% as the line voltage varies, is
supplied to V-502A as its plate supply.
(5) Assume that the line voltage supply has
increased by 10%. The second anode voltage of the
cathode ray tube has increased by 10% and the deflec-
tion sensitivity of the cathode ray tube has decreased
by approximately 4%. But due to the connection of
the switch tube V-502-A to the 192 volt tap on the
voltage divider supplying V-513, the input voltage to
the plate of V-502A has also increased by 4%. There-
fore, the output -voltage of V-502A will be increased
by 4% and the current through the cathode ray tube
deflection yoke will be increased by 4%. This increase
in current through the cathode ray tube deflection
yoke balances the decrease in sensitivity in the tube
due to the higher second anode potential, and the over-
all deflection sensitivity of the tube remains unchanged
over a wide range of line voltage fluctuations.
j. SERVO SYSTEM.
(1) A block diagram of the servo system in the
PPI Indicator is shown in Fig. 2-87. The function of
this system is to position the sweep on the PPI tube
so that its position corresponds to the direction in
which the radar antenna is pointing. The radar an-
tenna is geared to a 6DG differential synchro generator
located in the Antenna Pedestal. The three-wire out-
put from this generator is connected to the three wind-
ing stator of a 5CT synchro control transformer in the
PPI Indicator. For an explanation of the theory of
operation of synchro units, refer to Par. 18 of this
section which describes the general theory of the
antenna positioning system of which the PPI servo
system is a part. When the position of the antenna
differs from the position of the PPI sweep, an error
voltage appears across the output terminals of the
5CT rotor. This voltage is applied through the filter
and anti-hunt circuits to the first servo amplifier.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-123
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
A's Par. 16j(2)
RADAR ANTENNA
ROTATES IN
AZIMUTH TO
LOCATE TARGETS
DRIVE
MOTOR
1
SYNCHRO ?
GENERATOR
GEARED I:1 WITH
ANTENNA
OUTPUT OF 5CT, DEPENDING ON
POSITION OF ROTOR
ROTOR MOVED ONE
DIRECTION FROM
NO-CURRENT POSITION
ROTOR IN NO-CURRENT
POSITION
ROTOR IN OTHER DIRECTION
FROM NO-CURRENT
POSITION
AMPLITUDE OF CURRENTS FROM
SYNCHRO? GENERATOR . SAME PHASE,
BUT VARYING IN AMPLITUDE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH ANTENNA POSITION.
liC
YOKE
COIL
1:11
5CT. CONTROL
TRANSFORMER
B502
1081
DRIVE
FILTER AND
=MQTOR
ANTI?HUNT
-501
CIRCUITS
FEEDBACK
LINE
FIRST
SECOND
SERVO
SERVO
SERVO
OUTPUT
AMP
AMP.
V? 514 A
V? 514 B
V? 515
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PPI
TUBE
V? 512
PHASE CHANGING
CAPACITOR C-55I
11E4
115 VOLT A.C.
OSC. LINE
Figure 2-87. FPI Servo System, Block Diagram
(2) The 60-cycle output from the 5CT is applied
to the grid of V-514A, the first servo amplifier. It is
further amplified by V-514B and the servo output tube
V-515, and applied to one field of the low inertia
motor B-501. B-501 is a two-phase motor with two
windings which are geometrically 90 degrees apart.
The other phase of this motor is fed by the ship's 115-
volt O.S.C. line through phase shifting capacitor C-551,
so that the second winding receives a voltage that is
out of phase with either of the two possible voltages
which might be provided by the 5CT control trans-
former. If the phase from the 5CT leads or lags the
phase in the O.S.C. line, the motor will run either in
one direction or another. When the shaft of the 5CT
is displaced in one direction with reference to the posi-
tion of the antenna, a voltage is applied to the field
of the motor which will cause it to run in the direction
required to reduce the error. When the antenna re-
verses, the difference in position between the antenna
and the rotor of the scr is in the other direction, and
voltage is supplied to the drive motor which will cause
it to turn in the opposite direction. When the relative
positions of the rotor of the 5CT and the antenna
coincide, no current is supplied to the motor and it
will stop. In this manner, the system can be made to
position the shaft of the 5CT in the same position as
the antenna. Since the deflection yoke coil is driven
by the 5CT also, the deflection yoke coil has also been
made to take on a position corresponding to that of
the antenna.
2-124
(3) It is obvious that for the system to operate,
it is necessary for a difference in position to exist.
Consequently, when the antenna is rotating continu-
ously, it is necessary for a slight difference in position
to exist in order for the amplifier to receive a driving
voltage and deliver an output to the drive motor. Thc
amount of lag required is determined by the attenua-
tion factor of the anti-hunt network and the gain of
the servo amplifier. This angle is small, being approxi-
mately one-half of one degree for all antenna speeds.
Since this angle is small with respect to the beam
width of the antenna, it has no effect upon bearing
accuracy.
(4) A simplified schematic diagram of the PPI
servo system is shown in Fig. 2-88. When an error
exists in the system, the rotor of the 5CT synchro con-
trol transformer is displaced from the no-current or
minimum coupling position of the magnetic field and
? an output voltage appears across the input circuits of
the servo amplifier. Capacitor C-552 is placed across
the coils of the 5CT to correct its power factor. The
voltage across the rotor of the 5CT appears across
resistor R-579 and capacitor C-534. These compo-
nents are connected in series to ground and act as a
voltage divider so that the voltage actually applied to
the anti-hunt network is the voltage that appears across
capacitor C-534. The anti-hunt network is a deriva-
tive network. More specifically, it is a bridged-T null
network. An examination of its circuit in Fig. 2-88
shows that it does not respond equally well to all
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 2
Par. 16j(4)
+ 275 V.
FROM
BEARING
NO. S2
C-5521
SI
B-502
5CT
RI
R2
R-580
.33 MEG
V-5I4A
6SL7-ST 2
R-579 R-574
27K I MEG
C-534
.IMF
C-532 C-533
;01MF .0IMF
R-599
100K
R-581
C-547
1.0MF
R-579
470
100K
7-502
G-548 I E
33 MEG 47 MEG :
G-550
R-584 R-571
IMF 5 IMP
49 6
V-51413
6SL7GT
R-59I
2
V-515
807
i.47MEG
R-582
C-549
.005MF
R-585 R-586
47114EG 220
R-592
4.7K
R-598
4.7K
SYNCHRO-TRANSFORMER
- 60-CYCLE FILTER
FIRST SECOND
SERVO AMP SERVO AMP.
SERVO
OUTPUT
8501
PPI YOKE COIL
DRIVE MOTOR
R-560
IS MEG
1-501A
5-501B
C-55I
2.0 MF
96 97
050
VOLTAGE
Figure 2-88. FPI Servo System
frequencies. At some frequency, the reactance of the
series capacitors is equal to the resistance of resistor
R-574. At frequencies below this frequency, the cur-
rent through resistor R-574 has a slight tendency to
rise, and the capacitor current drops. At higher fre-
quencies, the capacitor current rises and the resistor
current has a slight tendency to drop. Therefore it is
evident that at some frequency a minimum output is
obtained. In this circuit, minimum output occurs
when the applied frequency is 60 cps. The circuit
constants are chosen to attenuate the applied 60-cps
voltage by approximately eight to one.
(5) As long as a constant error exists between the
angular positions of the synchro differential generator
in the Antenna Pedestal and the 5CT control trans-
former in the PPI Indicator, a constant output voltage
at a frequency of 60 cps will be obtained from the
5CT synchro unit. As long as the rotation speed of
the Antenna Pedestal does not vary, the amplitude of
this voltage will remain constant and as long as the
direction of rotation remains unchanged, the polarity
of the 5CT voltage will remain unchanged. The anti-
hunt circuit has no effect upon this single-frequency
voltage other than to attenuate it by a factor of ap-
proximately eight to one. Therefore in order for the
servo system to follow the antenna, it is only necessary
for the error in degrees to be great enough to generate
a voltage that will be great enough to drive the first
servo amplifier after it has been attenuated by the anti-
hunt network. When the amplifier is driven by an
error voltage, a driving voltage for the servo drive
motor is produced that rotates the system in a direction
tending to reduce the error angle to zero. In this
way the yoke coil on the PPI tube is rotated by the
servo system so that the PPI sweep always follows
closely behind the antenna as it rotates.
ORIGINAL
(6) If the antenna is suddenly brought to rest,
the 5CT synchro control transformer continues to
deliver an output voltage to the servo amplifier until
the drive motor positions the rotor of the 5CT so
that it is zeroed with the synchro unit in the Antenna
Pedestal. The mechanical inertia of the PPI servo
system presents a problem when the zero point is
reached. When zero is reached, the 5CT synchro unit
has enough momentum to cause it to continue to
rotate and pass on through the zero point and thus
generate an error voltage that is opposite in polarity
to the original error voltage. If corrective measures
were not employed, this output voltage would reverse
the drive causing it to build up speed in the opposite
direction. The motor would then drive the system
back to zero and momentum would make the system
continue on through causing another error voltage to
appear. This oscillation would continue until the
friction and power losses in the system overcame it.
(7) The purpose of the anti-hunt network is to
provide a large voltage with a polarity the same as
the error voltage that would be produced if the system
passed through the zero point. To prevent oscillation
or hunting this voltage must appear instantly upon the
slightest tendency of the system to pass through zero
and it must disappear just as rapidly when the system
is brought to rest. Otherwise it would act as an error
voltage and drive the system backward. The anti-hunt
network is shown in Fig. 2-88. It consists of capacitors
C-532 and C-533 and resistors R-574 and R-599. This
circuit is a bridge-T null network as previously ex-
plained. Potentiometer R-599 is used to adjust the
circuit so that it delivers enough driving voltage for
the amplifier when the antenna is rotating and to
establish the null point of the circuit. The nominal
setting of this potentiometer is approximately 70,000
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-125
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2 SECTION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
THEORY OF OPERATION
4E-- 0 --s
O. OUTPUT VOLTAGE FROM FILTER VERSUS ANGULAR DEVIATION.
RESULTANT
VOLTAGE
55-CPS.
SIDEBAND
DIRECTION OF DEVIATION
ATTENUATED
60-CPS.
CARRIER
65-CPS.
SIDEBAND
b. RESULTANT VOLTAGE FROM 55 AND 65-CPS. SIDEBANDS COMBINED
WITH 60-CPS. CARRIER AS IT WOULD APPEAR AT FILTER OUTPUT
TERMINALS WITHOUT PHASE SHIFT.
65-CPS
SIDEBAND
Act
60-CPS. I I
CARRIER I I
?
41111---- 00 -Po
55-CPS.
SIDEBAND
RESULTANT
VOLTAGE
DIRECTION OF DEVIATION
C. RESULTANT VOLTAGE FROM 55 AND 65-CPS. SIDEBANDS AND 60-CPS
CARRIER AT OUTPUT TERMINALS OF FILTER. SIDEBANDS SHIFTED
17 DEGREES IN OPPOSITE DIRECTIONS.
2-126
Figure 2-89. Phase Relationships in Anti-Hunt Network
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946
ohms. Actually, a true null point is not obtained with
this circuit but any 60-cps voltage present when the
system attempts to hunt, is attenuated to such a low
amplitude that its effect is negligible. It is evident
that any attempt on the part of the 5CT synchro will
produce an increase in the amplitude of its 60-cps out-
put. The rate of increase represents a modulating
frequency. At the zero position, the carrier amplitude
is zero and therefore the hunting voltage delivered to
the network is a 60-cps carrier, 100 per cent modulated
with the hunting frequency. Assume that the initial
hunting frequency is 5 cps. Any attempt to hunt
produces a 60-cps carrier with 55- and 65-cps side-
bands. The function of the anti-hunt network is to
suppress the 60-cps carrier and shift the phases of its
sidebands in opposite directions so that their ampli-
tudes add up to a resultant voltage with a polarity
that will drive the servo motor in a direction opposite
to the direction in which the momentum of the system
is driving it. Actually this voltage acts as a brake on
the system since it disappears the instant the system
comes to rest where the rate of amplitude change is
zero. For this voltage to be effective, it must appear
immediately upon the slightest deviation from zero.
A plot of this voltage versus degrees of deviation from
-zero is shown in part a. of Fig. 2-89. This curve shows
that the polarity of the voltage must reverse with the
direction of the deviation. The voltage builds up
rapidly and theoretically it could reach infinity if the
hunting angle could become great enough to cause a
resonant effect to appear in the network: The overall
effect of the network is to make a very small deviation
appear as a very large angle to the servo amplifier.
(8) A plot of the attenuated carrier and its un-
attenuated sideband frequencies are shown in part b
of Fig. 2-89. This is the output that would be ob-
tained from the filter if the sidebands were not shifted
in phase. The resultant voltage shown is the sum of
the three voltages and it is this resultant voltage that
acts on the grid of the first servo amplifier. Note that
the amplitude of the resultant voltage in Fig. 2-89b is
less than the amplitude of the 60-cps carrier and oppo-
site in phase. It is not great enough to drive the
amplifier and would drive it in the wrong direction
if it could drive it at all. The direction of rotation
is to the right. If the direction reverses, the polarities
reverse. It is evident from the low amplitude of the
resultant voltage that the system could coast until the
amplitude of the 60-cps voltage increased sufficiently
to drive the amplifier. However, the sideband fre-
quencies suffer a phase shift as they pass through the
network. The 55-cps sideband lags the suppressed
carrier and the 65-cps sideband leads the carrier. At a
hunting frequency of 5 cps, the phase shift is approxi-
mately 17 degrees as shown in Fig. 2-89c. This phase
ORIGINAL
SECTION 2
Par. 16j(7)
shift causes the resultant voltage to shift in phase so
that its polarity is the same as the polarity of the 60-cps
carrier that would eventually reach an amplitude suffi-
cient to drive the system back to zero. Note in Fig.
2-89c that the amplitude of the resultant voltage
reaches a peak just slightly off the zero position. If
the direction of deviation is reversed, the polarities
shown are reversed and a negative peak is obtained
with the same relative position with respect to zero.
Therefore the maximum angle through which the
system can hunt is the angle represented by the vertical
dotted lines in Fig. 2-89c. This angle is a very small
fraction of a degree. The effect of the resultant volt-
age is to apply a voltage that opposes the rotation of
the drive motor through very small angles. This volt-
age quickly disappears when a relatively large error
angle appears in the system. The anti-hunt voltage
disappears in this case because the rate of follow-up
is constant and therefore the amplitude of the 60-cps
error voltage applied to the anti-hunt network is
constant. When the error voltage is constant, there
are no sidebands present.
(9) The output voltage from the anti-hunt circuit
is amplified by V-514A and applied to the grid of
V-514B through coupling capacitor C-548. V-514A
employs cathode degeneration to improve its response
characteristics. Resistor R-561 and capacitor C-547 are
included to de-couple the plate circuits V-514A and
V-514B to prevent feedback through the B+ circuits
which would cause motor boating and other undesir-
able effects. Resistors R-592 and R-598 form a voltage
divider across the plate circuit of the output tube, and
a degenerative feedback voltage is taken from the
junction of the two resistors. When the 5CT is zeroed,
the voltage induced in the rotor of the drive motor,
when it continues to coast, is fed back to the cathode
of V-514B to provide a small reversing voltage to stop
the motor. This voltage is coupled to the cathode of
the second servo amplifier through the cathode resistor
R-583. The result of this negative feedback is to pro-
vide a constant input voltage to the motor when the
antenna is rotating and to brake the motor to a sudden
stop when the system reaches zero position.
(10) The plate voltage of the servo output tube
is supplied by a special voltage regulator circuit which
was mentioned in the description of the low voltage
power supply. The regulator is designed to provide
an output of 150 volts d-c and is comprised of the
regulator dropping resistor R-575 and the type VR-150
regulator tube V-517. In addition to supplying regu-
lated plate voltage, this tube also serves to present an
even load on the power supply despite the fact that
the plate current of the servo output tube varies over
a reasonably wide range. When reversing the motor
drive suddenly, or when sudden acceleration is desired,
a larger-than-usual amount of current is required.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-127
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
SECTION
Am Par. 161(10)
NAVSHIPS 900,946
THEORY OF OPERATION
Figure 2-90. FPI Servo System, Mechanical Diagram
When the servo output tube is drawing more current,
the voltage regulator will draw less. And when the
requirements of the servo tube are less, the voltage
regulator tube will absorb the excess of current. Thus
the amount of current required from the power supply
will be constant, and the regulation of the power sup-
ply will not be affected by the varying plate current
requirements of the servo output tube.
k. YOKE COIL.
(1) The yoke coil consists of a coil mounted in a
cylindrical form that fits over the neck of the PPI tube
near the bell of the PPI envelope. See Fig. 2-90.
Connections to the yoke coil are made by means of
carbon brushes that ride on two slip rings that are
mounted on the circumference on the coil form. The
field of the yoke coil passes diametrically through the
neck of the PPI tube. When the electron beam passes
through this field, the beam is deflected at right angles
to the direction of the magnetic field and the direction
of the beam. The amount of deflection depends upon
the intensity of the magnetic field. Since the field
intensity varies directly with the amplitude of the
current in the coil -and the current is varying linearly
(sawtooth), the beam will be deflected outward at a
constant rate of speed and abruptly returned to the
center of the tube where it begins its outward motion
again. The PPI servo system rotates the yoke coil
around the neck of the tube in a fixed relationship to
the position of the radar antenna, and the position of
2-128
the sweep is used to indicate the direction of the tar-
get. The yoke coil is mounted in the aluminum cast-
ing and is borne by two special ball bearings. The
races of these bearings are constructed of non-ferrous
metal and the balls are Pyrex glass.
1. DRIVE GEAR TRAIN.
(1) The yoke coil is rotated by a large spur gear
with 180 teeth as shown in Fig. 2-90. This gear is
assembled to the yoke coil with three screws. The
motion of this gear is obtained from drive motor
B-501, which obtains power from the output of V-515
in the servo amplifier. The pinion on the shaft of
motor V-501 has 12 teeth and it mates with a spur
gear with 79 teeth. The larger gear is mounted on a
shaft that drives an 11 tooth pinion. This shaft turns
in two ball bearings. The pinion on the shaft mates
with the large 180-tooth spur gear that drives the yoke
coil. The over-all speed reduction from the drive
motor to the yoke coil is approximately 108 to 1. The
reason that odd numbers of teeth are used on the gears
is to reduce wear and simplify reassembling the gear
train when it is disassembled for any reason. The odd
numbers of teeth preclude the possibility of the same
teeth meshing too often and the wear is thus equalized.
Therefore, it is not necessary to mark the teeth when
the gears are disassembled. The gear ratio is chosen
to permit the motor to run at a speed of approximately
3200 rpm that can be easily controlled by the servo
system which reduces the possibility of hunting. Hunt-
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
ing is a condition where the control is inaccurate
enough to cause the motor armature to mechanically
oscillate when the radar antenna stops rotating.
m. SERVO GEAR TRAIN.
(1) A smaller spur gear with 104 teeth is assem-
bled to the large yoke spur gear to form a cluster
assembly as shown in Fig. 2-90. This gear mates with
a split gear with 104 teeth to provide a 1 to 1 ratio.
The split gear consists of two gears mounted side by
side on the same shaft. An opening is cut into the
web of each gear, and a helical spring is inserted in
the opening. One end of the spring rests against one
gear at one end of the opening and the other end of
the spring rests against the other gear at the other end
of the opening. The compressed spring forces the
gears in opposite directions. Therefore, the adjacent
teeth of the split gear are out of line. One of the split
gears is firmly keyed to the drive shaft and the other
split gear is free to rotate a small amount on the shaft.
The teeth of the split gear completely fill the space
between the teeth of the gear in the cluster on the
yoke coil, and backlash is eliminated.
(2) The shaft driven by the split gear turns in
two ball bearings as shown in Fig. 2-90. A universal
coupling connects the split gear shaft to the armature
shaft of the 5CT synchro-transformer B-502. The 1 to
1 gear ratio causes the armature of the synchro-trans-
former to rotate through one complete revolution each
time the yoke coil completes one revolution.
n. SERVO OPERATION.
(1) Whenever the field of the synchro-trans-
former is displaced by the movement of the radar
antenna, an output is obtained from the servo ampli-
fier. The servo output energizes drive motor B-501
and it rotates the yoke coil through the drive gear
train. The phase of the voltages applied to the motor
depends upon the direction in which the radar antenna
is rotating. Consequently, the drive motor rotates
the yoke coil in the same direction in which the radar
antenna rotates. The drive motor also rotates the
armature of the synchro-transformer B-502 until it
occupies a position where the field is no longer dis-
placed. At this point the servo amplifier no longer
delivers an output to the drive motor and it stops
running. If the radar antenna rotates continuously,
the armature of the synchro-transformer never catches
up with the field and the motor drives the yoke coil
continuously.
(2) The synchro-transformer B-502 is held in
place with three clamps. When these clamps are
loosened, the synchro-transformer can be rotated in its
mounting. The armature does not turn because of
the mechanical rotation of the synchro-transformer by
hand. Rotation by hand moves the field to produce an
output voltage from the servo amplifier to the drive
motor, which in turn rotates the yoke coil and the
armature of the synchro-transformer until the hand
ORIGINAL
SECTION 9
Par. 161(1) Am
rotation is discontinued. This feature perm its the
direction of the PPI sweep to be oriented with the
direction of the radar antenna. In practice, the synchro-
transformer is never rotated more than a few degrees.
If the PPI sweep and the radar antenna are as much
as 180 degrees apart, the relayed O.S.C. connections
are reversed.
17. GENERAL CONTROL UNIT.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The General Control Unit shown in Fig. 2-91
consists mainly of switches for remotely controlling
the radar transmitter associated with the Indicator
Console. It also contains devices which indicate the
operating conditions in the transmitter. A switch is
included for turning the components of the Indicator
Console on and off as a group. A blower motor is also
included in the unit and ventilates the Console Re-
ceiver. A number of storage sockets are mounted in
the back of the unit. They are used for storing spare
tubes for the components of the Indicator Console.
b. TRANSMITTER CONTROLS.
(1) The key type switch on the front panel of
the unit is S-406. This switch is used for turning the
radar transmitter on and off when the REMOTE-
LOCAL switch at the transmitter is in the REMOTE
position. Transmitter pilot light 1-402, marked
TRANSMITTER ON, is illuminated whenever the
radar transmitter is operating. The LOCAL CON-
TROL pilot light, 1-401, is illuminated to show when
the control of the transmitter is turned over to the
Indicator Console position.
(2) The PLATE VOLTAGE kilovoltmeter M-401
is used to read the plate voltage applied to the oscil-
lator tubes in the transmitter. C-402 is a capacitor to
by-pass radio frequency voltage around the meter. The
multiplier resistor for this meter is in the transmitter,
and consequently the lines to the meter are at a rela-
tively low potential.
(3) Switches S-401 and S-402 are the OFF and
ON push-buttons for the a-c power to the equipment.
Switches S-403 and S-404, the LOWER and RAISE
buttons respectively, remotely operate the motor-
driven control which raises or lowers the plate voltages
applied to the oscillator tubes.
c. INDICATOR CONSOLE SWITCH.
(1) This is switch S-405. It turns on and off all
a-c supply voltages to the various components in the
Indicator Console. If this switch is in the ON posi-
tion, the components of the Console may be turned on -
and off with the rest of the equipment by the ON-OFF
buttons on the unit. If the operator wishes to turn
off the Indicator Console and leave the rest of the
equipment on, the INDICATOR CONSOLE switch
must be used. Care must be taken when working
around this switch. The 115 volt a-c power is on the
terminals of this switch even though the interlocks on
the Console are open.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-129
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2 SECTION
NAVSH IPS 900,946
THEORY OF OPERATION
2-130
Figure 2-91. General Control Unit, Schematic Diagram
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 9
Par. 17d(1)
d. BLOWER MOTOR.
(1) The blower motor, B-401, is a capacitor-start-
split-phase motor operating from the 115 volt line.
Its primary purpose is to cool the Console Receiver
above it rather than the General Control unit itself.
18. ANTENNA POSITIONING SYSTEM.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The Bearing Indicator is the main antenna
positioning control and indicating unit and is located
in the Indicator Console. A block diagram of the
Bearing Indicator is shown in Fig. 2-92. By operating
a handwheel on the front panel, the operator may
move the antenna of the radar set in azimuth to any
position desired. In addition, the operator may cause
the antenna to be automatically rotated in azimuth for
searching operations. A switch on the front panel of
the unit can be operated to energize a d-c motor, which
in turn, will rotate the handwheel. Thus, the antenna
will rotate continuously while the switch is in one of
its ON positions. Two speeds in either direction are
available by the operation of this switch.
(2) The Bearing Indicator also indicates the posi-
tion of the antenna in azimuth. Two types of indi-
cations are provided. One of these is the true bearing
indication, which indicates the position of the antenna
with reference to true North. The other indication is
relative bearing which is the bearing of the antenna
with respect to the ships bow. The Bearing Indicator
is only one part of the antenna positioning system.
Consequently, to understand the electrical functioning
of the unit, the description of its operation is com-
bined with a description of the antenna positioning
components. Fig. 2-92 is a simplified block diagram
of the antenna positioning system of the SR Equip-
ment. Refer to this diagram during the following
discussion.
b. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION.
(1) The complete antenna positioning system ob-
tains basic positioning data voltages for true bearing
indications from the ship's gyro-compass system. These
voltages are applied to the Synchro Amplifier, which
is part of the Antenna position system. The voltages
are termed O.S.C. meaning own ship's course. The out-
put of the Synchro Amplifier varies in accordance with
the deviation of the heading of the ship from true
North as established by the gyro-compass equipment.
The three-wire output voltage obtained from the
synchro amplifier is combined with relative data volt-
ages to provide true bearing indications on the Bearing
Indicator and PPI Indicator. The compass voltage also
acts to maintain the position of the antenna with re-
spect to true North. For example, if the Antenna be
trained to 450 in azimuth, it will continue to point
in that direction regardless of any change in the ship's
course. The Synchro-Amplifier receives a 1-speed data
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21
voltage, a 36-speed data voltage, and a compass excita-
tion voltage from the ship's compass circuits. From
these voltages, a set of relayed voltages are produced
by the Synchro Amplifier which have the same phase
and amplitude as the voltages supplied by the compass
system. The primary purpose of the Synchro Ampli-
? fier is to prevent loading the compass equipment and
to isolate the antenna positioning equipment from the
compass circuits.
(2) Further reference to Fig. 2-92 shows that the
antenna has two 6DG synchro-differential generators
geared to it. The gear ratio is such that the shaft of
one of the synchro-differential generators rotates 36
times while the antenna rotates once. When the 36-
speed relayed compass data voltages are applied to
the stator of the unit, a second set of voltages will
appear across the rotor. These voltages will be pro-
portional to the difference between the rotor position
of the 6DG in the Antenna Pedestal and the position
of the rotor of the 36-speed compass synchro generator.
The voltages are connected to the stator of the 36-speed
SCT synchro transformer which is geared to the hand-
wheel on the front of the bearing indicator. If the
rotor of the 5CT is displaced from its zero voltage
position, it delivers an output voltage. The output of
the 5CT synchro transformer is connected to an elec-
tronic servo amplifier. The output of the electronic
amplifier is applied to a servo generator and the output
of the servo generator drives the antenna drive motor
to reposition the antenna in accordance with the posi-
tion of the 5CT rotor in the Bearing Indicator. The
above combination form& what is termed a closed servo
loop or servo system. This is the basic antenna posi-
tioning system of the equipment. Its operation will be
explained in the following paragraphs. When the
stator of the 5CT is in a certain angular position, deter-
mined by the voltages from the 6DG on the antenna
pedestal, no output will be applied by the 5CT to the
servo amplifier. When the angular relationship of the
rotors of the 6DG and 5CT changes, or when the
36-speed compass voltages change, as they do when
the ship changes course, an output will appear from
the 5CT which will be applied to the servo amplifier.
(3) It can be seen that it is possible to secure an
output from the 5CT in three ways. The first is to
physically move the antenna, which will move the
rotor of the 6DG. The second is to rotate the handwheel
and move the rotor of the 5CT. The third is for the
ship to change course and thus change the voltages
applied to the rotor of the 6DG. The amplitude of
the output from the 5CT will reflect the magnitude
of the displacement or the change' in the 36-times
compass voltage. It will also reflect the direction in
which the positional difference exists by means of the
polarity of the output. The output from the servo
amplifier is applied to the servo generator. This is an
a-c motor-driven two-stage d-c generator. When no
: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-131
2 SECTION
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
36 TIMES
RELAYED
COMPASS
VOLTAGE
TRUE
ANTENNA
?11
IRELATIVE
60 CYCLE
AC
606
DC
1111111 1111111111M
DRIVE
MOTOR
RELAYED
COMPASS
REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
10
NORMAL HRECTOX
I 1 UNIT
0 1
EMERGENCY
A
SERVO
GENERATOR
1 TIMES
RELAYED
\
COMPASS\
VOLTAGE
TRUE
6DG
I>
BEARING
RELATIVEI
INDICATOR
60 CYCLE
AC
5F
TRUE
B-804
5CT
B-803
5D
RELATIVE
slip5
.p/?????=1.01
SLEW
MOTOR
B-801
RECT.
UNIT
SERVO
AMPLIFIER
SYNC HRO
AMPLIFIER
36 TIMES 1 TIMES COMPASS
COMPASS COMPASS REFERENCE
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
2-132
Figure 2-92. Antenna Positioning System, Block Diagram
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
voltage is applied to the servo generator, it is running
without field voltage and consequently not delivering
an output to the antenna drive motor. The moment
an output voltage appears across the rotor of the 5CT
synchro transformer, the servo amplifier supplies field
current to the servo generator, the servo generator
supplies a d-c voltage to the antenna drive motor, and
the motor drives the antenna in azimuth. The direc-
tion of this rotation is determined by the polarity of
the 5CT output so that the antenna moves in a direc-
tion which drives the shaft of the 6DG to correct any
angular difference between the position of its rotor
and the rotor of the 5CT in the Bearing Indicator.
When the antenna reaches the proper position,_ the
output from the 5CT becomes zero. Therefore, no
more current is supplied to the d-c drive motor and the
Antenna stops.
(4) The operator, by moving the handwheel,
creates an output from the 5CT which will reposition
the antenna to a position which corresponds to the
handwheel movement. If the ship changes course, and
the compass voltages used as a reference change, the
same net result is obtained and the antenna is moved.
Should the antenna be physically displaced, the 5CT
will produce an output which will move the antenna
back to the position determined by the handwheel.
This latter action is usually caused by antenna momen-
tum after the handwheel has stopped. Since the an-
tenna is then displaced from the corresponding posi-
tion of the handwheel, the action of the servo system
serves to bring it back to the proper position. When
the system is being operated on relative bearing, the
reference voltage is a source of constant a-c from the
ship's a-c lines. It is applied to the 6DG so that the
reference will be to the bow of the ship rather than
to true North.
(5) The position of the antenna appears on dials
in the Bearing Indicator due to the action of three
synchro units. Two of these are in the Bearing Indi-
cator and one is geared to the antenna. Referring to
the simplified block diagram in Fig. 2-92, it will be
seen that a 6DG synchro-differential generator is
geared in a 1:1 ratio to the antenna. This generator
is excited by the 1-speed compass voltage from the
Synchro Amplifier when the equipment is operated
on true bearing. The output voltage from the 6DG
is a three-wire synchro signal. When excited by the
true behring compass voltage, it represents the devia-
tion of the antenna from true North. This voltage
is applied to two other synchro units in the Bearing
Indicator. These synchros have dials coupled to their
shafts. The 5F synchro repeater unit drives the true
bearing indicator dial. Voltages from the 6DG on the
antenna, position its shaft and dial in such a manner
that it indicates the deflection of the antenna in
degrees from true North when the system is operating
on true bearing. When the system is operating on
ORIGINAL
SECTION
Par. 18b(3) 2
relative bearing, the 5F synchro indicates relative
bearing. The reference voltage for the rotor of this
indicator is the compass excitation from the synchro
amplifier. The 5D synchro-differential generator, al-
ways indicates relative bearing. The output from the
one-speed 6DG in the Antenna Pedestal is applied to
one of the windings of the- 5D. The other winding
receives a fixed one-speed three-wire compass reference
voltage from the Synchro Amplifier when the equip-
ment is operating on relative bearing. The 5D synchro
unit subtracts these voltages to obtain a difference
voltage that represents the position of the antenna
with respect to the bow of the ship. The indication
is, therefore, the direction of the antenna with relation
to the bow of the ship. When the radar set is oper-
ating on relative bearing, excitation voltage to the
6DG on the antenna pedestal is a constant voltage from
the ship's a-c lines.
(6) When the operator desires to have the an-
tenna rotate continuously, a small d-c drive motor in
the Bearing Indicator is used to drive the hand control.
This small d-c motor, called a slewing motor, is
coupled to the handwheel by a reduction gear. When
it is running, it rotates the 5CT to supply a continuous
error voltage to the servo amplifier.
(7) From the foregoing explanation it can be
seen that in true bearing operation excitation voltage
from the compass is relayed by the Synchro Amplifier
to the synchro 'units in the Antenna Pedestal and com-
pass reference voltage from the Synchro Amplifier is
relayed to the Bearing Indicator. The output from the
Bearing Indicator, drives the Servo Amplifier, and its
output is used to excite the Servo Generator. The out-
put of the Servo Generator drives the Antenna Drive
Motor. The detailed discussion of the antenna posi-
tioning system takes up each component in the order
in which its function appears in the sequence of
operation.
19. SYNCHRO UNITS.
a. GENERAL.
(1) In order to understand the functioning of the
antenna positioning system, it is necessary to have a
general understanding of the operating principles of
synchro units. A synchro unit is a single-phase trans-
former, constructed like a motor. There are two types
of synchro units used in the SR Equipment. One type
has a primary winding consisting of a single coil which
is wound on the armature or rotor. The field consists
of three windings and is generally called the stator.
The coupling coefficient between the windings is ap-
proximately 0.45. The stator windings are connected
together in a star or Y arrangement as shown in Fig.
2-93. The other ends of these windings form a three-
wire output circuit. The other type ot synchro unit
used in the SR Equipment is a differential generator
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-133
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
9 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
A' Par. 19a(1)
and its primary consists of three coils which are star-
connected, similar to the stator arrangement. The
stator coils of both types are physically placed 120
geometrical degrees apart in the synchro unit. From
this it may be deduced that when the rotor is posi-
tioned so that close coupling exists between it and one
of the stator windings, the coefficient of coupling be-
tween it and the other two stator windings is con-
siderably less. Therefore equal voltages will not be
obtained from each of the stator windings. As the
rotor is turned, its magnetic field rotates with it and
as the coupling with each individual coil changes with
rotation of the rotor, the potentials at the stator ter-
minals also change.
b. MOTORS AND GENERATORS.
(1) When two synchro units are connected to-
gether as shown in Fig. 2-93 a, the rotors assume the
same position with respect to each other. When the
two rotors are in the same position, the voltages in-
duced in the stator windings are identical and since
the .windings are connected so that the flow of current
in one coil is opposed by the flow of current in the
corresponding coil, no current flows in any of the
stator circuits. In this case there is no torque on the
rotor. If the rotor of the synchro generator is rotated
30 degrees, the voltage across stator winding Si rises
from 26 to 45 volts. Since this voltage exceeds the
26 volts across the Si winding in the synchro motor, a
current flows in the circuit and a magnetic field exists
at Si with a polarity opposite to the polarity of the
rotor field at the point. The same conditions exist in
the S2 windings. The voltage across the S3 winding
in the synchro generator drops to zero since the axis
of the rotor is perpendicular to the axis of the S3
winding and the coupling is reduced to zero. The
voltage in the S3 winding to the synchro motor causes
a current to flow in the S3 circuit that is opposite in
polarity to the currents flowing in the other two
windings. Consequently a magnetic field exists at S3
in the synchro motor that is opposite to the field of
the rotor at that point. The attraction that now exists
between the rotor and the stator field in the synchro
motor produces a torque that tends to turn the rotor
in the same direction in which the rotor of the synchro
generator was turned. This torque exists until the
positions of the rotors are the same and current ceases
to flow. Thus it can be seen that when the rotor of
the synchro generator is rotated, the rotor of the
synchro motor follows closely.
c. CONTROL TRANSFORMERS.
(1) If the rotor of the synchro motor is not con-
nected to the rotor of the synchro generator as shown
in Fig. 2-93b, there is no tendency for it to turn and
a different situation exists. When the positions of
the two rotors are 90 degrees apart, the rotor Of the
second synchro unit, which now becomes a trans-
2-134
former, is closely coupled to two opposing fields and
the currents induced by them cancel each other. At
the same time the rotor axis is perpendicular to the
magnetic field of the other stator winding and the
coupling between these two windings is zero. Except
for a? very small voltage induced in the rotor by eddy
currents the output voltage taken from the rotor will
be zero. In this arrangement, the stator windings of
the synchro transformer become the primary and the
rotor winding is the secondary. If the rotor of the
synchro generator is rotated 30 degrees as shown, the
stator voltages change. The voltage across Si rises to
45 degrees, the voltage across S2 drops to approxi-
mately 45 volts and the voltage across S3 drops to
zero. This shifts the resultant magnetic fields and
increases the coupling to the rotor as shown and an
output voltage appears across it. The application of
control transformers is described in connection with
the components in which they are used.
d. DIFFERENTIAL GENERATORS.
(1) Fig. 2-93c shows a synchro differential gen-
erator. The basic principles involved are the same
as for the two preceding cases. The only difference
is that the differential synchro generator acts as a
one-to-one ratio coupling transformer between two
synchro units with single winding rotors. When the
three-winding rotor is aligned with the stator coils,
close coupling exists between the rotor and stator
windings and the output voltage is equal to the input
voltage. If the rotor of the differential generator is
rotated slightly, the coupling changes and produces a
corresponding change in output voltage. For example,
in the right-hand portion of Fig. 2-93c, the voltage
across RI is zero volts and the voltage across the Si
winding connected to it is also zero volts. The voltages
across the other two rotor windings is 45 volts and
this voltage also appears across the stator windings
connected to them.
(2) To determine the voltage relationships in a
synchro differential generator, consider the left-hand
portion of Fig. 2-93c. In this figure, R1 is closely
coupled to Si and similar coupling exists between the
other corresponding coils. The angular deviation of
the rotor is zero. In this case the rotor voltages are
equal to the product of the cosine of zero degrees and
the stator voltages. For example, the voltage across R1
is equal to 52 cos 00 (52 x 1) which is 52 volts. The
voltage across R2 is 26 cos 00 (26 x 1) which is equal
to 26 volts. In the right-hand portion of Fig. 2-93c,
the rotor of the differential synchro is displaced 30
degrees in a counterclockwise direction. The polarity
arrows show that in this position, the voltages induced
in R1 by Si and S3 will be opposite in phase. Since
the axis of RI is perpendicular to the axis of S2, no
coupling exists between these coils. Therefore, the
voltage across R1 is the sum of the voltages induced
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
NO CURRENT
NO CURRENT
a. SYNCHRO GENERATOR AND MOTOR
0.2
A
0.55 A.
b. SYNCHRO GENERATOR AND CONTROL TRANSFORMER
I I 5V.?o-
C. DIFFERENTIAL GENERATOR
S3
SECTION 2
39 V.
Figure 2-93. Synchro Units, Basic Principles
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-135
2-136
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSH IPS 900,946 SECTION 2
SYNCHROTIE INSPECTION
DOOR FRAME --
ANTENNA
ANCHOR PAD
5781
HANDCRANK
OIL FILLER
PLUG
4,561
OIL LEVEL PLUG
I OIL DRAIN PLUG
32466 BRUSH COVER
STOWING LOCK
TERMINAL
PANEL
Figure 2-94. Antenna Pedestal
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-137
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
1) SECTION
L Par. 19d(2)
NAVSHIPS 900,946
30 TEETH
/-I SYNCHROT/E /80 TEETH
/80 TEETH'''. "Ill'?'
? ,11111)11111111111
6-/
?36- SYNCHROTIE
THEORY OF OPERATION
?30 TEETH
THESE GEARS
STATIONARY To MAST
/80 TEETH
ROTATES WITH ANTENNA
DRIVE MOTOR
RATED 3450 RPM
1/2 HP D.C. OPERA T-
/NG AT 2660 RPM
STATIONARY
TO MAST
Figure 2-95. Antenna Pedestal Gear Schematic
by Si and S3. This voltage is 26 cos 300 ? 26 cos 30?
which is equal to zero. The voltage across R2 is in-
duced by the fields of S2 and Si. Since the field of Si
links S2, it is obvious that the two component fields
acting on R2 are Si and one-half of the S2 field. Note
that this field links S3. Therefore the voltage across
R2 is 26 cos 30? +26 cos 30? which is 45 volts.
Similarly, the voltage across R3 is ?26 cos 30? ? 26
cos 30? which is ?45 volts. Thus it can be seen that
as the angle changes, the voltages change directly with
the product of its cosine function and the stator
voltages.
20. ANTENNA PEDESTAL.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The Antenna Pedestal supports the antennas
and contains the rotating mechanism and the position
data synchro units necessary to provide an indication
of the direction of the antenna and to control its rota-
tion. The Antenna Pedestal also contains the r-f trans-
mission lines. The r-f lines pass through rotating
joints in the upper portion of the Antenna Pedestal
2-138
to permit the antennas to rotate. The r-f lines in the
Antenna Pedestal have been discussed in connection
with the r-f transmission system and therefore require
no detailed treatment here.
b. SYNCHRO ASSEMBLY.
(1) There are two 6DG synchro differential gen-
erators located in the dome of the Antenna Pedestal.
See Fig. 2-94. One of these units transmits one-speed
data to the Bearing Indicator to position its dials on
which true and relative bearings are indicated. The
other 6DG transmits data to The positioning circuits in
the antenna positioning system. The 6DG synchro
units are mounted in a casting that clamps to the center
post of the Antenna Pedestal around which the dome
rotates. A schematic diagram of the gears in the
Antenna Pedestal is shown in Fig. 2-95. A spur gear,
fastened to the rotating dome, rotates around the cen-
ter post and meshes with a spur gear mounted on the
shaft of the one-speed 6DG. Each of these gears have
180 teeth and the 6DG rotates at the same speed with
which the dome rotates but in the opposite direction.
The gear on the one-speed 6DG also meshes with a
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946
6 DG 1 SPEED
B 1302
R3 Al SI
S3
Al
6 DG 36 SPEED
81301
R3 SI
S1301
SHIPS HEAD
MARKER
S3
0 0 0
57 58 59
151
ORIGINAL
S1302
R1303 P1304
660 660
E 1307
169 1
o
168 I
0
0
71
0
ccWiTYM
DRIVE MOTOR B 1303 OR 81306
E1308
A2
Al
/68 169
SECTION 2
FIELD
CginTnn
F! F2F2
700 I
71
- J
I 70
I 0
II I
71
169
I
COLLECTOR ASSY.
DISC.
PLUG
P1301
J 1303
110 V REG.
J 1302
K 1301
1301
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q .6 6o 0
152 153 60 61 62 154 155 156 4 168 70 8 169 C 71 0 E 01 6 101 02 03 77 78
I
Y
TERMINAL BLOCKS E 1302, E 1303, E 1304
Figure 2-96. Antenna Pedestal, Schematic
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
TEL. JACK
J 1301
2-139
2-140:
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSH IPS 900,946 SECTION 9
Par. 20b(1)
30-tooth pinion in a cluster gear. The cluster rotates
around a shaft mounted on the synchro casting. The
other gear in the cluster has 180 teeth and meshes with
a 30-tooth pinion mounted on the rotor shaft of the
36-speed 6DG. Thus the rotation speed of the dome
is increased 36 times in two 6-to-1 stages.
c. ROTATING ASSEMBLY.
(1) The rotating mechanism is shown in Fig.
2-95. The lower portion of the Antenna Pedestal does
not rotate. It consists of the base, center post, ring
gear and collector ring assembly. The upper portion
of the dome rests on graphite-impregnated bronze
bearings mounted on the center post. There are two
of these bearings. The drive Motor shown in Fig. 2-95
has a 10-tooth pinion mounted on its drive shaft. This
pinion meshes with a 101-tooth annular gear which
drives a shaft on which is mounted a 12-tooth pinion.
This pinion meshes with another 101-tooth annular
gear. The shaft driven by the second annular gear
has a 14-tooth bevel gear pinion mounted on it. This
pinion meshes with the bevel ring gear which is
mounted on the stationary center post. When the
armature of the motor rotates, the bevel gear pinion
rolls along on the bevel ring gear and carries the dome
with it. A crank is provided which can be attached
to the motor shaft so that the Pedestal can be rotated
manually.
d. COLLECTOR RING ASSEMBLY.
(1) Power for the drive motor and other circuits
is brought into the base through multi-conductor
cables which connect to leads that pass up through the
lower portion of the center post to the collector ring
assembly. The collector ring assembly has twelve
silver rings. Six are in use and six are spares. The
brushes are phosphor bronze and are mounted on
brush blocks that are in turn mounted on the dome.
The brush blocks are mounted on access plates that
are mounted over holes in the side of the dome with
mounting studs. The removal of these plates permits
the brush assemblies and the collector rings to be
inspected, cleaned and repaired. The brushes connect
to leads that go to the various components.
e. CIRCUITS.
(1) A schematic diagram of the Antenna Pedestal
is shown in Fig. 2-96. The leads from the synchro
units are brought down to terminal blocks in the base
of the Antenna Pedestal. The stator windings of the
6DG synchro units are excited by either of two output
voltages obtained from the Synchro Amplifier. One
of these voltages is the relayed compass voltage which
is a function of the angle between the ship's heading
and true North. The position of the rotor always
represents the angular position of the antenna with
respect to the bow of the ship. The subtraction of
one of these angles from the other is obtained by the
degree of coupling between the rotor and stator as
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21
previously explained. Since the degree of coupling is
determined by the position of the rotor, an output
voltage is obtained that is proportional to the deviation
of the antenna from true North. The other voltage
is a fixed reference voltage obtained from a trans-
former in the Synchro Amplifier. When this voltage
is used to excite the 6DG stators, the output voltage is
proportional to the angular deviation of the antenna
from the bow of the ship and is used for relative bear-
ing intications. The output of the 36-speed synchro
changes 36 times for each revolution of the Antenna
Pedestal. The 36-speed output is used to control the
servo system that rotates the Antenna Pedestal. The
output from the one-speed synchro unit is used to
position the dials on the Bearing Indicator.
(2) A telephone jack, J-1301 is used to provide
a telephone circuit to the rest of the radar equipment
below deck. The circuits to this jack are brought out
to one of the terminal blocks in the base. An a-c cir-
cuit is connected to a convenience outlet through cir-
cuit breaker K-1301. This circuit breaker has a ther-
mal overload element R-1301 which opens the circuit
breaker in case of overloads. From the convenience
outlet, the a-c circuit is connected through the collector
ring assembly and switch S-1302 to two heater resistors
R-1303 and R-1304. The drive motor has separate
armature and field circuits. These circuits are brought
up through the collector ring assembly. Fig. 2-96
shows two windings in series with the armature. The
function of these windings is to produce a field, in
addition to the regular field, that improves the speed
regulation of the motor at slow speeds. The armature
circuit passes through a disconnect plug P-1301 and
J-1303. The purpose of this plug is to permit mainte-
nance personnel to disconnect the motor when servic-
ing the Antenna Pedestal. The excitation to the field
is continuous. The armature is excited with a d-c
output from the Servo Amplifier that appears only
when an error exists in the antenna positioning system.
The polarity of this voltage is reversible and its magni-
tude is also variable. Thus the direction and speed of
the motor is variable and is controlled by the servo
system. Switch S-1301 is a microswitch which is actu-
ated by a small depression in the circumference of the
bevel ring gear. The switch is mounted on the dome
and moves around the bevel gear when the dome is
rotating. This switch is so positioned that it sends an
impulse to the PPI Indicator each time the antenna
is trained directly over the bow of the ship.
21. SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The Synchro Amplifier, sometimes known as
the O.S.C. or "own ship's course" amplifier, comprises
the apparatus needed to isolate the true bearing syn-
chros of the SR equipment from the synchros of the
ship's master gyro-compass. The master gyro-compass
synchro generators must be isolated from the SR An-
: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-141
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
I) SECTION
I' Par. 21a(1)
NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
I
I 1I5VA-C
I COMPASS
IREFERENCE
I
I-SPEED COMPASS
REFERENCE
I
f36-SPEED
COMPASS I
REFERENCE
TRANS.
CB-26105
5-CT
5-CT
?
SHIP'S GYRO-COMPASS
TO COMP
II5V 60
A-C SINGLE PHASE
REFERENCE FOR
SYNCHRO SYSTEM
SYNCHRO UNIT
SERVO
MOTOR
AMP
L
RIGHT-HAND
SIDE OF
COMMUTATOR
TRANS.
LEFT-HAND
SIDE OF
COMMUTATOR
TRANS.
ELECTRONIC UNIT
17-36-SPEED
OUTPUT
SYNCHRO AMP
AND RELATION TO
GYRO-COMPASS
I-SPEED
OUTPUT
Figure 2-97. Relayed Compass Voltage Circuits, Simplified Diagram
tenna positioning circuits in order to prevent the
inaccuracies that would be introduced into the position
of the master synchros by a directly connected circuit.
When the Synchro Amplifier is used in conjunction
with the ship's gyro-compass system, the only load
upon the two synchro generators of the compass is the
power losses in the two synchro control transformers
and the input circuits in the Synchro Amplifier. The
Synchro Amplifier consists of two units. One of these,
the Synchro Unit contains the control transformers.
The other unit is an electronic amplifier. A schematic
diagram of the Synchro Amplifier and ship's gyro-
compass system is shown in Fig. 2-97. The synchro
generators of the ship's gyro-compass transmit voltages
to the control synchros of the Synchro Unit. A
voltage is generated in the rotors of the repeaters pro-
portional to their displacement from synchronism with
the rotors of their respective generators. This voltage
is fed into the Electronic Unit where it is amplified
sufficiently to control a servo motor which drives the
control synchros and a commutator transformer from
which reproductions of the original synchro voltages
are sent to the various Synchro Units. As shown in
Fig. 2-97, data is supplied to the Synchro Amplifier by
2-142
two synchro generators in the ship's gyro-compass. The
1-speed compass synchro produces one complete cycle
of voltage for each complete rotation of the compass.
The 36-speed compass synchro makes 36 complete volt-
age cycles for each complete rotation of the compass.
The two synchro generators are identical; their rota-
tional differences are accomplished by means of a gear
train. Because of the speed difference between the two
synchros, the 36-speed unit delivers the same voltage
output for 1/26 of one degree of compass rotation as the
1-speed unit delivers in a full degree of compass rota-
tion. It would be possible to operate the Synchro
Amplifier on only the 1-speed system. However, in
such a system a small displacement of the synchro gen-
erator would induce only a small voltage in the rotor
of the synchro generator. In the 36-speed system a
small displacement of the 1-speedy synchro generator
causes the 36-speed generator to turn through an angle
36 times as large. The one-speed and 36-speed voltages
are combined in the Electronic Unit of the Synchro
Amplifier to produce a torque in the servo motor
which changes the position of the brush assemblies on
the commutator transformer to correspond to the dis-
placed position of the synchro generator of the com-
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 000,046 SECTION 9
Par. 21a(1)
pass. The use of the 36-speed system therefore increases
the sensitivity of response of the Synchro Amplifier by
approximately a factor of 36. Since the output of the
36-speed system is zero at each 10 degrees compass
rotation, the 1-speed system must be added in order to
eliminate these false zero points.
b. SYNCHRO UNIT.
(1) The schematic diagram of the Synchro Unit
is shown in Fig. 2-97. As shown, the 1-speed and the
36-speed voltages from the synchro generators of the
gyro-compass are applied to corresponding 1-speed and
36-speed 5CT control transformers. When the rotors
of the control synchros in the Synchro Amplifier are
zeroed with the rotors of the synchro generators of
the compass, no voltage is induced in the rotor of
either the 1-speed 5CT or the 36-speed 5CT, the system
is in equilibrium and the amplifier output to the servo
motor is zero. When the compass rotates in such a
way as to create an instantaneous 10 displacement be-
tween the rotors of the generator synchros and the
control synchros, an output voltage appears across
their rotors. A 5CT synchro has approximately one
volt induced in its rotor for each degree of displace-
ment between its rotor and that of its corresponding
generator, for small displacement angles. The dis-
placement of one degree causes a potential of one volt
to be induced in the rotor of the 1-speed unit and a
potential of 36-volts to be induced in that of the 36-
speed unit. The total of 37 volts is amplified by the
Electronic Unit and the output obtained is used to
drive the servo motor of the Synchro Unit. The servo
motor is geared to the 5CT control synchros, and turns
them in a direction that eliminates the angular dis-
placement between their rotors and the rotors of the
synchro generators of the compass. When the rotor
of a 5CT control transformer is zeroed with the gen-
erator supplying it, there is no voltage induced in the
rotor. If the rotor is turned from the zero-voltage
point, the polarity of the induced voltage will either
be the same as the compass reference voltage which
induces it, or opposite in polarity, depending upon the
direction in which the rotor is turned. This property
of the synchro is used in conjunction with the Elec-
tronic Unit to cause the servo motor to turn in the
correct direction to eliminate the displacement error
in its rotor.
(2) If the rotor of a 5CT control transformer is
in angular correspondence with the rotor of its gen-
erator, its output, as has been mentioned, is zero. If
the rotor be turned mechanically through an angle of
180 degrees, without changing the position of the
rotor of the generator supplying it, the output of the
control transformer rotor would again be zero. It
appears therefore, that the system will be in equili-
brium for each 180 degrees of rotation. This is
undesirable because if the indicating components are
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21
to read correctly, there can be only one zero point in
360 degrees of rotation. The combination of the one-
speed and 36-speed voltages in the electronic amplifier
is accomplished in such a way as to eliminate this
undesirable feature.
(3) The servo motor, as was previously men-
tioned, is geared to the 5CT control synchros, and
turns them in such a way as to bring their rotors into
alignment with the rotors of the synchro generators
in the compass. The servo motor is also geared to a
commutator transformer, the rotor of which is also
positioned in accordance with the position of the rotor
of the synchro generator. It is this commutator trans-
former which supplies the 1-speed and 36-speed volt-
ages which are replicas of those fed into the Synchro
Amplifier by the compass, and which are used through-
out the SR system. The commutator transmitter con-
sists of a coil of flat copper ribbon wound edgewise on
a laminated core which has two fiat parallel faces.
Part of the insulation of the winding is removed, on
each of the windings, in such a manner as to form a
circular concentric track on each of the flat surfaces.
A brush arrangement is mounted on the common cen-
ter to operate against each face. Each brush assembly
is made up of three brushes which are electrically insu-
lated from each other and set 120 geometrical degrees
apart. An a-c voltage of 115 volts, single phase, 60
cycles, is connected to the coil of the transformer. The
brush assemblies are connected by means of a gear
train so that the ratio of the speed of rotation of the
two brush assemblies is 36:1. Referring to Fig. 2-97,
the 1-speed brush assembly is designated by contact
points D, E, and F, while the 36-speed assembly is
designated by the contact points A, B, and C. Con-
sidering either of the assemblies, a 360? rotation will
cause the magnitude of the a-c voltage between any
two of the contact points to vary sinusoidally through
a complete cycle. This is precisely what occurs be-
tween any two of the output leads of a synchro gen-
erator, and it is evident that the 1-speed and the 36-
speed compass voltages are faithfully reproduced or
relayed by this arrangement. The reference voltage
which is used in the positioning system of the SR
equipment is applied to the coil of the commutator
transformer, and the positioning voltages are the
1-speed and the 36-speed outputs of the commutator
transformer. The compass reference and positioning
voltages are therefore used only to position the com-
ponents of the Synchro Amplifier, resulting in a load
upon the compass synchros which is well beneath their
rating. The commutator transformer and connections
are sufficiently heavy to carry the entire synchro load
of the SR equipment with a wide margin of safety.
c. ELECTRONIC AMPLIFIER.
(1) The function of the Electronic Unit is to
accept the 1-speed and the 36-speed signals from the
: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-143
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
9 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
A" Par. 21c(1)
10K
1/2 W
8
7
6
5
1.0 MEG
1/2 W
0.02 UF
600-r- 0.02 UF
V I 600V
V-I03
6SK 7
0.1 MF
600V
V-I04
6F6
0.11.1EL 75K
600V
10 KP
I W
V-
102
6H6
LU
0.IMF
600V
0
0
V-I05
6L6-G
e- 250
c> 4 W
c>
F
30K 8W
V-164I06
6L6-G
2
MF
60
0.5
MF
600
V
250 1/2W?'
1-o 4 .
a. (t
Lu 0
0o
3
2
V-I01
3.5 K
2W
5U4-6
e
?
A*.111P. x TO
HEATERS
co
X
4 MF
-L4 MF ut00 4 MF
1
-600V -- 4 mi- V ?
600V 4 MF v 600V
6,90 4 MF
4 MF
600 V
600 V
Figure 2-98. Servo Amplifier in Synchro Amplifier, Simplified Diagram
synchro generators of the compass, mix them properly,
amplify the result and from them supply a voltage to
the servo motor of the Synchro Unit. This voltage
must be of correct magnitude and polarity to drive the
servo motor in the proper direction to eliminate the
positional error between the rotor of the synchro gen-
erator in the compass and that of the 5CT control
transformer in the Synchro Unit. The schematic dia-
gram of the Electronic Unit is shown in Fig. 2-98.
The Electronic Unit, with the exception of its input
circuit, is a conventional two-stage audio amplifier
followed by a push-pull power amplifier stage. The
input circuit will be considered in detail, since it is
this circuit which combines the 1-speed and 36-speed
input voltages, and which provides the anti-hunt fea-
tures of the Synchro Amplifier.
(2) The simplified equivalent input circuit is
'shown in Fig. 2-99. It contains all components of the
input and anti-hunt circuits which drive the 6SK7
tube V-103, which is the input stage of the conven-
tional amplifier. The 1-speed and the 36-speed input
voltages are represented by el and e2 respectively, in
2-144
series with the internal impedance of the synchro,
The two sections of the 6H6 rectifier tube V-102, are
represented as T1 and T2. For the purpose of analysis
of the 1-speed and 36-speed mixing circuit, the im-
pedance presented to it by the anti-hunt and amplifier
input circuit is represented by Zo. It is the voltage eo,
developed across the input impedance Zo, which deter-
mines the relative effect of the 1-speed and 36-speed
voltages on the positioning output of the Synchro
Amplifier.
(3) The way in which the input circuit accepts
the input synchro voltages depends upon whether the
instantaneous polarity of these input voltages is nega-
tive or positive with respect to the side of the input
which is common to both synchros. The effective cir-
cuits for voltages of either polarity, either 1-speed or
36-speed, are shown in Figs. 2-100 and 2-101. Con-
sider first the impedance presented to the 1-speed volt-
age referring to Fig. 2-100. When its polarity is
positive with respect to the common junction of the
synchros, T1 conducts, and presents a low resistance,
so that the synchro voltage el is applied directly to Zo.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
NAVSHIPS 900,946
SECTION 2
SYNCHRO
IMPEDANCE
36 X
SYNCHRO
Ix
SYNHRO
SYNCHRO
IMPEDANCE
02
Z g
15 K
T2
6H6
250
250
lox I MEG
0.02
MF
0.1 MF
75 K
0.02
MF
Z0= IMPEDANCE PRESENTED
BY AMPLIFIER INPUT
AND ANTI-HUNT CIRCUIT
30 K
???"SAA/V-0' B
AMPLIFIER
GRID
150 K
Figure 2499. Equivalent Input Circuit of Synchro Amplifier
SYNCHRO
IMPED -
ANCE
Ix
SYNCHRO
36X
SYNCHRO
SYNCHRO
IMPED -
AWE
A
SYNCHRO
IMPED -
ANCE
IX
SYNCHRO
36X
SYNCHRO
SYNCHRO
IMPED -
ANCE
A
Figure 2-100. Equivalent Circuit for Positive One- Figure 2-101. Equivalent Circuit for Negative
Speed or 36-Speed Voltages
ORIGINAL
36-Speed or One-Speed Voltages
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-145
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
ra SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
L Par. 21c(3)
STABLE ZERO
VOLTAGE POINTSI
(4) ?0,-
Ix VOLTAGE
r-
AMPLITUDE 90 VOLTS
OUTPUT TO AMPLIFIER
a
UNSTABLE ZERO
A.-VOLTAGE POINT
...__UNSTABLE ZERO
VOLTAGE POINT
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
OF I x SYNCHRO IN DEGREES
2-102A
DISPLACEMENT
OF ZERO POINT
STABLE ZERO
OPERATING POINT---9.1
I UNSTABLE ZERO
l'A-VOLTAGE POINT
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF I x SYNCHRO IN DEGREES
2-1028
-4? (2)
Figure 2-102. Voltage Relationships in Input Circuit of Synchro Amplifier
A diode passes an appreciable plate current even with
no voltage applied to the plate, because of what is
known as the Edison effect. This means the potential
of the plate with respect to the cathode must be made
a specific negative value in order to cut the tube off.
Referring to Fig. 2-100, it may be seen that until el at
the plate of T2 becomes sufficiently negative to over-
come the Edison effect in T2, this diode will also con-
duct. This makes no appreciable difference in the out-
put, however, since the ,resistance presented by T1 is
very low, and a conducting T2 only shunts another
low impedance in parallel with T1. When the polarity
of el is negative as shown in Fig. 2-101, the plate of
T, is positive and it conducts, presenting a low resis-
tance to the passage of current, so that el is again
applied directly to Zo. Until el reaches a value suffi-
ciently negatiye to overcome the Edison effect, T1 will
also conduct, but as has been mentioned in the case
of positive values of el, this does not appreciably affect
the appearance of el across Zo. It must be remembered
that el and e2 are 60 cycle voltages whose amplitude
is determined by the angle of rotation of the shaft of
the synchro, and whose polarity with respect to the
reference voltage which induces them depends upon
the direction in which the synchro was rotated from
the point of zero voltage. Therefore, since either
polarity of the 60 cycle el is applied to Zo with no
appreciable decrease in amplitude, it follows that el
is reproduced with no attenuation.
2-146
(4) The 36-speed voltage is not reproduced at Zo
in the same manner as el. When e2 is positive with
respect to the common junction of the synchros,
conducts and presents a low resistance to the current
flowing in the circuit of e2, as shown in Fig. 2-100.
Since the only portion of e, which can be applied to
Zo is that developed across the low resistance of the
conducting T1, practically none of e, appears in the
output under this condition. If it were not for the
bias applied to T1, this situation would hold at all
times, and e2 would have no effect on the operation
of the circuit. This bias is obtained from the circuit
from B+ through the synchro units to ground. The
connection of the cathode of T1 to this circuit places
it at a potential approximately equal to the drop across
the 250-ohm resistor that is in series with ground, the
30 K resistor, and B+. However, because of the bias,
T1 does not begin conducting until the value of e2 has
reached a definite positive value. T1 does not, there-
fore, begin to conduct until the potential of e2 reaches
approximately two volts positive. On the negative
portions of the e2 cycle, as shown in Fig. 2-101, T1 is
non-conducting, but T, conducts to effectively short-
circuit the output of e2 as far as the negative portion
of this voltage applied to Zo is concerned. The effect
of eliminating the negative half of the 60 cycle e,
wave is to reduce its rms value. However, this action
has no material effect upon the operation of the
circuit.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
75
0
74 -gig
8-806 BLOWER MOTOR
' 00013
4: TO
1 2 4
1-802
-- C-807
5 MFD
ORIGINAL
3
5
8
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
50
(DIFF. SYNCHRO)
TRUE Ix
1-805
DIAL
1-804
RELATIVE
1-803
LOW VOLTAGE
CONTROL
I x TRUE ANTENNA BEARING
" (eBblx) 36 x TRUE ANTENNA BEARING
(cE11,36x)
IN IN
poffosimiAlw.......s., OmlaS. ?
57 se 59 62- ? 61 60
A
C- 802
3X10 MFD
B-805
3
5F
(SYNCHRO)
Ix
'NS2
13-804
151 152 153
Ix RELAYED O.S.C.
(yC 01 x)
LV
NV
LV
3
R2
9
"1 97
1???????%,"
RELAYED 0.5.0. PRIMARY
(y Con)
53
36x64
ERROR SIGNAL
(i36x)
OUT
00
SECTIONS VIEWED FROM
REAR OF SWITCH
ROTOR SHOWN IN 3RD
DETENT POSITION(OFF)
00
HV
C-801
.5MFD
At
115 V.A.0
S-804
SLEW1NG
MOTOR
F2
SECTION 2
NORMAL
NORMAL le,./4.43 7 3
EMERGENCY
SWITCH 0 IR. 72
Figure 2-103. Bearing indicator, Schematic Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
EMERGENCY
2-147
2-148
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THECA' OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS
(5) Before the potential of e2 reaches the two-
volt value necessary for the limiting action of the diode
to take effect, the 36-speed voltage is applied in series
with the 1-speed voltage across Zo. The voltage wave
applied to the amplifier input circuit Zo is therefore
the sum of the 1-speed and the 36-speed voltages. This
output voltage is shown in Fig. 2-102. In Fig. 2-102
the horizontal distance represents degrees of rotation
of the 1-speed system. The vertical distance represents
the rms amplitude of a 60-cps voltage. Both the one-
speed and 36-speed amplitudes are plotted on the ver-
tical distance. The positive vertical distance repre-
sents a 60-cps voltage that has the same polarity as the
reference voltage that produced it. The negative ver-
tical distance represents a 60-cps voltage with a polar-
ity opposite to the reference voltage. As shown in
Fig. 2-100, the polarity of the induced voltage reverses
for each 180 degrees of rotation of the synchro unit
producing it. The polarity with respect to a zero
voltage point depends upon whether the synchro ro-
tates in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction from
the zero point. The voltage waveform in Fig. 2-102
is the voltage obtained at the input terminals of the
bridged-T filter in the input circuit of V-103 in Fig.
2-97 when the one-speed synchro rotates 360 degrees
and the 36-speed synchro generator rotates through 36
times 360 degrees. This voltage is applied through the
amplifiers to one of the windings in a two-phase servo
motor. The other phase for this motor is obtained
from the reference voltage circuit through a phase-
shifting capacitor. The motor turns in one direction
when the voltage shown in Fig. 2-102 is in phase with
the reference voltage and turns in the opposite direc-
tion when the voltage in Fig. 2-102 is out of phase
with the reference voltage.
(6) Consider the zero voltage position of the
rotor, designated by the 180? angle of rotation in Fig.
2-102, as the point of equilibrium of the system. When
the amplifier output is in phase with the reference
voltage, the motor rotates the rotors of the synchro
control transformers in a direction that reduces their
output to zero. The direction of motor rotation is
represented by arrow (1) in Fig. 2-102. If the com-
pass synchro moved in the opposite direction, the
voltage output of the amplifier would reverse its phase
and the motor would turn in the opposite direction as
represented by arrow (2) of Fig. 2-102. These direc-
tions of rotation are such as to reduce the output of
the rotor to zero. When this occurs, the motor no
longer turns and the system is in equilibrium.
(7) The system operates satisfactorily at the 180
degree point, but it is apparent from Fig. 2-102 that
the same polarities of voltage exist at the zero degree
point so that the system will also be in equilibrium
at this point. In order to operate satisfactorily, the
system can be in equilibrium, or "lock in" at only one
point. Otherwise the calibrations of the indicator
ORIGINAL
900,946 SECTION
Par. 2105) 2
dials would be meaningless. In order to correct this
difficulty, suppose the connections to the motor be
reversed, so that the direction of rotation is as shown
by arrows (3) and (4) on Curve A of Fig. 2-102. The
system will now be unstable at both the zero point
and the 180? point, but will be in equilibrium at
points (a) and (b), since the direction of rotation of
the motor at small displacement angles from these
points will be such as to cause the rotor to return to
the zero output position. Zero voltage points ( a) and
(b) occur because at these points the 36-speed voltage
is equal and of opposite polarity to the 1-speed voltage,
causing a cancellation. The system remains unsatis-
factory, however, since the curve of total output voltage
has two stable points of zero output. If the axis of
the 1-speed voltage could be displaced with respect
to the zero voltage axis, the curve of total voltage
would be raised with respect to the zero axis, and one
of the zero points would be eliminated. This is ac-
complished by transformer CB-26105 shown in Fig.
2-97. By means of this transformer a constant a-c
voltage of approximately two volts peak is added in
series with the 1-speed voltage. This voltage is de-
rived from the reference voltage and therefore is in
phase with it regardless of the rotation of the synchro
control transformers. The resulting output voltage
curve is shown as Curve B in Fig. 2-102. It has only
one stable zero voltage point, which is the condition
required for satisfactory operation. This voltage is
applied to the servo motor, and permits the system to
lock in at only one point, so that the position of the
synchro control transformers with respect to the gen-
erator synchros in the gyro-compass is always the same.
(8) The anti-hunt circuit incorporated into the
Electronic Unit is that portion of the circuit between
the points "A-B" and the amplifier grid of Fig. 2-99.
The function of this circuit is to cause the rotors of
the synchros to stop when the voltage to the servo
motor is zero, and not to overshoot this point because
of their mechanical inertia. This overshooting is re-
ferred to as "hunting." The anti-hunt circuit is of
the same type as used in the servo system of the PPI
Unit, and has been described in conjunction with that
unit in Par. 17j.
22. BEARING INDICATOR.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The Bearing Indicator is located for conveni-
ence in the Indicator Console. It has two primary
functions. One is to display the bearing of the antenna
and the other is to provide an artificial error voltage
to permit the antenna to be rotated continuously or
to permit the antenna to be trained on a particular
target. In the original SR Equipments, the voltage for
continuous rotation was normally supplied by a small
d-c slewing motor which rotated a synchro generator
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2149
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
SECTION
I' Par. 22a(1)
NAVSHIPS 900,946
THEORY OF OPERATION
36-SPEED OUTPUT VOLTAGE
3 WIRE
I - SPEED
VOLTAGE
I 1
TRUE-RELATIVE SWITCH
(SHOWN IN TRUE POS.)
RELAYED
COMPASS
VOLTAGE
115 V. 60 1.
1$ REFER.
VOLTAGE
INPUT
COMMUTATOR
TRANSFORMER
IN
SYNCHRO
AMPLIFIER
T-1102
(ROTATION
CONTROL
UNIT)
78 V.
6DG
DIFFERENTIAL
GENERATOR
IN ANTENNA
PEDESTAL
ROTATES
36 X ANTENNA
SPEED
5CT HAND SLEW
CONTROL IN
BEARING
INDICATOR
ANTENNA POSITIONING SYSTEM
SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC OF
POSITIONING CIRCUITS.
ANTENNA
?
SERVO
AMPLIFIER
rinsui
SERVO
GENERATOR
ANTENNA
DRIVE
MOTOR
?J
Figure 2-104. Bearing Indicator Antenna Positioning Circuits
that delivered an output voltage to the Servo Ampli-
fier. For emergency operation a d-c rectifier in the
Rotation Control Unit was used to continuously rotate
the antenna. For manually positioning the antenna, a
small handwheel is used to drive the synchro generator
that excites the Servo Amplifier.
(2) Experience has shown that combat conditions
require continuous rotation of the antenna practically
all the time. In order to relieve the servo system of
the burden of continuous operation, Navy Field
Change No. 28 changed the circuits so that for con-
tinuous operation, power for the antenna drive motor
is normally obtained from the rectifier in the Rotation
Control Unit. The servo system is used continuously
only in case of emergencies. Manual operation is still
controlled by the servo system.
b. ANTENNA POSITIONING CIRCUITS.
'( 1 ) The Bearing Indicator consists of a power
supply, a 5D differential synchro unit, a 5F synchro
motor, a 5CT synchro generator, and a d-c drive motor
for the 5CT. The complete circuit is shown in Fig.
2-103. The output of the 5CT synchro B-803 is coupled
to the input circuit of the Servo Amplifier in the Rota-
2-150
tion Control Unit. The stator voltages for B-803 are
taken from the rotor of 36-speed differential synchro
in the Antenna Pedestal as shown in Fig. 2-104. The
position of the rotor of B-803 is determined by the
handwheel or by the rotation of the slewing motor
B-801 shown in Fig. 2-103. The slewing motor may
be operated at two speeds and its direction of rotation
is reversible. The speed and direction of rotation are
selected by switch S-801, which is the SLEWING
MOTOR switch on the front panel of the unit. The
switch has five positions. The center position is the
off position, while the two right-hand positions cause
the antenna to slew in a clockwise direction at either
11/4 or 5 rpm. The two left-hand positions cause the
antenna to slew in a counterclockwise direction at the
same rates.
(2) The rectifier circuit is connected so as to
have two output voltages. One is higher than the
other. The switch applies high voltage to the field
and low voltage to the armature for one speed, and low
voltage to the field and high voltage to the armature
for another. The polarity of one voltage is reversed
to reverse the motor. The primary of transformer
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
ANTENNA'
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341k000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION
Par. 22b(2) 2
I- SPEED OUTPUT VOLTAGE TRUE-RELATIVE SWITCH
(SHOWN IN TRUE POS.)
3 WIRE
36-SPEED
VOLTAGE
I 1
RELAYED
COMPASS
VOLTAGE
115 V. 60 1...
HP REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
INPUT
COMMUTATOR
TRANSFORMER
IN
SYNCHRO
AMPLIFIER
T-I 102
(ROTATION
CONTROL
UNIT)
ANTENNA POSITIONING SYSTEM
SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC OF
INDICATOR CIRCUITS.
78 V
6DG
DIFFERENTIAL
GENERATOR
IN ANTENNA
PEDESTAL
ROTATES
X ANTENNA
SPEED
C:0
/7J>-
5F /
//nrtrifr
TRUE
BEARING
DIAL IN
BEARING
INDICATOR
RELATIVE
BEARING
DIAL IN
BEARING
INDICATOR
5D /
Figure 2-105. Bearing Indicator, Antenna Bearing Repeater Circuits
T-801 is fused by fuses F-801 and F-802. Indicator
lights are connected across these fuses to indicate when
a fuse blows. The blower motor is connected across
the a-c line. This motor is mounted so that its air
stream is directed upward to the bottom of the Range
Scope chassis in the right-hand cabinet. The output
from transformer T-801 is obtained from variable taps
and is rectified by the dry disc rectifiers CR-801 and
CR-802. Low slewing motor speeds are obtained by
connecting the low voltage output of CR-802 to the
armature of B-801 and the high voltage output of
CR-801 to its field. This is done by means of switch
S-801. The 5-rpm speed is obtained by connecting
CR-802 to the field and CR-801 to the armature.
(3) Two bearing indicator lamps are provided in
the unit. One of these lamps is illuminated when the
set is on true bearing, and the other when it is on
relative bearing to indicate to the operator which
bearing system is in use. There is also a pilot light
behind both dials which lights up when true bearing
is in use. This light is extinguished when the set is
on relative bearing. At that time, the true bearing
dial does not indicate true bearing due to the fact that
ORIGINAL
compass voltages are not supplied to the 6DG in the
Antenna Pedestal. Instead, a fixed reference voltage
is used as shown in Fig. 2-104.
c. BEARING REPEATER CIRCUITS.
(1) The bearing repeater circuits consist of the
5F synchro motor B-804 and the 5D synchro differen-
tial motor B-805. A simplified diagram of these cir-
cuits is shown in Fig. 2-105. In true bearing operation
the TRUE-REL switch on the Rotation Control Unit
connects the relayed compass voltage to the stator
windings of the one-speed 6DG in the Antenna Pedes-
tal. The output of the 6DG rotor is proportional to
the true bearing of the antenna and is connected to the
stator windings of the 5D and 5F synchro motors in
the Bearing Indicator. The single winding rotor of
the 5F synchro B-804 is connected to the reference
voltage and the dial on the shaft of this unit indicates
true bearing. The three-winding rotor of B-805 is
connected to the relayed compass voltage and the com-
pass component present in the stator of the 5D is
subtracted out leaving the relative component which
is displayed on the dial. The shaft of the 5D always
rotates through an angle proportional to the angle
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-151
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21
SECTION
L Par. 22c(1)
NAVSHIPS
between the heading of the ship and the direction of
the antenna.
(2) In relative bearing operation a fixed 78-volt
reference voltage is connected through the switch to
the stator of the 6DG and the rotor of the 5D. A 115-
volt potential from the same source is connected to
the rotor of the 5F synchro. These voltages are ob-
tained from transformer T-1102 in the Rotation Con-
trol Unit. With this type of connection, both dials
indicate relative bearing. See Fig. 2-105.
23. ROTATION CONTROL UNIT.
a. GENERAL.
( 1) The Rotation Control Unit is the principal
component in the antenna positioning system. It sup-
plies voltage to the antenna drive motor for both types
of operation described in this paragraph. The Ro-
tation Control Unit consists of a case containing the
Servo Amplifier and the Rectifier Power Unit. The
top of the Rotation Control Unit case contains the
terminal boards to which the external connections of
the Servo Amplifier and the Rectifier Power Unit are
connected. It also contains two switches. One of the
switches is the SYNCHRO SYSTEM switch. In its
O.S.C. position, the equipment operates on true bear-
ing. In the A-C position, the equipment operates on
relative bearing. The other switch is the REMOTE
INDICATORS switch. In its ON position, antenna
positioning data is supplied to the Indicator Console
and to any other remote indicators connected to the
SR system.
b. SERVO AMPLIFIER.
(1) The function of the Servo Amplifier is to
amplify any error voltage that may appear in the sys-
tem and apply a d-c voltage to the exciter of the Servo
Generator to enable it to deliver an output to the
antenna drive motor. The polarity of this voltage is
such as to rotate the drive motor in a direction to
reduce the error. The circuits of the Servo Amplifier
are shown in Fig. 2-106.
NOTE
THESE CIRCUITS ARE MODIFIED BY
NAVY FIELD CHANGE No. 31-SR WHICH
ADDS ANTI-HUNT NETWORKS IN THE
GRID CIRCUITS OF V-1101.
V-1101 is a type 6SL7-GT and it functions as an
amplifier for the error voltage obtained from the out-
put of the 5CT synchro generator in the Bearing Indi-
cator and a bias rectifier for V-1102 and V-1103.
V-1102 and V-1103 are type 807 tubes and they func-
tion as rectifiers to produce a d-c voltage across the
field of the exciter in the Servo Generator. The a-c
voltage that is rectified for the excitation voltage is
obtained from transformer T-1101.
(2) The operation of the Servo Amplifier is
rather complex because all voltages applied to the tube
2-152
: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
elements are a-c voltages and because the circuit is not
grounded at any point and therefore there is no
natural reference point. In order to properly visualize
the functions of the circuit, it is necessary to arbitrarily
select a reference point to which all voltages can be
measured. This point may be taken at any point in
the circuit. In this discussion the reference point iF
terminal 5 of transformer T-1101 unless stated other-
wise. Fig. 2-106 shows wave forms such as would
appear on an oscilloscope synchronized so that the
beginning of the sweep is on the peak of the cycle.
The total output of the transformer is 300 volts at a
frequency of 60 cps. This voltage is applied across a
series circuit consisting of the exciter field in the servo
generator, the RC circuits in the plate circuits of
V-1102 and V-1103, the tubes themselves, and the
balancing potentiometer R-1112. Transformer T-1101
is tapped at a 35-volt point with respect to terminal 3
and the voltage from this point is applied to the plates
of V-1101 through plate loads consisting of parallel
RC circuits.
(3) When the system is in a state of equilibrium,
there is no output from the 5CT synchro generator in
the Bearing Indicator. Since the 5CT is connected to
transformer T-1103, there is no output from the secon-
dary winding of this transformer to be applied to the
grids of V-1101. The cathodes of V-1101 are connected
together and returned to terminal 3 of transformer
T-1101 through resistor R-1116. This arrangement
provides coupling between the two sections, degenera-
tion for each section and a certain amount of cathode
bias. From Fig. 2-106 it can be seen that the plates
of V-1102 and V-1103 are alternately positive and
negative with respect to their cathodes. Therefore
V-1102 and V-1103 act as grid controlled half-wave
rectifiers, each tube drawing current through one-half
of the exciter field in the Servo Generator. Note that
the currents in the exciter field flow in opposite direc-
tions and the magnetic fields produced by them cancel
each other when the amplitudes of the currents are
equal. The grids of V-1102 and V-1103 are connected
to terminal 4 on transformer T-1101 through the paral-
lel RC combinations in the plate circuits of V-1101A
and V-1101B as shown in Fig. 2-106.
(4) Assume that no error exists in the system and
that the plates of V-1102 and V-1103 are passing
through zero potential and beginning their positive
excursion. At this instant, the plates of V-1101 are
starting their negative excursion. As time continues,
the grids and plates of V-1102 and V-1103 have a posi-
tive going sinusoidal voltage applied to them and plate
current flows in both tubes. Since equal voltages are
applied to both tubes, there is a tendency for the plate
currents to equal each other. As the potential applied
to the grids increases, they draw more and more cur-
rent. The grid ctirrent charges capacitors C-1103 and
C-1104 to provide a negative bias. The time required
for the bias to build up is determined by the grid-
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21
ORIGINAL
: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 2
PLATES
POSITIVE
tukin
(I) ztt
).4.1
(r) tai
0 11-1L5
LuCtO
tr)
FIELD OF SERVO GENERATOR
67 66 65
.1-61P-?-1-63D-?
R-1114
10K
2
R-1110
22K
C-1106
1 MFD
C-1105
1 MFD
R-1119r1I? I
100 100
R-1120
5
V-II02 V-1103
-307 807
?\ R-1112
200
2W
T-I101
C-1107
1.0 MF
R-1122
10K
NPI
C-1103
.1 MFD
101<
C-1104
.1 MFD
F?-1I08
51K R-1109
51 K
V-1101
6SL7GT
R-1123
1K
R-1124
10K
C-1102
10.0 MF
0.1..0?111?MMIr
R-I116
1K
R-1105
120 K
R-1118
10 K
R-1106
1K
? 1 I
I I I
OUTPUT OF 5GT IN
BEARING INDICATOR
22 K
NE
T-II03
Figure 2-106. Servo Amplifier, Simplified Diagram
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-153
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
Par. 23b(4)
cathode resistance of the tubes and by the series resis-
tors in the grid circuit and the parallel resistors asso-
ciated with capacitors C-1103 and C-1104. For ex-
ample, R-1110 delays the bias sufficiently to allow the
average value of plate current in V-1102 to equal the
maximum value of current required to energize the
exciter field. R-1108 which shunts C-1103 determines
the amount of bias applied to the grid of V-1102.
R-1108 therefore functions as a grid leak resistor. for
V-1102.
(5) During the time when V-1102 and V-1103
are conducting, their plate current, flowing through
the exciter field, lags the applied voltage because the
current through the secondary winding of transformer
T-1101 cannot be in phase with the voltage across the
transformer. The capacitors shunting the capacitor
field reduce this phase angle to approximately 45
degrees during the period of conduction. The voltage
on the grids of V-1102 and V-1103 lags the trans-
former voltage by approximately 42 degrees. When
the voltage on the plates of V-1102 and V-1103 is
going from zero through 300 volts and back to zero,
the voltage on the grids of the tubes is leading it 3
degrees and is going through zero to ?34 volts and
back to zero. This ?34 volts is the sum of the ?299
volt rectified charge on capacitor C-1103 and the
-?265-volt rise across the transformer which is applied
to the grid. Under this condition, the d-c value of
the current flowing in each half of the exciter field is
approximately 30 ma. V-1101 has no effect upon the
grid bias of V-1102 and V-1103 as long as there is no
error in the system. The cathode bias developed by
the minute amount of plate current flowing in V-1101
reaches an rms value of approximately 0.4 volt which
biases both sections of the tube near cut-off. The
voltage across V-1101 is in phase opposition to the
voltage across V-1102 and V-1103. Consequently
V-1101 is non-conducting because its plates are nega-
tive with respect to its cathode when V-1102 and
V-1103 are conducting. When the plates of V-1102
and V-1103 are negative with respect to their cathodes,
the plates of V-1101 are positive with respect to their
cathodes but the tube cannot conduct because its grids
are biased at cut-off.
(6) The conditions described above exist during
each positive excursion of the voltage across trans-
former T-1101. During the time when this voltage
is going negative, the rectified voltage on capacitors
C-1103 and C-1104 discharges through their respective
parallel resistors and when the next positive excursion
starts the charge on the capacitors is zero.
(7) When the 5CT synchro unit in the Bearing
Indicator delivers an output voltage to transformer
T-1103, the grid bias conditions described above are
altered. The error voltage across the secondary wind-
ings of T-1103 will be exactly in phase with the output
from transformer T-1101 at grid 1 of V-1101A or else
2-154
it will be exactly out of phase in which case it would
be in phase at grid 4 of V-1101B. The polarity de-
pends upon the direction in which the rotor of the
5CT synchro has been rotated and the amplitude de-
pends upon the size of the displacement angle. Assum-
ing that the maximum displacement error in the system
is one-half of one degree, the amplitude of the 5CT
is 0.5 volt for maximum error. The output from each
secondary winding of T-1103 is 1 volt for an input of
0.5 volt. The step-up ratio is necessary because of the
necessity for the 120K ohm series limiting resistors
R-1104 and R-1105 in the grid circuits of V-1101.
These resistors are required to prevent the possibility
of overdriving V-1101 each time the equipment is
placed in operation when there is a possibility of
large errors existing in the antenna positions system.
(8) Consider the instant at which power is first
applied to the circuit and assume that-grid 1 of
V-1101A is excited with an error voltage that is in
phase opposition to the applied voltage on the plates
of V-1102 and V-1103. The excitation on grid 4 of
V-1 101B will be in phase with the applied voltage on
the plates of V-1102 and V-1103. Under this condition
the plate of V-1101A is negative with respect to its
grid and cathode when the plate of V-1102 is going
positive. The plate of V-1101B is also negative with
respect to its cathode but the grid of V-1101B is
swinging in a positive direction. Since the plates of
both sections of V-1101 are going negative, they can-
not conduct during the period when V-1102 and
V-1103 are conducting. During the first half of the
initial cycle, V-1102 and V-1103 conduct and rectify
a grid bias of approximately ?24 volts. While the
amplitude of the rectified bias reaches a point much
greater than ?24 volts, the short time constant of the
grid leak permits part of this bias voltage to be dis-
charged before the cycle ends. Also, the series resis-
tors delay the charging of the grid capacitor as previ-
ously explained. The end result is to permit the flow
of an average current that is equal to the current that
would flow if the applied plate voltage were a d-c
voltage and the bias a d-c potential of ?24 volts.
The conditions just described permit V-1102 and
V-1103 to both draw 28 to 30 ma through their por-
tions of the exciter field during the first half of the
initial cycle. Since the field currents are equal and
in opposite directions, the flux intensity is zero and the
output of the exciter is zero. In order to allow for
differences in tube characteristics, resistor values and
capacitor values, the balancing potentiometer R-1112
is placed in the cathode circuits of V-1102 and V-1103
as shown in Fig. 2-106. By means of this control, the
bias of the two tubes can be adjusted until their plate
currents are equal.
(9) After the passage of the first half of the
initial cycle, the plates of V-1102 and V-1103 swing
negative and the tubes are cut off. At the same time
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
? NAVSHIPS 900,946
the plates of V-1101 swing i1 a positive direction.
The grid of V-1101A which is excited in phase opposi-
tion to the plates of V-1102 and V-1103 is also swing-
ing in a positive direction. Therefore, V-1101A con-
ducts. The grid of V-1101B is going negative how-
ever, and this section remains cut off. V-1101A is
permitted to conduct because the short time constant
in its plate circuit discharges capacitor C-1103 before
the plate of V-1101A reaches the peak of its positive
excursion. The current drawn by V-1101A places an
initial charge of approximately ?13 volts on capacitor
C-1103. Since the only resistance in series with capa-
citor C-1103 and the charging current is the plate
resistance of the tube this charging action is much
faster than the charging action due to grid current in
the opposite half of the cycle. It is evident that capa-
citor C-1103 cannot begin to discharge until the volt-
age applied to the plate of V-1101A has decreased to
a point where the charging voltage applied to the
capacitor is less than 13 volts. This point occurs at a
period in time where the negative swing of the trans-
former voltage is nearly completed and the voltage
will soon start its second positive excursion, there is
just sufficient time for the capacitor to discharge from
?13 volts to a potential of approximately ?8 volts
when the transformer voltage passes through zero and
starts its positive swing. During this time V-1101B
has remained in a non-conducting condition and capa-
citor C-1104 is completely discharged when the voltage
begins to swing positive.
(10) The positive half of the second cycle causes
the grid of V-1102 to begin to draw current as soon
as its potential passes zero and immediately a charging
voltage with the same polarity as the remaining charge
on capacitor C-1103 is applied to the capacitor. The
potential of the capacitor at this time has decreased to
approximately ?5 volts. It has been previously shown
that the flow of grid current produces a net grid volt-
age of ?24 volts which is the sum of the total capa-
citor charge and the applied voltage. Since the same
amount of grid current flows during each cycle, it is
evident that the total charge on the capacitor will be
raised from its previous value of ?299 volts to ?304
volts because it had a charge of ?5 volts when the
charging action started. With an average bias of ?29
volts, the plate current of V-1102 drops to approxi-
mately 15 ma. During this same time, however,
V-1103 has functioned in exactly the same way that it
functioned with no error voltage. It has rectified the
same bias and therefore is drawing an average current
of approximately 30 ma.
(11) The currents in the exciter field are now
unbalanced. The half of the field supplied by V-1102
has a potential of approximately 35 volts across it and
15 ma flowing in it. The other half of the field asso-
ciated with V-1103 has the normal voltage approxi-
ORIGINAL
SECTION
Par. 23b(9) 2
mately 70 volts across it and ft Current of 30 ma flowing
through it. Since the polarities of the voltages and
currents are opposing, a magnetic field exists that is
equivalent to the field that would be produced by
applying 35 volts in one direction across the entire
field winding. Under this condition, the exciter de-
livers a voltage to the field of the generator in the
Servo Generator and the Servo Generator delivers a
driving voltage to the d-c motor in the Antenna
Pedestal.
(12) If the phase of the error voltage is reversed,
the conditions described above are reversed and the
current through V-1103 is reduced to 15 ma. This
reverses the polarity of the output to the antenna drive
motor and it runs in the opposite direction. For inter-
mediate values of error voltage, the charge placed on
capacitor C-1103 or C-1104 is correspondingly less and
the reduction of the plate current of V-1102 and
V-1103 is also correspondingly less. Thus a small
displacement angle produces less torque at the antenna
drive motor than a large displacement angle produces.
However, when the displacement angle exceeds a criti-
cal size, the current drops almost abruptly to 15 ma.
and the motor torque is constant for all displacement
angles greater than the critical angle.
(13) When the equipment is turned off, large
errors can appear in the system due to an accidental
movement of the Antenna Pedestal, rotation of the
5CT in the Bearing Indicator or a change in ship's
course that produces a large error in the Synchro
Amplifier. It is possible under extreme conditions to
have an input error voltage of 55 volts to transformer
T-1103. In this case the output across each secondary
winding is 110 volts. This voltage exceeds the limita-
tions imposed by the resistors in the grid circuits of
V-1101 to the extent that the minute amount of plate
current required to produce the cathode bias in the
non-conducting section now flows to the grid instead
of the plate. This prevents the capacitor in the plate
circuit from receiving the small charge that it custo-
marily receives when the plates of V-1101 are swinging
positive. This charge is so small that ordinarily its
effect is negligible and it has been considered as zero
previously. However, the disappearance of this charge
raises the bias slightly and the gain of the type 807
tubes is sufficiently high to permit the slight change
in bias to cause the plate current to rise to 40 ma. In
the other 807 which has its current reduced by the
error voltage, the bias can increase to a point where
the plate current of the type 807 tube is reduced to
5 ma. This condition is a transient condition, how-
ever, since the system quickly returns to a state of
equilibrium.
(14) Anti-hunt control of the system between the
Servo Amplifier and the antenna drive motor is ob-
tained by connecting the armature of the drive motor
across the input terminals of the network shown in
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-155
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
9 SECTION
Ah Par. 23b(14)
NAVSHIPS 900,946
Fig. 2-106. If the system has a tendency to hunt, an
alternating voltage will be induced in the armature of
the antenna drive motor. This voltage appears across
the network and the component of this voltage that
appears across capacitor C-1101 is applied in series
with the error voltage across the two secondary wind-
ings of transformer T-1103. The phase of the feed-
back voltage is such as to always be in phase opposi-
tion to the error voltage applied to the grids of V-1101.
This form of degenerative feedback discourages any
tendency of the system to hunt. The amplitude of the
anti-hunt feedback is controlled by the adjustment of
potentiometer R-1118. The frequency response of the
anti-hunt network determines the actual amplitude of
feedback voltage applied to the input of V-1101. The
feedback voltage suffers a phase shift as it passes
through the anti-hunt network, the phase angle be-
tween voltage and current being a function of fre-
quency. Thus the feedback voltage may or may not
be exactly 180 degrees out of phase with the error
voltage at the grid of V-1101. The sum of the instan-
taneous voltages on the grid determines the effective
grid voltage. Once the balancing potentiometer has
been adjusted, the phase shifting characteristics of the
network act to always apply the proper amplitude of
anti-hunt voltage to V-1101.
(15) The Servo Amplifier chassis also contains
the power supply for the field of the antenna drive
motor. The field supply voltage is constant, only the
armature voltage is variable as a result of the action
of the Servo Amplifier just described. The field power
supply consists of transformer T-1105 and the full-
wave rectifier V-1104. V-1104 is a type 5U4G tube
and its rectified output is delivered directly to the field
of the antenna drive motor without passing through
a filter. The field of the motor supplies enough induc-
tance to remove any objectionable ripple voltage.
(16) Transformer T-1102 is shown in Fig. 2-107.
The put-iose of this transformer is to supply a 78-volt
refere _ce voltage to the various synchro units in the
antenna positioning system during relative bearing
operation. Power is applied to auto-transformer
T-1102 whenever relay K-1106A is in its closed contact
position. When relative data is being supplied, the
contacts of relay K-1105 are open and the compass
reference voltage from the synchro amplifier is not
applied to the primary of the transformer T-1101 in
the Servo Amplifier. It is this voltage that is rectified
and used to produce a field current in the exciter of
the Servo Generator, during servo operation. During
relative operation, relay K-1106 applies the a-c supply
voltage to the Servo Amplifier.
c. RECTIFIER POWER UNIT.
(1) The Rectifier Power Unit shown in Fig.
2-108 consists of two dry disc rectifiers which are
excited by separate windings on transformer T-1104.
2-156
THEORY OF OPERATION
In the original SR Equipments the Rectifier Power
Unit was normally de-energized. When the Rectifier
Power Unit is in use, relays K-1101 and K-1102 are in
their closed contact positions and power is supplied to
the armature and field of the antenna drive motor
from the outputs of the dry disc rectifiers. When the
equipment is controlled by the Servo Amplifier and
the Servo Generator relays K-1101 and K-1102 are in
their open contact positions and relays K-1103 and
K-1104 are in their closed contact positions. The latter
two relays apply a-c power to the a-c motor in the
Servo Generator, connect the output of V-1104 to the
field of the antenna drive motor and connect the out-
put from the Servo Generator to the armature of the
antenna drive motor. When the unmodified equip-
ment is in servo operation, the antenna speeds are two
and one-half rpm and five rpm in either direction.
When the unmodified equipment is operating from
the Rectifier Power Unit in emergency operation, the
antenna rotates in only one direction at a speed of 7
rpm. In equipments modified by Navy Field Change
No. 28, the normal method of operation is with the
Rectifier Power Unit. The circuits have been modified
to permit the antenna to be rotated at two speeds in
either direction. Servo operation is still retained, but
the Servo switch is normally in its OFF position.
(2) The two switches S-1105 and S-1104 are
located in the top of the Rotation Control cabinet.
They are operated from the front of the cabinet.
S-1105 is the Synchro System switch. When it is in
the O.S.C. position, relayed compass voltages are sup-
plied to the synchro system so that true bearing opera-
tion is obtained. When it is in the AC position, the
bearing indications secured are for relative bearing.
In relative bearing, the normal phase of the a-c line is
used as a reference voltage for the synchro units.
S-1104, is the REMOTE INDICATORS switch. In
its ON position, it connects one-speed, 36-speed and
reference voltages to the Indicator Console and any
remote indicators in use. In the OFF position, these
voltages are disconnected.
(3) K-1109 and K-1110 are overload relays for
protection of the antenna drive motor and Rectifier
Power Unit. The primaries of the two power trans-
formers are both protected by fuses. F-1101 protects
the primary of T-1101 while F-1103 protects the pri-
mary of the Rectox transformer T-1104. F-1102 serves
to protect the relative bearing transformer T-1102.
T-1102 is an autotransformee which provides the 78-
volt supply for the synchro system while it is operating
on relative bearing.
24. SERVO GENERATOR.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The purpose of the Servo Generator is to
accept the d-c output of the Servo Amplifier and am-
plify it to 250 volts which is used to drive the antenna
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
R 1105
120,000
RI121
10,000
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
INPUT
CONTROL
2
T 1103
C1107
1.0
RI122
10000
RI123
1000
TIE POINT RCU
47
RI124
1000
P1118
10,000 2W,
CI101
1.0
P1117
1000
P1107
1000
J1107
22,000
, 1R1104
1000
120p00
P1106
RI116
1000
11?111 MM.
GI104
V1101 6SL7
X1101
R1109 P1108
51,000 51.000 R1110
22,000
C1103
X1103
V1103
807
R 1112
200 2W
BALANCE
CONTROL
X1102
VII02
807
J1103
R1115
woo
R1120
100
RI119
100
1.0 1.0
CII05 01106
1111
R1114
10,000
J1102
ORIGINAL
10
II
76
TIE POINT
C1102
10.0
T
ANTI-HUNT
CONTROL
101
R 1101
F1101
3 /IMP
120,000
T1/05
X1104
VII04
5U4G
6
0 ?J1106
P1102
120,000
F 1102
K-I I05A
03 02 96
A
SECTION 2
TIE POINT
46 203
K-1I06
A
c11102
TI102
46 TIE POINT (RELATIVE)
97 OSG EXC/A-C
Figure 2-107. Servo Amplifier, Complete Schematic Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-157
2-158
THEORY OF OPERATION
TIE POINT
(SERVO AMPLIFIER)
76
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSH IPS 900,946 SECTION 2
B1101B
03 -I.?.
B-43-10
P1103
1/5 VAC
.12 MEG
FROM
MAINS
11103
FI103
rfcir;
02 Di.
ORIGINAL
TI104
3
).- Cc
-.I . . 0 Ct
Ei. Z 0 Z l?-? I? * Z
.4E Ec z 0 Cc ELI
0 0 iji. ti.
?i LL?z- 0 IA_ 14.1 Z 0 R
IA.1 0 I? 0 0 cc
0 Et Lu
EC Ll.
4. 0 (4
iiiMINIIIIMO1/461111119.211111111ON (.1=11?AMMIlinN
0 co cr$
co
co
a
K1107
CR1101
CRI 103
A
KI107A
D
0
0
K1108 A
K110IA
K1102A
K 1104 A
KII03A
10.72 EMERGENCY
73 NORMAL
0.10---41? 203 115 VAC
THROUGH
0-41- 102 INTERLOCK
S1101
48 TIE POINT
46 (SERVO AMPLIFIER)
Figure 2-108. Rectifier Power Unit, Complete Schematic Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-159
2-160
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 9
Par. 24a(1).
drive motor in the Antenna Pedestal. The Servo
Generator runs continuously during servo operation
but delivers an output only when the antenna is to be
rotated.
b. DESCRIPTION.
( 1 ) The Servo Generator is a cascade generator.
The output from the Servo Amplifier is applied to the
field of an exciter generator. The output taken from
the armature of the exciter is applied to the field of a
d-c generator and the output from the armature of
this generator is applied to the armature of the an-
tenna drive motor. The simplicity of the circuit makes
it unnecessary to include it here for purposes of ex-
planation. The circuits may be found in Section 7.
The exciter has a four-pole field. The exciter field
is center tapped as previously noted in the discussion
of the Servo Amplifier. The d-c generator field is
also a four-pole field. The a-c drive motor is operated
with 115 volts obtained from the main power circuits.
25. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (NXsr-30306).
a. GENERAL.
(1) The power supply circuits are shown in Fig.
2-109. The function of these circuits is to convert the
ship's d-c power into a-c power for the SR Equipment.
Two types of primary power equipment are available
for the SR Equipment on Contract NXsr-30306 and
are listed and described in Section 1. The principles
of operation are the same for both types. The differ-
ence between the two types is that one is designed to
convert 115 volts d-c to 115 volts a-c and the other is
designed to convert 230 volts d-c to 115 volts a-c.
Since the two types are very similar in principle, only
the 115 volt system will be completely described. The
discussion of the 230 volt system will be limited to
the magnetic controller.
b. MAGNETIC CONTROLLER CAY-211181.
(1) The 115-volt power supply system consists
of a Motor Generator set CAY-211182 and three con-
trol units. One of the control units is the Push Button
Station CAY-211186 which is used to start and stop
the system. Another control unit is the Magnetic
Controller CAY-211181 which actually applies starting
and running voltages to the d-c motor in the Motor
Generator. The third control unit is the Voltage
Regulator CAY-211185 which regulates the a-c output
of the a-c generator in the Motor Generator. The
following discussion refers to Fig. 2-109 and it is
suggested that the reader follow the circuits in this
figure closely, when reading the description of their
operation. Power from the ship's 115-volt d-c lines
is applied to input terminals L1 and L2 in the Magnetic
Controller. The circuit goes from terminal L1 to
thermal relay K-1446. The contacts of this relay are
normally closed. The circuit passes through the fuse
and contacts in this relay, and goes out on terminal 4
ORIGINAL
to the Motor Generator where it enters on terminal 4
and goes through the contacts of a centrifugally oper-
ated over-speed switch. The circuit then comes out
of the Motor Generator on terminal 3 and reenters the
Magnetic Controller on terminal 3. From here the
circuit passes out again to terminal 3 on the Push-
button Station, goes through the front contacts of the
STOP switch, which are normally closed, and then
connects to one of the back contacts of the START
switch and terminal 2. From terminal 2, the circuit
goes through terminal 2 in the Magnetic Controller
to one of the D contacts on relay K-1441. Since these
contacts are normally open in the de-energized posi-
tion of the relay, and since the back contacts of the
START switch are normally open, the circuit is incom-
plete at this point.
(2) When the START button is pressed, 115
volts d-c appear on terminal 1 in the Pushbutton
Station and go through terminal 1 in the Magnetic
Controller to contacts K-1442-D. These contacts are
normally closed when the relay is de-energized and the
circuit through them is completed to the other side of
the d-c line L2, through relay coil K-1443-A. This
energizes the relay, opening its B contacts and closing
its C and D contacts. The opening of contacts
K-1443-B removes the short circuit from resistor
R-1441, placing it in series with the armature of the
d-c motor in the motor generator. When contacts
K-1443-C close, 115 volts d-c from terminal 1 are con-
nected through relay coil K-1444-A to line terminal L2,
energizing the relay. Contacts K-1443-C also apply
voltage to contacts K-1443-D and since these contacts
close at the same time, the circuit from terminal 1 is
also completed to line terminal L, through relay coil
K-1445-A.
(3) When relay K-1444 is energized, its B con-
tacts open to remove the short circuit from resistor
R-1441 and part of resistor R-1442. See Fig. 2-109.
Contacts K-1444-C close, applying 115 volts to the
delay windings of relays K-1443, K-1444, and K-1445
through resistor R-1443. When relay K-1445 is ener-
gized, its B contacts open and remove the short circuit
from resistors R-1441 and R-1442. Contacts K-1445-C
close and apply 115 volts from terminal 1 through
relays K-1441 and K-1442 to line terminal L2. The
circuit to these relays is connected to their C contacts
as shown in Fig. 2-109. In the de-energized position,
the contacts are normally closed and short circuit half
of the relay windings. Therefore the voltage is applied
across only half of the relay coils, resulting in a high
current and a strong field. Once the relays are ener-
gized, the amount of current required to keep their
armatures pulled in is considerably less than that re-
quired to pull them in. In order to prevent the
unnecessary consumption of power, relay contacts
K-1441-C and K-1442-C open to remove the short cir-
cuit across half of the relay coils. At the same time
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2161
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
9 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946
,Par. 25b(3)
contacts K-1441-D and K-1442-D close and connect the
complete coils to the 115 volts present at terminal 2.
This voltage comes from line terminal LI, through
relay K-1446, the centrifugal over-speed switch in the
Motor Generator, and the STOP switch in the Push-
button Station, Consequently, the D contacts of relay
K-1441 lock both it and relay K-1442 in the energized
position until the circuit is interrupted by one of the
three components just mentioned.
(4) When relay K-1441 is energized, its B con-
tacts close, connecting line L1 through the thermal
element of relay K-1446 and terminals F1 to the field
of the d-c motor in the Motor Generator. These con-
tacts also connect line L1 to one side of the armature
of the d-c motor through resistors R-1441 and R-1442.
Relay K-1442 operates simultaneously with relay
K-1441. Its B contacts close, connecting line Lo
through the S, terminals to the other side of the field
and armature of the d-c motor in the Motor Generator,
starting the motor. Contacts K-1442-C open, reducing
the current in the relay coil K-1442-A, and contacts
K-1442-D open, breaking the circuit to relay K-1443-A.
These contacts are in series with the back contacts of
the START switch to eliminate the possibility of re-
sistors R-1441 and R-1442 remaining in the circuit too
long if the START switch is held closed. However,
relay K-1443 does not return to the de-energized posi-
tion immediately because there is sufficient current
flowing in its delay winding to cause the magnetic
field to decay gradually. When the flux intensity de-
creases sufficiently, the relay drops open. The delay
time is determined by the setting of one section of the
dual potentiometer R-1445 which fixes the values of
voltage applied across the holding coil. When the
delay time of relay K-1443 has elapsed, it drops open
and contacts K-1443-B close, short circuiting resistor
R-1441 to remove it from the armature circuit and
increase the armature current. At the same time con-
tacts K-1443-C and K-1443-D open. Contacts K-1443-C
break the circuit to relay coil K-1444-A and after a
delay time determined by the amount of current flow-
ing in its delay or holding coil, it drops open. Relay
K-1445 is not immediately affected by the opening of
contacts K-1443-D since it is also connected to 115
volts through its own C contacts, the C contacts of
relay K-1444, and the D contacts of relay K-1441.
When the delay time of relay K-1444 has elapsed, it
drops to the de-energized position and its B contacts
close, short circuiting resistor R-1441 and part of
R-1442. This further increases the armature current in
the d-c motor. Note in Fig. 2-109 that when contacts
K-1444-B close they parallel contacts K-1443-B through
part of resistor R-1442. This arrangement permits the
current increase to be carried by contacts K-1444-B
alone. If the B contacts were in series, the current
carried by each set of contacts would be much greater
2-162
THEORY OF OPERATION
and the possibility of sticking contacts would be
greatly increased.
(5) Contacts K-1444-C open when the relay is
de-energized but have no effect on the holding coils
since they are now connected to 115 volts through the
C contacts of relay K-1445. However, contacts
K-1444-C break the circuit to relay K-1445 when they
open. When this occurs, relay K-1445 starts its time
cycle and when its flux density has decayed sufficiently,
it drops out, closing its B contacts and opening its C
contacts. The B contacts short circuit resistors R-1441
and R-1442 to remove the remaining portion of resis-
tor R-1442 from the armature circuit. This connects
the armature of the d-c motor directly to the line and
maximum current flows. When contacts K-1445-C
open, they break the circuit to the relay holding coils,
completely de-energizing the three relays. The time
required for relays K-1443, K-1444 and K-1445 to drop
to the de-energized position is determined by the set-
ting of potentiometer R-1445 and it is set to cut out
the last resistance from the armature circuit at the
instant the motor reaches full speed. In order to stop
the Motor Generator, the STOP switch is pressed,
breaking the circuit to the holding contacts K-1441-D
which de-energizes both relays K-1441 and K-1442.
This opens the B contacts of these relays disconnecting
the motor from the line. If the line current to the
motor becomes excessive due to overload or mechanical
difficulties, the thermal relay K-1446 opens its contacts
and removes both the motor and the relays from across
the power line.
c. MAGNETIC CONTROLLER CAY-211187.
( 1 ) The Magnetic Controller used in the 230-volt
supply is much simpler than the one used in the 115-
volt supply because it does not have to be designed
to handle as much current. The schematic diagram
of the 230-volt Magnetic Controller is shown in Fig.
2-110. The circuit from terminal L1 goes through
thermal relay K-1454, the over-speed switch in the
Motor Generator, and the STOP switch just as it did
in the 115-volt system. Since the rest of the equip-
ment is the same in the two circuits, only the Magnetic
Controller is shown in Fig. 2-110. When the START
switch is closed, 230 volts are applied through the
normally closed K contacts of relay K-1451 to relay
coil K-1452A. The other side of relay coil K-1452A
connects to the other line terminal Lo. When this
relay is energized, its B contacts open, removing the
short circuit from resistor R-1453. At the same time,
the normally open contacts K-1452E and K-1452F
close. When the E contacts close, they connect 230
volts from L1 to relay coil K-1453A and through this
coil to terminal L, which is the other side of the line.
The E contacts are also connected to the F contacts
and the closing of the E and F contacts applies 230
volts to the holding coil circuit and to the E contacts
of relay K-1453.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
MOTOR GENERATOR
GAY- 21118 2
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
PUSHBUTTON
CAY-211186
r--
STOP 0
S2 A1(1? F1(:) 4? S2?L."3
R-1411
R-I414
02 03 GF2 oGFI ER EF
0 9
1 1_________._
EF 03 EID() GFI EN
SECTION 2
MAGNETIC CONTROLLER
CAY-21118I
K-14414
K-1442 A
R-144I
1?1?-1442
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
ICAY- 211185
ORIGINAL
foc
0
K-1443 A
LI
115 V. D-C
0
L2
K-14444
K-14454
Figure 2-109. Primary Power Circuits (115 V.D.C.)
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
R-I445
iR-I443
R-1445
2-163
2-169
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION
Par. 25c(2) 2
TO
TO MOTOR MOTOR
ARMATURE FIELD
0A OF
TO MOTOR
FIELD ANDO
ARMATURE S2
?
?
OVER
SPEED STOP START
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
0 0
K-1454 4 3 2
?
R-I453
R-I454
B IC
0 L1
230 V D-C
K-145I A 0 L2
TB
KLI452A
K-1453A
R-I452
R-1451
Figure 2-110. Magnetic Controller CAY-211187 (230 V.D.C.)
(2) When relay K-1453 is energized, its normally
closed B contacts open, removing the short circuit
from resistors R-1453 and R-1454. This places the
two resistors in series with the armature of the d-c
motor in the Motor Generator. Contacts K-1453E close
and apply 230 volts to a portion of the relay coil
K-1451A energizing the relay. When relay K-1451 is
energized, its B contacts close and connect line ter-
minal L1 to the A1 and F1 terminals of the motor
armature and field respectively. The C contacts close,
connecting the common armature and field terminal
S2 to line terminal L, and the motor starts to run.
Contacts F close and apply 230 volts across the entire
coil K-1451A, reducing the amount of current flowing
in it. This is possible because the current required to
hold a relay is not as great as the current required to
pick up the armature. A short time after contacts
K-1451F close, contacts K-1451H open breaking this
part of the circuit since it is no longer needed. Con-
tacts K-1451K open breaking the circuit to relay
K-1452A. This relay does not de-energize immediately
because of the current flowing in its holding coil.
This current is not sufficiently great to hold the relay,
but it does cause the relay field to decay slowly. The
time required for the field to decay sufficiently for the
relay to return to its de-energized position is a func-
ORIGINAL
tion of the current flowing in the holding coil. The
current in the holding coil is fixed by the adjustment
of potentiometer R-1452. After the time delay relay
K-1452 drops out and its B contacts close, short cir-
cuiting resistor R-1453 and increasing the armature
current in the d-c motor. The E and F contacts open
breaking the circuit to relay coil K-1453A and to the
holding coil circuit. However, the holding coil circuit
is still connected through the E contacts of relay
K-1453 to the tap on relay coil K-1451A. Relay K-1453
remains energized until the time delay fixed by its
holding coil has elapsed. When this occurs, the relay
returns to its former position and its B contacts close,
short circuiting resistors R-1453 and R-1454. This
removes all series resistance from the armature circuit
and the motor reaches its average speed. The E con-
tacts close, breaking the circuit to the holding coils.
At this point only relay K-1451 is energized and the
circuit remains in this condition until the STOP
switch is opened, or the over-speed switch operates
breaking the circuit to terminal L1.
d. VOLTAGE REGULATOR CAY-211185.
(1) The over-speed switch in the Motor Gener-
ator opens if the load is removed from the motor
generator. When this switch opens, it disconnects the
d-c motor and the relays from across the power line
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-165
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
9 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 THEORY OF OPERATION
ffm Par. 25d(1)
since it is in series with relay K-1446. The d-c motor
is mounted on the same shaft with a d-c exciter and
an a-c generator. The exciter is shunt wound and its
output is connected to the field of the a-c generator.
The field of the exciter is in series with a variable
resistor R-1463 in the Voltage Regulator. The posi-
tion of a four section -switch in the Voltage Regulator
determines whether voltage regulation is to be accom-
plished by manual or automatic means. Fig. 2-109
shows this switch in the automatic position with con-
tacts C open and contacts A, B and D closed. The
dry disc bridge rectifier shown in Fig. 2-109 is con-
nected directly across the output of the armature of
the a-c generator. The armature voltage is indicated
by Voltmeter M-1461. The d-c output of the bridge
rectifier appears across the coil of K-1461, through
potentiometers R-1461 and R-1462 and transformer
T-1461. These potentiometers are adjusted so that the
pull on the armature of K-1461 adjusts the spring con-
tacts on resistor R-1463 to a point where the field cur-
rent of the exciter is just sufficient to maintain an out-
put of 115 volts from the armature of the a-c gener-
ator. If the armature voltage increases, the increased
output of the bridge rectifier causes the current in coil
K-1461 to increase, increasing the pull on its armature
and thus increasing the amount of resistance in series
with the field of the exciter. This causes a decrease
in the exciting voltage applied to the field of the a-c
generator and the output voltage drops to the point
where the circuit balances and remains there unless
otherwise disturbed. The point of balance can be
changed at will by adjusting potentiometers R-1461
and R-1462.
(2) Any sharp change in voltage output would
start the electro-mechanical voltage regulating system
to oscillating and produce a continuous alternating
swing in output voltage if some type of degenerative
feedback were not provided. In order to obtain de-
generative feedback, the primary of transformer
T-1461 is shunted across the exciter field. The secon-
dary of this transformer is connected, in series with
potentiometers R-1461 and R-1462 and the Silverstat
coil K-1461, across the output of the bridge rectifier.
The polarity of the transformer windings is such that
when an increase in rectifier output causes a decrease
in exciter output voltage, the output of the trans-
former bucks the output of the rectifier. Consequently,
the armature in the Silverstat K-1461 comes to rest
almost immediately. Potentiometer R-1462 is adjusted
so that the Silverstat can only respond to rates of
changes in voltage output that are too slow to produce
any appreciable output from transformer T-1461.
(3) In manual operation, switch sections A, B,
and D are open and section C is closed. Section C
short circuits the Silverstat resistor and section B re-
moves the short circuit from the manually operated
2-166
rheostat R-1466 which replaces the Silverstat. Section
A opens to remove the bridge rectifier from across the
output of the generator armature, and section D opens
to place resistors R-1464 and R-1465 in series with the
anti-hunt transformer T-1461 so that it cannot produce
a current flow in the rectifier when manual adjust-
ments are being made.
e. VOLTAGE STABILIZER.
(1) The output of the Motor Generator is con-
nected to the main power input terminals 02 and 03
in the Transceiver Console. After passing through
the MAIN POWER ON switch S-101, part of the
power is connected through terminals 1202 and 1203
to the input terminals 1 and 2 of the Voltage Stabi-
lizer. The Voltage Stabilizer is shown in Fig. 2-111.
The line from terminal 2 connects through the pri-
mary winding of transformer A to a tap on parallel
LC circuit B. This circuit is resonant at 63 cps, and
the inductor is near saturation in the range of 103-127
volts. The impedance point of the tap on the inductor
is chosen to match the impedance of the input power
line. One side of transformer A is connected to a tap
on the parallel circuit B and the other side is con-
nected through the series resonant circuit C to one
side of the primary winding of transformer D. The
'other side of transformer D is connected to the side of
the parallel circuit C that connects to the input line 1.
Any increase in line voltage tends to increase the line
current into circuit B, but the drop in voltage across
the primary of transformer A increases and subtracts
from the line voltage to maintain a fairly constant
input to circuit B. Since the inductor in circuit B is
near saturation, a given increase in input voltage pro-
duces a relatively small increase in the voltage across
the entire circuit. The polarity of the output of trans-
former A is such that it always partially cancels the
voltage across the parallel circuit B. Consequently,
while an increase or decrease in input voltage causes
a small increase or decrease across the parallel circuit,
the voltage output from transformer B also increases
or decreases in phase opposition and the amplitude of
the sum of these voltages remains the same as it was
before the initial change occurred. The circuit con-
stants are chosen so that the output voltage remains
fairly constant over a range of 103 to 127 volts. The
circuit is also compensated for shifts in line frequency
which would produce an appreciable drop in the volt-
age across the parallel circuit B. This is accomplished
by adding the series circuit C in series with the input
circuit to the primary winding of transformer D. Cir-
cuit B is resonant at 63 cps and circuit C is resonant at
57 cps. If the line frequency increases, the voltage
across circuit B increases, but at the same time the
voltage drop across circuit C decreases a like amount
since the line frequency has shifted further away from
its resonant frequency. If the line frequency decreases,
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 9
Par. 25e(1)
[-LIAstsu
INPUT FROM
TRANSCEIVER
0
7
125 V.
?
110
6
41
120 V.
?
41110.
115 V.
REGULATED
41.1.
4
OUTPUT
110 V.
IMP
?
40.
4111.
41S,
?
Figure 2-111. Voltage Stabilizer, Simplified Diagram
the voltage across circuit B decreases and the voltage
drop across circuit C also decreases a like amount.
Thus, it can be seen that in the range between the
limits represented by the resonant frequencies of the
tuned circuits, the voltage output is constant. If the
frequency is held constant, the output voltage varies
?1% for an input voltage variation of 103 to 127
volts. If the voltage is held constant, the output volt-
age varies ?3% for a frequency variation of 57 to 63
cps. If both voltage and frequency shift, the output
voltage varies ?4% within the limits given.
26. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (NXsr-46032).
a. GENERAL.
(1) The power supply system used with SR
Equipments purchased on the above contract is very
similar to the 230-volt system in use with equipments
purchased on contract NXsr-30306 which is described
in detail in the preceding paragraph. The principle
differences may be seen in the complete schematic
diagrams of the equipments in section 7. The Motor-
Generator operates from 230 volts d-c only. It has a
built-in over-speed regulator to improve voltage and
frequency regulation. The input and output leads
pass through r-f filters to prevent radiation from the
transmitter from affecting the efficiency of operation.
The Voltage Regulator is an improved type with r-f
shielding for its components. It is identical electrically
to the Voltage Regulator supplied on the other con-
tract except for a few minor changes in part numbers.
The Magnetic Starter is slightly different from the
CAY-211187. It contains automatic reset circuits to
eliminate the necessity of pressing a manual reset but-
ton each time an overload stops the operation of the
ORIGINAL
Motor Generator. The Pushbutton Stations have sepa-
rate contacts for the reset circuit and when the
START-EMERGENCY button is pressed, the reset
circuit operates automatically. The reset contacts
short-circuit relay contacts K-1584 to accomplish this.
Since the general theory of this type of equipment is
discussed in Paragraph 25, the discussion in this para-
graph is confined to a description of the operation of
the equipment. Refer to -Figs. 7-183 and 7-185 in Sec-
tion 7 during the following discussion.
b. MAGNETIC STARTER.
(1) Pressing the START-EMERGENCY RUN
button on any one of the Remote Pushbutton Stations
or on the Magnetic Controller cabinet door energizes
magnetic reset coil K-1584A on the overload relay
which closes contact K-1584E. Successively, the main
and neutralizing coils of timetactors K-1582A and
K-1583A are energized. This action inserts starting
resistors R-1583 and R-1584 in series with the arma-
ture. Contactor K-1581A is energized and the motor
starts. Interlock K-1581F closes and provides a holding
circuit around the push buttons. Also, with this action,
interlock K-1581K opens and de-energizes reset coil
K-1584A and the main coil K-1582A. After a definite
time delay, the normally open contacts K-1582E and
K-1582F open and the normally closed contact
K-1482B closes. This shorts out the first step of start-
ing resistance R-1583. Main coil K-1583A is now
de-energized. After a second time delay, resistor
R-1584 is shorted out and the motor is connected across
the line.
(2) Low voltage, overload, overspeed or depress-
ing the STOP pushbutton will de-energize the con-
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
2-167
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21
g SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946
Z" Par. 26b(2)
troller and stop the motor. The motor must again be
started in the usual manner. In an emergency, the
motor may be run with overload by simply holding
down the START-EMERGENCY RUN pushbutton.
The accelerating time may be varied by adjusting the
potentiometer resistor R-1582 connected between ter-
minals 12 and L-2. Coil K-1581A has two windings.
Normally, winding FT is short-circuited by interlock
K-1581H. However, after contactor K-1581 picks up,
K-1581H opens and both coils are used in series. If
the voltage should fail and is again restored, the motor
must be started by depressing the START button.
c. VOLTAGE REGULATOR.
(1) The Voltage Regulator is used to control the
voltage of the a-c generator by means of variable
resistor R-1463. This resistor is built into the Voltage
Regulator and is connected in series with the shunt
field of the exciter. Control element It-1461 consists
of a pivoted arm which is controlled by the D.C. oper-
ated electro-magnet. A spring is attached to this arm
for use in opposing the electromagnet's pull. The
position of the moving arm is determined by the
balance between the magnetic pull and the spring pull.
Coil K-1461A, of control element K-1461 receives its
energy from the single phase Rectox rectifier CR-1461
to CR-1464. The input to the rectifier is supplied by
single phase a-c from the output terminals of the Type
CAY-211328 a-c generator. Thus, the d-c voltage
which is applied to the terminals of coil K-1461A
varies in the same proportion as the a-c generator
voltage.
(2) The moving arm of the regulating element
carries an insulated pusher pin to bear against an
assembly of spring mounted silver buttons which con-
nect to steps on the regulating resistor R-1463. This
arm closes the buttons together to short out resistance
when the coil spring tension overcomes the magnetic
'pull on the armature. Conversely, when the pull on
the armature is greater than the pull of the spring, the
arm moves in the opposite direction. Therefore, the
silver buttons separate to insert resistance into the
exciter field circuit. Voltage adjusting rheostat R-1467
is connected in the circuit of coil K-1461A. This
rheostat is used to raise or lower the a-c output voltage.
The control knob for this resistor is accessible from
the front panel in the regulator cabinet. R-1461, an
2-168
: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
adjustable resistor, is placed in the same circuit with
R-1467. It is used to set the voltage so that adjust-
ments can be made to the desired range.
(3) Damping transformer T-1461 is used to stabi-
lize the action of the regulator moving arm. For
example, when the a-c generator voltage rises above
the regulated value, regulator K-1461 operates to in-
sert resistor R-1463 in the exciter field circuit. This
reduces the voltage across the exciter field, which in
turn reduces the voltage across the armature of the
exciter. The primary of damping transformer T-1461,
being connected across the exciter armature, is subject
to this change in voltage. The? resulting change in
current in the primary winding, induces a voltage in
the secondary winding in opposition to the flow of
current in coil K-1461A. Thus, the magnetic pull is
temporarily reduced by this impulse from damping
transformer T-1461 and the regulator is restrained from
making an excessive correction in the exciter field cir-
cuit. When the a-c voltage falls below the regulated
value, K-1461 operates to cut out resistance in the
exciter field circuit. The impulse from the damping
transformer T-1461 aids the current in the voltage coil.
Regulator K-1461 is thus restrained from making an
excessive increase in the exciter field current.
(4) Transfer switch S-1461 enables the operator
to control the voltage by automatic operation of the
regulator or by manual operation of exciter field
rheostat R-1466. When the switch is in the AUTO-
MATIC position, the contacts of the switch short out
the fixed resistors R-1464 and R-1465 in series with
the a-c generator field. It also shorts out rheostat
R-1466. When the switch is turned to the MANUAL
position, these contacts open and reinsert the above
mentioned resistors back in their circuit. However,
in the MANUAL position of the switch, a contact
shorts out variable resistor R-1463.
(5) Exciter field rheostat R-1466 has a MAIN
and VERNIER control to obtain fine adjustment of
the a-c voltage when the voltage is manually con-
trolled by means of the exciter field rheostat R-1466.
The large handwheel controls the coarse adjustment
and the smaller handwheel controls the fine adjust-
ment. An a-c voltmeter M-1461, 0-150 volts scale, is
supplied to indicate the voltage on the terminals of
the a-c generator.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 2
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT Par. la la
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION AND INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
1. GENERAL.
a. This section contains the instructions and dia-
grams necessary for the installation of the SR Radar
Equipment. Considerable time will be saved if these
instructions are carefully studied before any attempt
is made to install the equipment. Comparable infor-
mation is included in blueprint form with each
equipment.
2. UNPACKING.
a. The weights and dimensions of the equipment
and its various components are given on the outline
drawings in this section. These weights and dimen-
sions should be noted and sufficient personnel should
be assigned to the installation crew to handle the units
and secure them in position. Hoisting gear should be
available to handle the unit before and after it is
uncrated. The hoisting should be supervised by an
experienced rigger. The units are delivered with all
delicate adjustments made at the factory and with all
vacuum tubes in their sockets.
b. The boxes and crates containing the equipment
should be kept in an upright position at all times.
The upright position is indicated by an arrow stenciled
on each box or crate. Use a nail-puller for removing
nails and remove at least three sides of the crate before
attempting to remove the equipment. Do not use a
hammer or pinch bar for opening crates containing
delicate apparatus. The crates should not be opened
until after the units have been placed in the approxi-
mate position they will occupy when installed. After
the equipment has been unpacked it should be thor-
oughly inspected for damage in transit. Tubes and
control knobs should be inspected for breakage. Wires
which may have become loosened should be tightened
or replaced. Any unusual amount of damage to the
case or its components should be reported to the
proper authorities. Proper forms should be used in
reporting excessive damage.
3. INSTALLATION OF MODULATOR.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The Navy Type CAY-50AGU Modulator is
supplied as part of a modification kit for changing
Navy Model SR Equipments over to Navy Model SR-a
Equipments. When the modulator is shipped as part
of a Navy Model SR-a Equipment by the contractor,
it is installed simultaneously with the SR-a Equipment.
ORIGINAL
b. INSTALLED AS A MODIFICATION.
(1) When the Modulator is installed as a modifi-
cation of SR Equipment, certain changes must be made
in Transceiver CAY-43ACM in order to convert it to
Transceiver CAY-43ADK before the Modulator may
be connected with it. These changes are covered by
Field Engineering Bulletin SR Radar Navy Field
Change No. 20, Conversion of SR to SR-a Equipment.
A copy of this field change is included in Section 7.
The Navy Type CAY-67AAD Keyer Unit is removed
from its compartment in the lower bay of the Trans-
ceiver and an interconnection panel, supplied as part
of the modification kit, is installed in its place. Cer-
tain other modifications are made on the Transceiver
which are covered in the Field Service Bulletin men-
tioned above. These changes are discussed generally
in Section 1 and may be seen in detail by comparing
the schematic diagram of Transceiver CAY-43ACM
with the schematic diagram of Transceiver CAY-
43ADK. The interconnection panel which is installed
in the space formerly occupied by the Keyer unit is
shown in Fig. 3-1.
Figure 3-1. Interconnection Panel in Transceiver
CAY-43ADK
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-1
? Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
LEGEND
I - TEST POINT TP 2001 (J-2003)
2- TEST POINT TP 2002 (J-2004)
3 - FUSE ALARM AC POWER
4- FUSE ALARM AC POWER
5- REPETITION RATE CONTROL
6- FUSE 8 AMP AG POWER
7 - FUSE 8 AMP AC POWER
NOTES:
21N. CLEARANCE FROM FARTHEST PROJECTION ON
ALL SIDES FOR OPERATION OF SHOCK MOUNTS.
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
DRILL HOLE FOR
STUFFING TUBE ON
THIS SIDE OF RED
LINE
SIDE VIEW
WEIGHTS
WEIGHT UNCRATED 168 LBS.
WEIGHT CRATED
CUBICAL CONTENT
(PACKED FOR SHIPMENT)
24
THIS UNIT IS PART OF SRa a SR-5 RADAR EQUIPMENT
OUTLINE
TYPE GAY-50AGU MODULATOR
DWG NO. 7615500
,
0
o
0
0
-123+
TOP VIEW
0
0
0
Il
FRONT VIEW
1DIA.-4 MOUNTING HOLES
VIEW AT A-A
23 41
4 MTG. HOLES
DIA.
FRONT PANEL
207;
DRILLING PLAN
A
20i
22
22-
,6
3-2
Figure 3-2. Modulator CAY-50AGU, Outline and Mounting Dimensions
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT Par. 3b(2)
(2) The Modulator should be installed adjacent
to the Transceiver if at all possible. If it is not pos-
sible to place the two side by side, the least possible
separation should be made to keep the length of the
pulse cable at a minimum. When the Modulator is
installed as a modification, it may be necessary to
install the Modulator in the place formerly occupied
by the Auto-Dehydrator in order to have it located
close to the Transceiver. The mounting dimensions
of this unit are the same as the Auto-Dehydrator, and
the Modulator may therefore be mounted in essentially
the same space as the former unit. These mounting
dimensions are shown in Fig. 3-2. If it is necessary
to mount the Modulator in the space formerly occu-
pied by the Auto-Dehydrator, the Auto-Dehydrator
may then be mounted at any available point near the
Antenna or else not used at all. When installing the
Modulator, a space of 2 inches must be provided at the
sides and rear of the unit, in order that the shock-
mounts have space in which to operate. About 30
inches of space should be left in front to permit the
Unit to be serviced. The uncrated weight of the unit
is 168 pounds. It may therefore be handled without
difficulty by two men. The Modulator is fastened in
place by four bolts. These bolts may be held either
by drilling and tapping holes in the deck to receive
them, or by drilling clearance holes and securing the
bolts with lockwashers and nuts. The drilling plan
for the holes is shown in Fig. 3-2.
c. INSTALLED AS PART OF SR-a EQUIPMENT.
(1) When the Modulator is supplied as part of
a Model SR-a Equipment, the installation is much the
same as when it is installed as part of a modification
except for the fact that the modifications to the Trans-
ceiver have already been made before the Equipment
was shipped.
4. INSTALLATION OF TRANSCEIVER.
a. The Transceiver shown in Fig. 3-3 should be lo-
cated as near as possible to the Antenna, in order to
reduce the losses in the r-f transmission line. It should
be positioned so that there is enough clearance at the
sides and rear to permit removing the shields for
maintenance and cleaning. At least 30 inches should
be allowed in front of the Transceiver to permit space
for the operator to stand in front of the unit while
operating the 'controls and to permit removal of the
components. The cabinet is mounted upon four
plunger type shockmounts which raise it about 4
inches clear of the deck. Place the approved Navy
template on the deck so as to allow for the proper
clearance. Proceed to drill the mounting holes. After
the mounting holes have been drilled, place the unit
in position. If no template is available, refer to Fig.
3-3 which gives dimensions for a template. Sufficient
personnel and hoisting gear should be present to
handle the unit which weighs approximately 1,150
ORIGINAL
pounds. The unit may be lightened slightly by remov-
ing the Monitor Scope and the Monitor Receiver. If
these units are removed, follow the procedure outlined
for removing the units of the Indicator Console.
Across each of the four shocicmounts connect a 6 inch
length of 1 inch wide copper braid, ending in a suit-
able terminal for fastening beneath a shockmount bolt.
5. INSTALLATION OF INDICATOR CONSOLE.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The Indicator Console should be installed in
a location where the average temperature is always
within moderate limits. There should be free air
circulation since the equipment dissipates about 580
watts of the input power. It should be mounted on
a firm support, preferably at some point in the ship
which is not subject to excessive vibration or direct
shock. In normal use, the equipment is mounted with
the three cases assembled side by side on a common
cradle. However, in special installations, two cases
may be mounted on a common cradle and the third
case mounted separately. Where space is limited, the
equipment may be mounted with each case on a sepa-
rate cradle. Special installations of this type require
extra equipment. Since the equipment is normally
supplied with only a three-case cradle and individual
cradles for each unit will be required.
(2) Space must be allotted around the Indicator
Console to allow for its movement on the shockmount.
A two-inch clearance should be allowed between all
points on the console and adjacent bulkheads, pipes,
wiring, or other stationary objects. A clearance of at
least 30 inches in front of the Console should be given
to allow for the operation of the units and for the
removal of the individual chassis. If more than 30
inches of space is available, it will make the removal
of the components easier and provide a more comfort-
able operating space for the operator. Terminal boxes
may be located on the back or on either side of the
Console, as required. The location of these boxes is
discussed in the paragraph of this section concerning
the interconnection of the units. Fig. 3-4 is an outline
drawing with all of the dimensions necessary to indi-
cate the size of the space required for installation.
Figs. 3-5 to 3-10 inclusive show the dimensions of each
component. This information is valuable when the
components have to be taken through small openings.
The Indicator Console is shipped with all three cases
bolted to the cradle. A drilling template is shown in
Fig. 3-4 to indicate where the mounting holes should
be located so as to mount/ the cradle permanently in
the ship. A similar template is also supplied with
each cradle. The dimensions and clearances indicated
in Fig. 3-4 should be followed when locating the tem-
plate and drilling the mounting holes.
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-3
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 INSTALLATION AND
*0 Par. 5b(1) INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
b. PLACING THE INDICATOR CONSOLE.
( 1) If adequate hoisting equipment is available,
it may be possible to lift the entire Console, with the
units and cradle in place onto the position where it
is to be installed. The complete Indicator Console
weighs over 500 pounds and this method of installa-
tion should not be attempted unless sufficient person-
nel and lifting gear are available to handle it without
jarring or dropping it.
(2) Generally, it will be necessary to remove the
various components from the Console, and then re-
move the cases from the cradle. All of the chassis in
the Console are removed from their place in the same
manner. Loosen the captive screws around the front
edge of the panels. Then pull the unit two-thirds of
the way out of the cabinet. At this point, it will be
stopped by the automatic stops which are built into
the cabinet. The panel screws are shown in Figs. 3-5
to 3-10 inclusive. Unscrew the small cable clamps
above the point where the cables connect to the com-
ponent. These clamps are shown in Fig. 3-5 to 3-10
inclusive. Unfasten the screws in the terminal boards
and disconnect the wires. Each wire is tagged and
numbered to correspond to the numbers on the ter-
minal boards. This is done to insure that it will be
*reconnected properly when the component is replaced
in the cabinet. In order for the chassis of a unit to
clear the connection cable when the unit is removed
from the case of the Indicator Console, a small recessed
area has been provided in the case adjacent to the
cable on each unit. This area is covered by a small
plate held by two captive screws. Before removing
the chassis from the case, remove the plate covering
the recessed area and place the connection cable in the
space thus provided. After interference by the con-
nection cable has been eliminated in this way, press
the lock buttons in the case adjacent to the bottom of
the chassis. This will release the locks which have
been holding the chassis in the two-thirds forward
position. On the larger units, two locks are employed,
while on the smaller units, only one lock is used.
Once these latch mechanisms have been released, the
units may be removed from their chassis.
(3) The PPI Scope and the Range Scope are
comparatively heavy units. They weigh about 125
and 75 pounds, respectively. Sufficient personnel
should be available when removing these units to
make certain that they are not dropped or jarred. Fol-
lowing the removal of the electrical components, the
case will be light enough to be handled easily by three
or four men. If it is desired to remove the three cases
separately from the cradle, it will be necessary to re-
move the bolts which hold the three cases together.
The assembly bolts are located in the top of the cases,
and may be reached by removing the tops of the three
cases. The tops are secured to the cases by four Dzus
fasteners, which need only be turned a quarter of a
3-4
turn to remove the tops. When the tops are removed
the assembly bolts may be removed. The cases may
be removed from the cradle by removing the bolts in
the bottom that secure the cases to the cradle.
(4) If mounting holes have not already been
provided, secure the template and locate it so that suffi-
cient clearance around the unit is assured. Drill only
the holes specified on the template. The proper drill
size is indicated on the template and on the outline
drawing, Fig. 3-4. The cradle may now be bolted into
place. If the cases have been removed from the cradle
they should now be reassembled to the cradle with the
original hardware, and the bolts holding the cases to-
gether should be replaced if the cases have been sepa-
rated. Slide the chassis into their respective positions
until they are about one-third the way in and the lock
has been engaged. Make certain that the chassis can-
not be pushed in or pulled out. By reference to the
outline drawing, Fig. 3-4, be certain that the chassis
are in their proper position in the cases. It is possible
to interchange the Console Receiver and Range Scope
as well as the IFF Coordinator and General Control
unit. The two components of each pair mentioned
above are the same size and shape.
(5) Replace the wiring on the terminal boards,
making certain that the connections are correct. Match
the numbers on the wires with the numbers on the
terminal boards on the side of the unit. Replace the
cable clamps and tighten their thumbscrews. Replace
the covers on the recessed cable openings. Push the
lock release buttons and push the chassis into the case
until the panels meet the flanges on the cabinets.
Fasten them temporarily with the captive screws. Most
of the chassis will have to be pulled forward later
during the alignment procedure.
6. INSTALLATION OF ANTENNA AND
ANTENNA PEDESTAL.
a. GENERAL.
(1) If a crane or boom is available, the easiest way
to install the Antenna and Antenna Pedestal is to
assemble the two together on the top deck and with
the stowing lock on the Pedestal engaged, hoist them
into place on the mast. Anchor the Pedestal base
securely to prevent any possibility of tipping due to
the added weight of the Antenna.
b. ASSEMBLY OF ANTENNA TO ANTENNA
PEDESTAL.
(1) Remove the protective shipping cover from
the entrance to the concentric lines at the top of the
dome of the Pedestal. Pull the slotted connector until
the end of the fingers project slightly above the top of
the dome of the Pedestal. Wrap one turn of a piece
of string around the fingers to compress them so that
when the concentric line is lowered the fingers will fit
within it easily. Anchor the ends of the string at con-
venient places, such as two of the bolts holding the
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
LIFTING EYES
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Ina its
Cm-
0
NAVSHIPS 900,946
_r
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
0
LAJ Is
1411,10'?
?ct 51,12 ...
CL 0 Ct 7. ...
0 Li 0
?I_ci.
ORIGINAL
WEIGHT &INGRATE?
1474 LBS.
WEIGHT GRATED
4
40.73 GU. FT.
SECTION 3
LEGEND
I METER -FILAMENT VOLTAGE
2 METER-SERVICE HOURS
3 METER-PLATE VOLTAGE
4 METER-PLATE CURRENT
5 METER-GRID CURRENT
6 INDICATOR LIGHT -MAIN POWER
7 INDICATOR LIGHT -LOCAL CONTROL
8 INDICATOR LIGHT-FILAMENTS
9 INDICATOR LIGHT-PLATE VOLTS
10 MONITOR SCOPE -DWG. 7611725
II MONITOR RECEIVER - DWG.76I I 455
12 KEYER UNIT - DWG. 7611223
13 ACCESS DOOR-OSCILLATOR
14 DIAL -OSCILLATOR TUNING
15 DIAL-NI TUNING STUB
16 DIAL-#2 TUNING STUB
17 DIAL-41 DUPLEXER
18 DIAL-42 DUPLEXER
19 SWITCH-LOCAL TO REMOTE CONTROL
20 SWITCH-R. F. OSCILLATOR KEYING
21 SWITCH-POWER ON
22 SWITCH-POWER OFF
23 SWITCH-PLATE VOLTAGE INCREASE
24 SWITCH-PLATE VOLTAGE DECREASE
25 FILAMENT VOLTAGE REGULATOR
26 REGULATOR SHAFT LOCK
27 SWITCH-MAIN POWER 8 EMERGENCY OFF
28 RECEPTACLE -115 V A. C. CONVENIENCE OUTLET
29 ACCESS DOOR-WIRING 8 FUSES
30 ACCESS DOOR -RECTIFIER TUBES
31 GRID JACK AND INSTRUCTION PLATE
m1.4
4
0
04T.
FLOOR DRILLING PLAN
Figure 3-3. Transceiver CAY-43ACM, CAY-43ADK, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-5
3-6
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
CONSOLE RECEIVER
411 OVERALL
PPI
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
RANGE SCOPE
,
-
t-?
0
N
0
6 0
00
?
?
kM
0
8
Ouet)@Olit
,
2
B
0
j
a
lb 0 0 III
0
_0
a
lu.
0
0 * 0,
0 0
e
.
Ell
00
Oa
0
?
-
. R
0
-
Bli
)
GI
0 0
ef.?
.
0000
0
.
--al
L L:LI
GENERAL CONTROL
PANEL
4
COORDINATOR
FRONT VIEW
BEARING INDICATOR 2
514 WHEN UNIT IS PULLED OUT
(WITHOUT 60.70)
ai
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
(LEFT SIDE VIEW SAME AS WONT SIDE)
30 28i
2
FRONT PANEL'
DRILLING PLAN
127 DIA.-I6 MOLES
...1 2
251
ORIGINAL
374
2 2 L
30 - OVERALL
39g OVERALL WHEN HOOD IS IN PLACE
SECTION 3
NOTE:
ARMORED CABLE MAY BE BROUGHT INTO WIRE INLET BOXES FROM TOP, BOTTOM, OR EITHER
SIDE. ARMOR IS TO BE CUT OFF AT INLET 802 AND THREE FEET OF WIRE LEADS ARE TO BE
PULLED THROUGH OVAL SLOTS FOR CONNECTIONS TO TERMINAL BOARDS.
WIRE INLET BOX- WILL BE USED ON BACKS OR ON
EITHER SIDE OF END UNITS INSTEAD OF COVER PLATES
115 V. IPH. 60 CYCLES, 7AMPS
WEIGHT-CRATED- 792
WEIGHT- UNCRATED- 527
CUBICAL CONTENT- 32.43 CU.FT.
(PACKED FOR SHIPMENT)
POWER INPUT- 750 WATTS
REAR VIEW
NOTES:
ALLOW SIN. CLEARANCE FROM FARTHEST
PROJECTION ON ALL SIDES FOR OPERATION
OF SHOCK MOUNTS.
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
WHEN EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED GROUND CASES
AND SHOCKMOUNTS WITH HEAVY BRAID.
Figure 3-4. Indicator Console, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-7
3-8
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
12 41 OVERALL WIDTH OF PANEL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
7
10-8 OVERALL WIDTH OF CHASSIS
11 *g-32 CAPTIVATED
16 THUMB SCREW
41)CONSOLE
RECEIVER
MtD1ILLIM
SHARP BROAD
I IJS ON
6 ON
SOUS
BAND PASS
OFF OFF
PP I. MRKIIS ECHO BOA
I.F. GAIN
0
Ad. CONTROLS
ORIGINAL
3
11:r
4
WEIGHT
9
2616 OVERALL
3
24 8
z
SECTION 3
CABLE CONNECTS FROM
HERE TO TOP OF CASE
WEIGHT UNCRATED- 53 LBS.
PACKED WITH INDICATOR CONSOLE
(SEE OWG. 7611717 OR MG, 76147421
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 3-5. Console Receiver, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-9
3-10
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
2-4 OVERALL WIDTH OF PANEL
7
IO- OVERALL WIDTH OF CHASSIS
16
4?
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946 '
40'10 -32 CAP rI VA TED
THUMB SCREW
A
INTENSITY
FOCUS
VERTICAL
CENTERING
HORIZONTAL
CENTERING
MARKERS
YARDS
SWEEP
LENGTH
RANGE - YARDS
35500
RANGE
SWITCH
lt?
RANGE SCOPE
'41 `A
2 AMP 3 AMP
FUSE
ALARM
ORIGINAL
3
II 4
FRONT VIEW
4-4?
1
1?16.
WEIGHT
WEIGHT UNCRATED 77 LBS
PACKED WITH INDICATOR CONSOLE
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN INCHES
9
2616 OVERALL
241
SECTION 3
CABLE CONNECTS FROM
HERE TO TOP OF CASE
O0
@0
O0
O0
let
@0
00
?
? 0 0
9
RIGHT SIDE
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Figure 3-6. Range Scope, Outline Diagram
3-11
3-12
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Figure 3-6. Range Scope, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
44
ORIGINAL
HT. OF CHASSIS
63i OVERALL WIDTH OF PANEL
4 OVERALL WIDTH OF CHASSIS -PI
CHALLENGE
MOMENTARY OFF
ON
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
10-32 CAPTIVATED
THUMB SCREW
?y11
4 5392
I. F F. COORCHNINOR
3
26 ? OVERALL
241
SECTION 3
CABLE CONNECTS FROM
HERE TO TOP OF CASE
0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
TI
-L
1 II
,
,..
i ...1
1 ?
?
I (.4_ _ .
s --, .
N
\\ \\
WEIGHT
-
WEIGHT
WEIGHT UNRATED 30 LBS.
PACKED WITH INDICATOR CONSOLE
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN
INCHES
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Figure 3-7. IFF Coordinator, Outline Diagram
3-13
3-14
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Figure 3-7. IFF Coordinator; Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
?
_2
24,6 OVERALL HEIGHT OF PANEL
?
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
I21 OVERALL WIDTH OF PANEL
4
7
108? OVERALL WIDTH OF CHASSIS
-E=451
-
10 32 CAPTIVATED SCREW
?
6
(0
(.0
(.0
?1
FOCUS
FUSE
ALARM
0
RAMP " RAMP
RELATIVE SEARING
INDICA TOR
CENTER
EXPAND
MARKERS
FUSE
ALARM
INSTRUCTION
PLATE
.1 CV
CV 01
04
it
ORIGINAL
II. 750
262 OVERALL LENGTH
3
24 a OVERALL
.e"
WEIGHT
WEIGHT UNCRATED 128 LBS.
PACKED WITH INDICATOR CONSOLE
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN INCHES
Figure 3-8. PPI Indicator, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
SECTION 3
CABLE CONNECTS
FROM HERE TO
TOP OF CASE
3-15
3-16
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
4
ORIGINAL
NAVSHIDeclassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
.-.
3
26,7 OVERALL
CABLE CONNECTS FROM
HERE TO TOP OF CASE
3
24-
8
LEFT SI DE VIEW
NOTES:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
WEIGHTS
WEIGHT UNCRATED ? 70 LBS.
PACKED WITH INDICATOR CONSOLE
(SEE DWG 7611717)
SECTION 3
12 40VERALL WIDTH OF PANEL 0
I0-87- OVERALL WIDTH OF CHASSIS
TRUE I ELAM,/
BEARING I SEARIN
SLEMING MOTOR
ROTATION
PP I
OR NORMAL
EMERGENCY
SURF FUSE 2 AMP
ALARM
4
FRONT VIEW
Figure 3-9. Bearing Indicator, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-17
3-18
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND NAVSHIPS 900,946
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
4 26 OVERALL
24 t
CABLE CONNECTS FROM HERE
/ TO TOP OF CASE
6 k OVERALL WIDTH OF PANEL
-a
'SECTION 3
4 1 OVERALL WIDTH OF CHASSIS ?1.
5123
I
LOCAL TRANSMITTER
CONTROL ON
ta.
0
-J
6
RADIATION
00 I
MOMENTARY OFF ON
RIM
01
ON
RAISE
POWER PLATE ,VOLTAGE
OFF LOWER
V
GENERAL CONTROL
UNIT'
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS
ARE IN INCHES
ORIGINAL
*10-32 CAPTIVATED
? THUMB SCREW
OFF ON
INDICATOR
CONSOLE
WEIGHT UNGRATED-16 LBS
PACKED WITH INDICATOR CONSOLE
(SEE DWG. 7611717 OR DWG. 7614742) ?
Figure 3-10. General Control Unit, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-19
3-20
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
HIM iALLR I 'VII HINIU NAVSHIP5 900,946 SECTION 01
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT Par. 6b(1)
access cover at one side of the dome. Place a small
block of wood or equivalent material on the flange at
the top of the Pedestal to hold the flange on the con-
centric line above the flange face on the Pedestal dur-
ing assembly until the string can be removed. The
wooden spacer should not be thick enough to prevent
the inner concentric lines from partially coming to-
gether. Four bolts project through the Antenna
mounting face of the Pedestal. Insert these bolts until
their ends are flush with the Pedestal face. The An-
tenna is shipped with all components assembled, leav-
ing only the connections to the. Pedestal to be made.
See Fig. 3-11. When placing the Antenna framework
on the Pedestal it is essential that sufficient personnel
or proper crane facilities be available in order to pre-
vent damage to the concentric line when lowering it
upon the Pedestal. Place the gasket on the flange on
the top of the Pedestal and lower the Antenna assem-
bly carefully, making certain that at all times the axis
of the concentric line on the Antenna is in alignment
with the axis of the concentric line of the Pedestal.
(2) Make certain that the fingers of the slotted
connector enter the concentric line of the Antenna.
With the flange of the Antenna concentric line sepa-
rated from the flange on the top of the Pedestal by
the block of wood placed there, remove the string
which was used to compress the fingers of the slotted
conductor. Remove the block of wood, and permit
the flange Antenna concentric line to come into posi-
tion with the flange on the top of the Pedestal. Simul-
taneously, the braces which support the antenna to the
face of the Pedestal must assume their final position
against the face of the Pedestal. In this final position,
the four bolt holes on the face of the Pedestal must
be in alignment with the corresponding four holes in
the Antenna supporting braces.
NOTE
WHEN LOWERING THE CONCENTRIC
LINE OF THE ANTENNA INTO POSI-
TION WITH THE CONCENTRIC LINE OF
THE PEDESTAL, BE EXTREMELY CARE-
FUL TO PREVENT BINDING OF THE
SLIDING SURFACES, AND CONSEQUENT
DAMAGE TO THE LINES.
(3) Push into position the four bolts which hold
the Antenna braces to the face of the Pedestal. Apply
lockwashers and nuts, and tighten until the two holes
drilled laterally through each bolt are in alignment
with the two corresponding holes in the bracket sup-
porting the antenna, and with the corresponding
tapped holes in the Pedestal casting. Use a center-
punch or similar tool to secure alignment of the holes.
Insert the two stud bolts with appropriate lockwashers
in the side of each bracket, and tighten them. Tighten
the nuts on the four bolts which pass through the
front face of the Pedestal. The function of these bolts
is to lock the eight bolts which pass through the side
of the brackets. Insert stud bolts and lockwashers to
ORIGINAL
hold the flange of the Antenna concentric line to the
flange on the top of the Pedestal, and tighten. Mount
the four arms or struts which act as braces between
the Antenna and the Pedestal. The ends of the struts
that should be bolted to the Pedestal may be identified
by the small pipe plug in them. Bolt the Pedestal lug
of each of the struts to the Antenna anchor pad located
on the motor housing near the main body of the Pedes-
tal. Place the lug of the strut beneath the lug of the
junction point or anchor pad. The framework braces
of the Antenna terminate at four places in small hemi-
spherical junction points. The flat surfaces of these
junction points have lugs welded to them. The other
ends of the bracing struts from the Pedestal are bolted
to these lugs.
c. ASSEMBLY OF ANTENNA AND PEDESTAL
TO MAST.
(1) The Antenna Pedestal is rigidly bolted to the
mast by means of eight bolts. The location of these
bolts is indicated on the templates shown in Fig. 3-12
Care should be exercised to make certain that the
location of the bolt holes is in proper relation to the
heading of the ship. To facilitate alignment of the
Antenna and Antenna Pedestal with the bow of the
ship, the stowing lock on the Pedestal should be en-
gaged. In securing the Antenna Pedestal to the mast,
lockwashers must be used under the securing nuts.
Hardware should preferably be of stainless steel. As
in the case of other units, adequate hoisting gear and
sufficient personnel should be available to handle the
Antenna Pedestal. When installing the Antenna to
the mast, care must be taken in lifting the assembly.
Three eyeholes are provided on the top of the Pedestal.
All three of these holes must be used. The Antenna
may be lifted by utilizing the two front eyeholes, but
it will not balance properly. Be careful that none of
the supporting cables lean against the concentric lines
as they are fragile and can be crushed. In case the
proper size chains for the hoisting operation are not
available, a sling under the Pedestal may be used.
CAUTION
CARE MUST BE EXERCISED TO SEE
THAT NO PORTION OF THE SLING
TOUCHES ANY TRANSMISSION LINES.
d. ASSEMBLY OF V.H.F. IFF ANTENNA.
(1) Remove the H.F. system dipole elements and
install V.H.F. system dipole elements. Cut the safety
wire which binds the dipole to the lock nut and
unscrew the dipole elements from the threaded stud.
(2) Screw the V.H.F. dipole element over the
stud until it is tightly seated against the lock nut.
(3) Insert new safety wires and twist them tight
with pliers.
e. ASSEMBLY OF U.H.F. IFF ANTENNA.
(1) Detach the H.F. or the V.H.F. system, which-
ever is in use at the time. To do this, remove the
four bolts holding each of the four IFF Antennas to
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-21
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3 SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
Milarg/VVA
A
jII
rio
LOCKING
STUD
BOLTS
ANTENNA
MOUNTING
FACE
ANTENNA
ANCHOR
PAD
322
Figure 3-11. Assembly of Antenna to Antenna Pedestal
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
ANTENNA
?A"D1M.
'801M.
?C"D1M.
BLUE
152
69
80k
GREEN-
YELLOW
180
72
93k
01
WO*4.444t15
41214$0.14 !
44 ? 440.4
*01....
? .0,441.44vtitt*;
r rift.
*401041*"1,41 ' 4 4 OKI 10 r. '
.01.41040. 11401
I .\411.4?441%
Aoltelite INMMIMENiiiiir IIIMMOMMEM
*" 0 I. lawa 04 ,, ? ri co. , \ .....J
10.4"111.41.4", 44.
.,0.4? .4. 49 4.
-.44:". _.....I.".
BLUE ANTENNA CRATED 760 LBS.
ANTENNA UNCRATED 251 LBS.
CUBICAL CONTENT 324.02 Cu.FT
(PACKED FOR SHIPMENT)
PEDESTAL CRATED 582 LBS.
PEDESTAL UNCRATED 428 LBS.
CUBICAL CONTENT 33.2 CU.FT.
(PACKED FOR SHIPMENT
ORIGINAL
WEIGHT
YELLOW GREEN ANTENNA CRATED 760 LBS.
ANTENNA UNCRATED 272 LBS.
CUBICAL CONTENT 324.02 CU. FT
(PACKED FOR SHIPMENT)
A
SECTION 3
LEGEND
SR
SR-5 '
PART
DESCRIPTION.
NAVY TYPE
NAVY TYPE
I
ANTENNA PEDESTAL
GAJS -212CP
CAJS -21ADO
2
BLUE ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
- 66AHE
-66AHE
3
GREEN- YELLOW ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
-66A&
-66ANF
4
MARK 3 DIPOLE - PURPLE - 11F
-66AN0
-662140
5
MARK 3 DIPOLE - ORANGE - VHF
-66ARN
-66ANH
6
MARK 4 DIPOLE GROUP (SEE NOTE) -UHF
-66AHJ
-MON
7
CONCENTRIC LINES
8
COAXIAL CONNECTOR -RADAR ANTENNA
9
COAXIAL CONNECTOR - IFF. ANTENNA
10
POWER INLET - 1.90 DIA. (THREADED)
NOTE: PART 615 ASSEMBLED ON 7611791.
2 DIA.-8 HOLES
SPACED 45? APART
161-
121
SNIPS HEADING
SECTION A- A
TOP or
NOTE;
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
NOT DRAWN TO SCALE
Figure 3 - I 2. Antenna and Pedestal, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
04
3-23
3-24
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT Par. 6e(1)
the main radar Antenna frame. Unscrew each of the
couplings of the feed line tees with a spanner wrench.
Hold the feed line tee firmly and pull the dipole con-
centric line away from the tee to disengage the inner
line plug. This procedure will permit each of the
dipoles and its associated transmission line to be
removed.
(2) Install the two impedance matching con-
verters, one opposite each of the IFF line tees. Place
the converter through the hole in the radar Antenna
framework, holding it in such a position that the ter-
minal screws are in vertical alignment with the off-set
screw on top. Connect the inner line plug into the
feed line tee being sure that the inner conductors join
together properly. Check the seating of the gasket
and tighten the coupling on the outer line with the
spanner wrench provided.
(3) Install the four dipole arrays, making certain
that each is in its correct position (right end, right
center, left center, left end) as designated on the name-
plate. The connecting lugs located at the joining ends
of each of the two pairs of dipole arrays mesh so that
the terminal lugs line up to receive the terminal screws
on the converters. Fasten these terminals securely;
then apply mounting hardware.
(4) Screw the caps on the open ends of the feed
line tees with the spanner wrench provided.
f. ECHO BOX ANTENNA.
(1) The Echo Box Antenna shown in Fig. 3-13,
is mounted six inches below the main radar Antenna
and in the same plane with the radar dipole above it.
It should be clamped to some firm support. This
support may be the mast or any available rigid surface
located six inches from the bottom of the Antenna.
The clamps used should be fashioned in such a form
as to hold the Echo Box Antenna by passing around
the shield which forms its largest diameter. The
clamps may be made of either a metal or a non-conduc-
tor. If desired, the six-inch dimension may be varied
in order to change the maximum indication which
may be obtained from the echo box indicating meter.
The amount of variation required may be determined
by experiment.
7. INSTALLATION OF SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER.
a. GENERAL.
( 1 ) Both units comprising the Synchro-Amplifier
are designed for bulkhead mounting and should be so
installed that the Electronic Unit cover hinge is at the
bottom and the Synchro Unit switch and terminal
compartment is at the top with the Electronic Unit
above the Synchro Unit. Suitable shockmounts are
provided with these units, and installation is made by
bolting these shockmounts to the bulkhead. It is de-
sirable that the Synchro Amplifier be installed as near
as possible to the Antenna, since the output from the
Synchro-Amplifier must be connected to. the Antenna
ORIGINAL
Pedestal. Sufficient space must be allowed to permit
the cover of the Electronic Unit to be swung open, so
that the Synchro Unit may be removed. Six inches
must be allowed on all sides of the Synchro Unit. The
mounting dimensions are shown in Fig. 3-14.
b. MOUNTING THE UNITS.
(1) The units are mounted by means of metal
blocks welded to the bulkhead and drilled and tapped
to receive the mounting bolts. Instead of small metal
blocks, metal strips may be more conveniently welded,
in the case of the Synchro Unit. The method of bulk-
head mounting is as follows:
(a) Determine the location of the unit, and
mark the position of the mounting holes on the bulk-
head.
(b) Over the position of each hole, weld a steel
block to the bulkhead. The dimensions of this block
should be approximately two inches square and three-
quarters of an inch thick.
(c) Mark the position of each mounting hole
on the steel blocks. Drill and tap each block to take
the mounting screw. The 4 holes to hold the Elec-
tronic Unit should be drilled and tapped for 1/2-13 stud
bolts. The 8 holes for the screws holding the Synchro
Unit should be drilled and tapped for 3/8-16 studs.
(d) Place the Units in position against the bulk-
head and assemble them to the mounting blocks with
the proper studs.
8. INSTALLATION OF ROTATION CONTROL UNIT.
a. GENERAL.
( 1 ) The Rotation Control Unit should be mounted
as near as possible to the Indicator Console, since the
type of bearing indication?true or relative?is con-
trolled from the Rotation Control Unit. A clearance
of two and one-half inches is required on all sides of
the Rotation Control Unit in order that the shock-
mounts have sufficient space in which to function.
The junction box may be mounted on the back or on
either side of the unit as required, for ease in connect-
ing the unit to the other components of the system.
The shockmount clearance must be determined by the
location of the junction box. At least 30 inches must
be allowed at the front of the unit for proper opera-
tion of the controls. See Fig. 3-15.
b. MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS.
( 1) Instructions for mounting the unit are shown
in Fig. 3-15. The shockmounts of the unit are mounted
on two sliders, one on each side of the unit. These
sliders are in turn bolted to the deck. The size of the
holes required for mounting and the drilling plan are
shown in Fig. 3-15. The Rotation Control Unit should
be mounted to the deck by means of tapped holes if
the deck is sufficiently thick to permit tapping. Other-
wise, clearance holes should be drilled and the bolts
secured by means of nuts and lockwashers on the oppo-
site side of the deck. When installing the Rotation
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-25
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 INSTALLATION AND
Par. 813(1) INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
Control Unit, ground the case by connecting a heavy
copper braid between a bolt holding one of the shock-
mounts to the case and a bolt holding the shockmount
to the deck. Suitable terminals must be used on the
braid.
9. INSTALLATION OF SERVO GENERATOR.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The Servo Generator may be located any
convenient place with its axis pointing fore and aft.
Since its crated weight is only 206 pounds, it may be
handled without difficulty either crated or uncrated.
Two lifting eyes are provided to permit the use of a
crane to lift the uncrated unit.
b. MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS.
(1) The unit is fastened to the deck by means of
3/8-16 bolts inserted through eight slotted holes in the
mounting surface at the base of the unit. These bolts
should be of stainless steel or cadmium plated to resist
corrosion. The mounting dimensions for the unit are
shown in Fig. 3-16. The center line of the holes
should be coincident with those of the slots.
10. INSTALLATION OF VOLTAGE STABILIZER.
a. The Voltage Stabilizer may be located at any con-
venient place. The unit is not mounted on shock-
mounts, and therefore does not require special clear-
ance to bulkheads or other units. It should be mounted
where a free circulation of air will be available for
cooling. After the unit is uncrated, it may be lifted
by use of two lifting brackets one on each end of the
unit. These brackets may be removed if desired for
installation in available space. The unit should be
fastened to the deck by means of four bolts. The
drilling plan for these bolts is shown in Fig. 3-17.
The bolts may be fastened by drilling and tapping
appropriate holes in plates welded to the deck. The
bolts should be secured with lockwashers.
11. INSTALLATION OF MOTOR GENERATOR.
a. The Motor Generator should be mounted as near
as possible to the main bus, since this unit requires the
greatest amount of power, and the line voltage drop
must be reduced to a minimum. The requisite infor-
mation for mounting the unit is shown in Figs. 3-18
and 3-19. The unit is shipped assembled to the bed-
plate, and includes the motor, the generator, the ex-
citer, and the coupling. The total uncrated weight
of unit CAY-211182 and CAY-211188 is 2870 pounds,
and that of unit CAY-211326 is 3020 pounds. A crane
will be required to move the unit, which should be
uncrated before attempting to place it in position.
Two lifting eyes are provided; one on the top of the
motor and the other on the top of the generator. The
Motor Generator must be mounted so that its long
axis points fore and aft to minimize wear on the
bearings due to gyroscopic action.
3-26
b. Sufficient space should be allowed at the location
to permit the use of a crane. If this is not possible
the Motor Generator must be moved into position on
rollers. The use of a crane is much more desirable and
is recommended wherever possible. The amount of
space around the Motor Generator should be large
enough to permit the removal of any of the compo-
nents from the bedplate. The dimensions which must
be maintained in installation are shown in Figs. 3-18
and 3-19. As shown, 40 inches must be allowed be-
tween the motor end of the bed plate and any obstruc-
tions; 48 inches must be allowed at the generator end,
and 30 inches must be allowed in front of the bed
plate. The Motor-Generator assembly is fastened to
the deck by means of four 1-inch bolts, preferably of
stainless steel or cadmium plated to resist corrosion
and rust. The drilling plan for these bolts is shown
in Figs. 3-18 and 3-19. The bolts should be secured
by means of lockwashers and nuts.
12. INSTALLATION OF VOLTAGE REGULATOR.
a. The Voltage Regulator, as part of the power
equipment, should be mounted as near as possible to
the Motor-Generator. The uncrated weight of the
unit is 232 pounds. It may be handled easily by three
men. Bulkhead mounting is used, and sufficient space
must be allowed in order that the door will have suffi-
cient clearance in opening. The amount of this clear-
ance is shown in Fig. 3-20. The unit is mounted on
a bulkhead through four mounting holes drilled in
the back of the case. Bulkhead mounting is accom-
plished by means of metal blocks welded to the bulk-
head, drilled and tapped to receive the mounting bolts,
as in the case of the Synchro Amplifier.
13. INSTALLATION OF MAGNETIC CONTROLLER.
a. The Magnetic Controller is also part of the power
supply, and should be mounted as near as possible to
the Motor-Generator. The uncrated weight of the
230-volt unit is 76 pounds, and that of the 115-volt unit
is 130 pounds. Either unit may be handled easily by
two men. As in the case of the Voltage Regulator,
bulkhead mounting is used. Proper clearance must
be allowed so that the door of the unit may have space
in which to swing.
b. The Magnetic Controller should be mounted to
the bulkhead by means of drilled and tapped metal
blocks welded to the bulkhead, as in the case of the
Voltage Regulator. The drilling plan and dimensional
clearances for the unit are shown in Figs. 3-21 and
3-22. The metal blocks should be drilled and tapped
for 3/-16 machine screws, in the case of the 230-volt
unit, and for 3A-10 volts in the case of the 115-volt
unit. Mounting is accomplished in the same manner
as in the case of the Voltage Regulator. The cable
connections are shown in Fig. 3-25.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
PLUG - NAVY TYPE C - 49268
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION
a
4-
ANTENNA TO BE MOUNTED
FROM THIS SECTION ONLY BY
ANY SUITABLE BRACE OR-BRACES
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
WEIGHT
UNCRATED 5 IA LBS.
CRATED L55.
CUBICAL CONTENT GU. IN.
(PACKED FOR SHIPMENT)
44
a
04
4
Figure 3-13. Echo Box Antenna, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-27
3-28
? INSTALLATION AND
'INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
ACCESS TO INTERIOR UNIT
LOOSEN 4 THUMB SCREWS
AND DROP HINGED DOOR.
NAVSHIPS 900,946
18
8 ;
196 ---""
FRONT VIEW
SPACE REQUIRED TO REMOVE
TERMINAL TUBE GLAND NUTS
ACCESS TO FUSES AND TERMINAL
BARS BY LOOSENING .3 THUMB
SCREWS AND LIFTING HINGED
COVER
6
IS
;-a
I
.19
FRONT VIEW
SPACE REQUIRED TO REMOVE
TERMINAL TUBE GLAND NUT
AMPLIFIER
254
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
?(0
0
ACCESS TO INTERIOR UNIT, REMOVE
20 FILISTER HEAD SCREWS AND DROP
LOWER CASE '
SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
FREE RIDING CLEARANCE
ON SHOCK MOUNTS I/4 IN.
(4 HOLES FOR 1/2 BOLT ?
--4)-----14.625
SECTION 3
0
0
DRILLING PLAN
AMPLIFIER WEIGHTS
WEIGHT OF UNIT CRATED 131 LBS.
WEIGHT OF UNIT UN CRATED BB LBS.
CUBICAL CONTENT (CRATED) 6.7 CU FT.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (CRATED)
SYNCHRO AMPLIFIER WEIGHTS
WEIGHT OF UNIT CRATED 209 LBS.
WEIGHT OF UNIT UNCRATED 154 LBS.
CUBICAL CONTENT (CRATED) 7.5 CUFT.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (CRATED)
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
8 HOLES FOR 3/8 BOLT
16.250
DRILLING PLAN
Figure 3-14. Syn.chro Amplifier, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-29
3-30
INSTALLATION AND
" INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
5
17-8 WHEN JUNCTION BOX IS
MOUNTED ON SIDE
ATRIA 3 P AFLUASM
39AP SPARES 89AP
0
30 OVERALL
iORIGINAL
FRONT VIEW
NOTES:
ALLOW 2?I IN. FROM FARTHEST PROJECTION
FOR20PERATION OF SHOCKMOUNTS
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
WHEN INSTALLING UNIT GROUND CASE AND
SHOCKMOUNT WITH HEAVY BRAID.
NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 3
28I-- WHEN JUNCTION BOX IS
6
MOUNTED IN REAR
24/
4-2
SPACE REQUIRED TO REMOVE
IIUNITS FROM CASE
co
JUNCTION BOX
11?
4 MAY BE MOUNTED IN
ANY ONE OF THREE
POSITIONS SHOWN
NOTE:
ARMORED CABLE MAY BE BROUGHT
INTO WIRE INLET BOX FROM TOP,
BOTTOM, OR EITHER SIDE.
ARMOR IS TO BE CUT OFF AT INLET
BOX AND 3 FT. OF WIRE LEADS ARE
TO BE PULLED THROUGH OVAL SLOT
FOR CONNECTION TO TERMINAL BOARDS
30
27-4
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
0
WEIGHT
UNCRATED 217 LBS.
CRATED 325 LBS.
CUBICAL CONTENTS 15.83 CU. FT.
(PACKED FOR SHIPMENT)
FRONT
PANEL
? DIA.
2
4 HOLES,
282
DRILLING PLAN
Figure 3-15. Rotation Control Unit, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-31
3-32
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
' INSTALLATION AND NAVSHIPS 900,946
,INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
VIEW OF MOTOR END
13
014.
8 HOLES
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
ORIGINAL
4 23
5T
MOTOR
GAY- 211193
?1
3i
LIFTING
EYE
SECTION 3
4
LIFTING
EYE
GEN. EXCITER
CAY-29194
GENERATOR
\ ,
MOTOR
GEN.
BRUSH
(180.
APART)
zr.1.1
c 13
16
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
EXCITER
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
WEIGHT
UNCRATED 170 LBS.
CRATED 206 LBS.
CUBICAL CONTENT .3.66 CU. FT.
(PACKED FOR SHIPMENT)
Figure 3-16. Servo Generator, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
EXCITER
BRUSH
(180?APART
7
3-33
3-34
? INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
WEIGHT
CRATED 352 LBS.
UNCRATED 284 LBS.
CUBICAL CONTENT - Z 03 CU. FT.
(PACKED FOR SHIPMENT)
3
_?
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
LIFTING ANGLES MAY BE
REMOVED IF DESIRED
3
4- DIA. -2 HOLES
FOR LIFTING
DIA.- 6 HOLES
FOR MOUNTING
NAVSHIPS 900,946
SECTION 3
21
26 32
TOP VIEW
28
29t MAX,
CAP MAY BE REMOVED
FOR 11 DIA. OPENING (2)
3v-
?, 8 5
MAX.
END VIEW
ORIGINAL
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
Figure 3-17. Voltage Stabilizer, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-35
3-36
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
Il ALLOW 14i INCHES
TO REMOVE EXCITER
ARMATURE OR
FRAME COMPLETE
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
NAVSHIPS 900,946
67
63
0
0
0 0
ALLOW 27 INCHES TO SET
GENERATOR WITH EXCITER
IN FRONT OF BED PLATE
ALLOW 30 INCHES TO
SET MOTOR IN FRONT
OF BED PLATE
DIA. - 4 MOUNTING HOLES
ALLOW 48 INCHES 70 SET GENERATOR
WITH EXCITER AT END OF .BED PLATE
ORIGINAL
67
l'
ALLOW 40 INCHES TO SET
MOTOR AT END OF BED PLATE
EXCITER
CONDUIT
BOX
SECTION 3
NOTES
NAVY TYPE CAY 211182 MOTOR GENERATOR UNIT
A.G. GENERATOR SK MOTOR
CAY-21I184 CAY-21I183
FOR CONVERSION OF 115 V. D. C. TO 115 V.A.C.
NAVY TYPE CAY-21I188 MOTOR GENERATOR UNIT
A. C. GENERATOR SK MOTOR
GAY-211184 GAY-211189
FOR CONVERSION OF 230 V.D. C. TO 115 V AC.
WEIGHTS
*93 SK MOTOR 970 LBS.
*4-19-6 SYN. GENERATOR 950 LBS.
*254 11C. EXCITER 130 LBS.
BED PLATE 800 LBS.
? COUPLING 20 LBS.
TOTAL 2870 LBS.
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
GENERATOR
CONDUIT
BOX
MOTOR
CONDUIT
BOX
Figure 3-18. Motor Generator CAY-211182 and CAY-211188, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21: CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-37
3-38
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
? INSTALLATION AND NAVSHIPS 900,946
.`. INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
111 ALLOW 14i INCHES
TO REMOVE EXCITER
ARMATURE OR
FRAME COMPLETE
42r
a
0
67
63
ALLOW 27 INCHES TO SET
GENERATOR WITH EXCITER
IN FRONT OF BED PLATE
SK
EXCITER
-1ts.
22,7
4-41
A.C.
GENERATOR
14 3
8
3
87?
ALLOW 30 INCHES TO
SET MOTOR IN FRONT
OF BED PLATE
743
SECTION 3
NOTES
MOTOR GENERATOR UNIT
NAVY TYPE CA7-211326
A. C. GENERATOR CAY-211329
SK MOTOR CAY -211327
APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS
DIA. - 4 MOUNTING HOLES *4-19-6 A.C. GENERATOR 1000 LBS.
41'254 SK EXCITER 150 LBS.
At 93 SK MOTOR 1050 LBS.
COUPLING 20 LBS.
BEDPL ATE 800 LBS.
SK
MOTOR
ALLOW 48 INCHES TO SET GENERATOR
WITH EXCITER AT ENO OF BED PLATE
ORIGINAL
67
(0
A
ri
0
ID
2
TERMINAL BOX TO BE
DRILLED BY CUSTOMER
li
ALLOW 40 INCHES TO SET
MOTOR AT END OF BED PLATE
TOTAL 3020 LBS.
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
Figure 3-19. Motor Generator CAY-211326, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341 R000800080001-4
3-39
3-40
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
DOOR SWING CLEARANCE
F4-2
NAVSHIPS 900,946
22
e
,
cr, ?
-
NOTE: WEIGHT UNCRATED 232 LBS.
fl
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
Li
16
9
? DIA (4 CABINET MOUNTING HOLES)-
?
26
ri NAME 'a
LIPLATE._i
SECTION 3
A
Figure 3-20. Voltage Regulators CAY-21I185 and CAY-211185A, Outline Diagrams
ORIGINAL
3-41
3-42
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
Figure 3-20. Voltage Regulators CA Y-211185 and CAY-211185A, Outline Diagrams
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4 -
L _
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND NAVSH IPS 900,946
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
ORIGINAL
-rco-
A
Col 40 so Co
0) op
I DIA (4 CABINET
16
MOUNTING HOLES)
mice
nIT
("4 TEE
/0 2
NAVY TYPE CAY - 21118 7
FOR 230 VDC OPERATION
WEIGHT UNCRATED- 76 LBS.
4-1
13
16 D1A*(4 CABINET
MOUNTING HOLES)
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
0 e 0
0 0 0 0
/.
II
Li
rl
0
2
jj
/6
_
V NAME l9.
5) PLATE rd
e
f4i
le)
0
\..vklY
C
co
_
.
NAVY TYPE CAY - 211181
FOR 115 V DC OPERATION
WEIGHT UNCRATED-130 LBS.
SECTION 3
4
A
A
N
Figure 3-21. Magnetic Controllers CAY-211181 and CAY-21I187, Outline Diagrams
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-43
3-44
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
INSTALLATION AND NAVSHIPS 900,946 SECTION 3
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
TOP VIEW
16
14? ?
8 11
16
5
--A
UNDRILLED LEAD PLATES
ON TOP AND BOTTOM iTK.
PLATES TO BE DRILLED BY
INSTALLING ACTIVITY.
MOUNTING HOLES-4-i DIA.
16
I. et.
"11
S TOP
12
FRONT VIEW
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 3-22. Magnetic Controllers CAY-211325,
Outline Diagram
ORIGINAL
Figure 3-23. Push Button Station CAY-211186 and
CAY-24299, Outline Diagram
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
3-45
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4
SECTION NAVSHIPS 900,946 INSTALLATION AND
Par. 14a INITIAL ADJUSTMENT
Is;
32
osi
TOP VIEW
CLEARANCE FOR
DOOR SWING
3
MOUNTING HOLES
4- DIA.
32
Ef-
Co
0
NA ME PL A TE
fiq
?-a
FRONT VIEW
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Fig. 3-24. Controller Disconnect Line Switch,
Outline Diagram
3-46
14. INSTALLATION OF PUSHBUTTON STATION.
a. The Pushbutton Station should be mounted as
near as possible to the Transceiver. It is bulkhead-
mounted by means of four mounting screws. The
drilling plan for these screws is shown in Fig. 3-23.
The same method of mounting should be used as in
the case of the Voltage Regulator and the Magnetic
Controller. Instead of metal blocks, however, a piece
of metal of the same dimensions as the base of the
pushbutton station may in this case be used. It should
be drilled and tapped for 5/16-18 machine screws.
The unit should be mounted with studs retained by
means of lockwashers.
15. INSTALLATION OF CONTROLLER DISCONNECT
LINE SWITCH.
a. The Controller Disconnect Line Switch should be
mounted in the same area as the other units of the
power supply. It is bulkhead-mounted with four
mounting screws in the same manner as the other
bulkhead-mounted units previously described. The
drilling plan for the unit is shown in Fig. 3-24. The
holes drilled and tapped in the metal blacks welded
to the bulkhead should be made to take 1/2-13 machine
screws.
16. INTERCONNECTION OF MAJOR UNITS.
a. GENERAL.
(1) The method of interconnection between the
various units of the SR system is shown schematically
in Fig. 3-25. This master interconnection diagram
shows the path to be followed by each connection
between the individual units, and the type of cable to
be used. The method of entering the individual units
with the cable, and the method of connecting ter-
minals to the cables will be discussed in these para-
graphs.
b. TRANSCEIVER.
(1) Four types of cable connections are made to
the Transceiver. The high power r-f cable is used to
conduct the output pulse from the Transceiver to the
radar Antenna, and to return the received pulse to the
receiving units. This cable is a Type RG-20/U. The
method of terminating this cable is shown in Fig. 3-26.
The same type of connector is used at each end of the
cable. At the Transceiver, the cable is brought into
the unit through an opening provided in the rear
shield of the Transceiver, near the duplexer. The con-
nector on the end of the cable is fastened to the
duplexer by means of the two machine screws, which
fit into tapped holes in the duplexer assembly. At the
Antenna Pedestal, the connector on the cable fits into
a connector at the base of the Pedestal. This con-
nector is of the same type as that used on the duplexer,.
and is shown in Fig. 3-30. Throughout its run, the
cable should be firmly clamped to rigid supports at
frequent intervals in order to prevent movement of
the cable and consequent damage.
ORIGINAL
Declassified and Approved For Release 2013/11/21 : CIA-RDP67B00341R000800080001-4